IBM Training Filenet CM 5-2 Implementation and Administration - Excercises PDF

V10.
cover
IBM Training Front cover

Student Exercises
IBM FileNet Content Manager 5.2: System Implementation and

Administration
Course code F115 ERC 6.0
Student Exercises
Trademarks
IBM, the IBM logo, and ibm.com are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business
Machines Corp., registered in many jurisdictions worldwide.
The following are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation, registered in many
jurisdictions worldwide:
Cognos WebSphere DB2
FileNet Lotus Notes
Prospect Quickr Tivoli
Adobe is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United
States, and/or other countries.
Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other
countries, or both.
Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Oracle and/or its affiliates.
Other product and service names might be trademarks of IBM or other companies.
May 2015 edition

The information contained in this document has not been submitted to any formal IBM test and is distributed on an as is basis without
any warranty either express or implied. The use of this information or the implementation of any of these techniques is a customer
responsibility and depends on the customers ability to evaluate and integrate them into the customers operational environment. While
each item may have been reviewed by IBM for accuracy in a specific situation, there is no guarantee that the same or similar results will
result elsewhere. Customers attempting to adapt these techniques to their own environments do so at their own risk.
This information contains examples of data and reports used in daily business operations. To illustrate them as completely as possible,
the examples include the names of individuals, companies, brands, and products. All of these names are fictitious, and any similarity to
the names and addresses used by a real business enterprise is entirely coincidental.
Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2013, 2015.

This document may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.
US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
V10.1
Student Exercises
TOC Table of Contents

Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Course description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Unit 0. Course introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-1

0.1. Roles and responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3
Roles and responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4
Activities that you need to complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5
Role descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6
Solution development and deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-7
Course overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8
Course Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-10
Unit 1. Introduction to IBM FileNet Content Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Unit Lessons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Lesson 1.1. Introduction to IBM FileNet Content Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Introduction to IBM FileNet Content Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
What is IBM FileNet Content Manager? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
IBM FileNet P8 product bundles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Content management capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Integration capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Social capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
IBM FileNet Content Manager solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Industry examples of solutions on FileNet P8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Lesson 1.2. System Architecture and Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
System Architecture and Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Activities that you need to complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Single-server versus distributed systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Sample distributed system architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Student system details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Core components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
Content Platform Engine: Content components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Content Platform Engine: Process components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Components that must be started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Component dependencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Determine Content Platform Engine status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Start and stop the Content Platform Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
Startup troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
Lesson 1.3. Use Content Navigator to Work with Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
Use Content Navigator to Work with Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
Objects, properties, and classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48
Copyright IBM Corp. 2013, 2015 Table of Contents iii

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Exercises
Folders and documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-50

Adding content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-52
Document versioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-55
Version status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-57
IBM Content Navigator interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-58
IBM Content Navigator Viewers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-60
FileNet Viewer interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-61
Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-62
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-64
Lesson 1.4. Content Storage Concepts and Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-65
Content Storage Concepts and Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-66
Activities that you need to complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-67
Content Engine storage components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-68
What is a FileNet P8 domain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-69
What is a site? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-71
Sample FileNet P8 domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-72
Object stores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-73
What is the object store database? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-74
Object store table schemas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-76
What is a file storage area? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-77
What is a content cache area? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-79
Using object store components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-80
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-81
Unit 2. Build an Object Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1

Unit lessons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Lesson 2.1. Create an Object Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Create an Object Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Activities that you need to complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
What is an Object Store? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
What is IBM FileNet Configuration Manager? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Testing JDBC Data Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Database Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Sharing Database Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Prepare to Create an Object Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Add-ons for an Object Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Modifying an Object Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Lesson 2.2. Create a File Storage Area and a Storage Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Create a File Storage Area and a Storage Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Storing content for Content Platform Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
File Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
File Storage Area Directory Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
File Storage Area Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27
Guidelines for Managing File Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Content Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Resource statuses of File Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Storage Area Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Storage Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Assigning Storage Areas to a Storage Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
iv System Implementation and Administration Copyright IBM Corp. 2013, 2015

V10.1
Student Exercises
TOC Use Storage Policies to Distribute the Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

Storage Policies and Storage Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Set default storage location for a Document class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Lesson 2.3. Create Properties and Choice Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Create Properties and Choice Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
What is a Property? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
What is a Property Template? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
What is a Property Definition? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
What are Choice Lists? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Using Choice Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
How are Classes, Properties, and Choice Lists Related? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Working with Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Lesson 2.4. Create Document and Folder Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Create Document and Folder Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
What is a Class? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Class Inheritance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
Containment Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
What are Document Objects? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
Steps to Create a Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
Guidelines for Creating or Modifying a Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Lesson 2.5. Modify Classes and Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Modify Classes and Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
Changing a Display Name for a Metadata Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
Modifying a Choice List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
Assigning a Different Document Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
Metadata Dependencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82
Deleting metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
Delete a property template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84
Remove property definitions from a class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
How do you find metadata dependencies? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86
Delete a class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
Unit 3. Extend Content Platform Engine Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Unit lessons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Lesson 3.1. Create a Subscription with an Event Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Create a Subscription with an Event Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
About Server Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Events and Subscriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Define Subscription Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Workflow Subscription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Launching Workflows: Property Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Expressions in Event Subscriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Copyright IBM Corp. 2013, 2015 Table of Contents v

Student Exercises
Steps to create an Event Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15

Update Event Action with new code module version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Disabling Subscriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Subscription Run Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20
Unit 4. Configure IBM Content Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1

Unit lessons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
Lesson 4.1. Configure a Content Navigator Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Configure a Content Navigator Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Common administrative configuration tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
IBM Content Navigator web client components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
IBM Content Navigator Admin Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Repository connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Repository configuration parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Configure desktops for business roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Customizing Menus and Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Customizing the Layout and Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18
Viewer Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19
Configuring Content Navigator web client label text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21
Configuring Content Navigator for workflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Controlling user access to desktops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
Server logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26
Unit 5. Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1

Unit lessons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Lesson 5.1. Security Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Security Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Security in the IBM FileNet P8 domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7
Authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
Security principals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Users and groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Security realms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Access rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Security sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Security sources and order of evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Lesson 5.2. Modify Direct Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Modify Direct Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
What is direct security? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Access Control From Workplace XT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Access Control from IBM Content Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Permission Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Permission Levels in FileNet Enterprise Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
vi System Implementation and Administration Copyright IBM Corp. 2013, 2015

V10.1
Student Exercises
TOC Lesson 5.3. Configure Object Store Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

Configure Object Store Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Required Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Configure Object Store Administrators and Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Example security scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Overview of Initial Security Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Super Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Update object store with new principals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Root folder security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Lesson 5.4. Configure Class and Property Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Configure Class and Property Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Default instance security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Setting default instance security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Property modification security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Configure Property Modification Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
System Property Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
Lesson 5.5. Configure Security Inheritance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Configure Security Inheritance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Overview of Security Inheritance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
Definition of terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
Security Inheritance Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
Characteristics of inherited permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
Inheritable permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
Methods for configuring security inheritance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Use a Security Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
Use an object as a security proxy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
Lesson 5.6. Work with Security Policies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
Work with Security Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
Document version states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
Two kinds of security templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
Security policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
Security policy architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
When to use security policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
Security policy guidelines (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80
Security policy guidelines (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
Security Policy Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
Unit 6. Optimizing Search Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Unit lessons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Lesson 6.1. Create Property Indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Create Property Indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Copyright IBM Corp. 2013, 2015 Table of Contents vii

Student Exercises
Searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
What is property-based searching? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
Content Engine and the database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
How a user request can affect the database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9
What are property indexes? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
Locating data without an index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
Indexing properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
Property indexing guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14
Lesson 6.2. Create Stored Searches and Search Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15
Create Stored Searches and Search Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-16
Why do you create searches? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18
Considerations for creating searches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-19
An overview of searches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-20
Types of searches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-21
Simple search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-22
Search Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-23
Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-24
Search criteria options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-25
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-26
Lesson 6.3. Configure Content Search Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-27
Configure Content Search Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-28
What is content-based retrieval (CBR)? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-30
What is a content index? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-31
What is IBM Content Search Services? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-32
Starting and stopping IBM Content Search Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-33
What is an index area? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-34
Use affinity groups to control server assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-35
Enable Content Based Retrieval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-37
Domain level tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-39
IBM Content Search Server console commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-40
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-42
Lesson 6.4. Configure Index Partitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-43
Configure Index Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-44
What is an index partition? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-46
Configuring Index partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-47
Settability values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-48
Selecting a string property for an index partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-49
Use a date property for a partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-50
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-51
Lesson 6.5. Create Content Based Indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-53
Create Content Based Indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-54
Index areas and full-text indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-56
Index area states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-57
Automatic activation of index areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-59
Enable Content Based Retrieval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-61
Object store level tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-63
viii System Implementation and Administration Copyright IBM Corp. 2013, 2015
V10.1
Student Exercises
TOC Create an index area object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64

Index jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
How to run a CBR search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
CBR SQL query format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70
CBR enabled properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71
Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
Lesson 6.6. Optimize CBR Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
Optimize CBR Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
Combined CBR ad database searches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
How the mixed query works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79
CBR Query Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81
Handling requests for ranked results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
Configure CBR query optimization options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84
Unit 7. Deploy Assets with FileNet Deployment Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Unit lessons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Lesson 7.1. Configure Deployment Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Configure Deployment Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
What is application deployment? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
What is a FileNet application? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
FileNet P8 data and configuration information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
What is FileNet Deployment Manager? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Connected and Disconnected Uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
IBM FileNet Application Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
What is an environment? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Deployment process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
How to create an environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Deployment Tree Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Terminology review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Lesson 7.2. Export Assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Export Assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Export assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Exporting assets overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Asset preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
What is an Export Manifest? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
How do you add assets to the Export Manifest? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Select Include Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
What Type of Data to Export? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Asset Include Option propagation example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Export Options dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Deploy Dataset structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Deploy Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Deployment Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Copyright IBM Corp. 2013, 2015 Table of Contents ix

Student Exercises
Lesson 7.3. Retrieve source and destination half maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-41

Retrieve source and destination half maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-42
Prepare Half Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-44
How to create half maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-45
Retrieve Object Store Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-46
Retrieve Security Principal Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-47
Retrieve Security Principal Data - Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-48
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-50
Lesson 7.4. Map and Convert Assets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-51
Map and Convert Assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-52
Map and convert assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-54
Create the Source-Destination Pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-55
What options are available for Data Maps? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-56
What is an Object Store Map? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-57
What is an Object Store Map? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-59
Data Map Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-61
View and update a data map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-62
Edit labels: Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-64
What is a Security Principal Map? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-65
Many-to-one security principal mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-66
Convert assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-67
Troubleshoot conversion issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-68
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-70
Lesson 7.5. Analyze and Import Assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-71
Analyze and Import Assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-72
Analyze and import assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-74
What is a Change Impact Analysis Report? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-75
Analyze a Change Impact Analysis Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-77
Resolve failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-78
Change Impact Analysis Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-79
Import Options window (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-80
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-87
Unit 8. Manage Sweep Jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1

Unit lessons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Lesson 8.1. Configure a Sweep Job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Configure a Sweep Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
Sweep Framework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Sweep Framework Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Types of Sweeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Job Sweeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Use Bulk Move Content Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Properties of Bulk Move Content Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Sweep Job Monitoring tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
x System Implementation and Administration Copyright IBM Corp. 2013, 2015

V10.1
Student Exercises
TOC Filter Expression Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

Storage Policy Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
End Replication After Move Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Lab Scenario: Objects Used for Bulk Move Content Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Lesson 8.2. Work with Sweep Policies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Work with Sweep Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Policy-Controlled Sweeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Sweep Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Disposal Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Properties of Policy-Controlled Sweeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
More information about other Sweeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Queue Sweeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Retention Update Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Thumbnail Generation Job Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Unit 9. System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Unit Lessons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Lesson 9.1. Perform Searches and Bulk Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Perform Searches and Bulk Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Actions on Multiple Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Types of Multiple-object Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Actions and Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Perform Bulk Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Perform Batch Operations (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Perform Batch Operations (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Lesson 9.2. Work with Audit Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Work with Audit Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
What is auditing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Why audit? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Audit Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Audit Definition Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Object operations that you can audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Audit entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Audit Definition Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
View Audit Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Audit Disposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Where to configure auditing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Lesson 9.3. Work with System Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Work with System Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Content Platform Engine System Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
System Log Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Trace Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Trace Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Copyright IBM Corp. 2013, 2015 Table of Contents xi

Student Exercises
Web Application Server Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37

More Tools for the Workflow System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38
Guidelines: Monitor Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39
Guidelines: Manage the Growth Of Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41
xii System Implementation and Administration Copyright IBM Corp. 2013, 2015
V10.1
Student Exercises
TMK
Trademarks
The reader should recognize that the following terms, which appear in the content of this training
document, are official trademarks of IBM or other companies:
IBM, the IBM logo, and ibm.com are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business
Machines Corp., registered in many jurisdictions worldwide.
The following are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation, registered in many
jurisdictions worldwide:
Cognos WebSphere DB2
FileNet Lotus Notes
Prospect Quickr Tivoli
Adobe is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United
States, and/or other countries.
Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other
countries, or both.
Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Oracle and/or its affiliates.
Other product and service names might be trademarks of IBM or other companies.
Copyright IBM Corp. 2013, 2015 Trademarks xiii

Student Exercises
xiv System Implementation and Administration Copyright IBM Corp. 2013, 2015
V10.1
Student Exercises
Unit 1. Introduction to IBM FileNet Content

EXNoSideHead
Manager
Unit overview
Lessons
Lesson 1.1, "Introduction to IBM FileNet Content Manager," on page 1-3
Lesson 1.2, "System Architecture and Startup," on page 1-9
Lesson 1.3, "Use IBM Content Navigator to Work with Content," on
page 1-23
Lesson 1.4, "Content Storage Concepts and Components," on page 1-39
Requirements
The activities in this unit assume that you have access to the student system
configured for these activities.
Copyright IBM Corp. 2013, 2015 Unit 1. Introduction to IBM FileNet Content Manager 1-1
Student Exercises
1-2 System Implementation and Administration Copyright IBM Corp. 2013, 2015
V10.1
Student Exercises
Lesson
EXNoSideHead 1.1. Introduction to IBM FileNet Content Manager
Overview
Why is this lesson important?

You are new to IBM FileNet Content Manager. You must know what IBM
FileNet Content Manager is and how it is used.
Activities
Identify functions of IBM FileNet Content Manager solutions: Written
exercise, on page 1-5
Explore the architecture: Interactive exercise, on page 1-7
User accounts
Type User ID Password

Operating system administrator passw0rd
WebSphere P8Admin IBMFileNetP8
Administrator
Note
Passwords are always case-sensitive.
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Identify
EXNoSideHead functions of IBM FileNet Content Manager solutions:
Written exercise
Introduction
Identify the functions of IBM FileNet Content Manager solutions. For each question, indicate the
correct answer or the best answer.
1. Which product is the core of the IBM FileNet P8 family of products?
a. IBM Case Manager
b. IBM Content Manager
c. IBM FileNet Content Manager
d. IBM Content Federation Services
2. Which two clients connect to IBM FileNet Content Manager by using FileNet Collaboration
Services?
a. Microsoft Office and SharePoint
b. IBM Connections and Lotus Quickr
c. IBM Content Manager OnDemand and SAP
d. IBM Enterprise Records and IBM Case Manager
3. A user can tag managed objects by using which client?
a. IBM Connections
b. FileNet Workplace XT
c. Administration Console for the Content Platform Engine
d. Application Engine
4. IBM FileNet Content Manager is the former name of the product IBM Content Manager.
True or False?
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Explore
EXNoSideHead the architecture: Interactive exercise
Introduction
An interactive architecture diagram is included on your student system. Take
a few minutes to explore the diagram and then answer the questions that
follow.
Instructions
1. Log on to your student system as Administrator:
- User name: Administrator
- Password: passw0rd
2. Open the P8 Architecture folder on the desktop of your student system.
3. Open P8 Architecture.htm in Firefox.
4. Take a few moments to explore the system architecture diagrams.
- Hover your cursor over components to read about them.
- Click components to learn more about them.
- Click the Main Map button to go back to the start.
5. Answer the questions in the following section.
Questions
Select the best answer.
1. Where does the component integrator for non-legacy components run?
a. Application Engine.
b. FileNet Workplace XT.
c. Rendition Engine.
d. Content Platform Engine.
2. Which product uses OLAP cubes?
a. Case Analyzer
b. Rendition Engine
c. Datacap
d. Image Services Resource Adapter
Student Exercises
3. Rendition is based on which product?

a. Adobe PDF Maker.
b. Liquent InSight Rendering
c. FileNet Image Services
d. Datacap
4. What controls document security after it is declared as a record?
a. A security template
b. A record template
c. A record object
d. A security object
5. What protocol does the Content Platform Engine use to communicate with the Rules Listener?
a. SOAP
b. TCP/IP
c. RPC
d. HTTP
V10.1
Student Exercises
Lesson
EXNoSideHead 1.2. System Architecture and Startup
Overview

You are going to implement a business solution on an IBM FileNet Content
Manager system. You must be able to identify the system components and
their functions.
You are going to be working with an IBM FileNet Content Manager system.
Occasionally, you must stop or restart the system.
Activities
Identify system components: Written exercise, on page 1-11
Start and stop System Components: Activity, on page 1-13
Verify that the system is started: Activity, on page 1-19
User accounts

Administrator
Note
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Identify
EXNoSideHead system components: Written exercise
Introduction
Identify the function of each system component. For each question, indicate the correct answer or
the best answer.
1. The Content Platform Engine handles process management services.
True or False?
2. Which component is not an IBM FileNet P8 component?

a. Rendition Engine
b. Content Navigator
c. Object store
d. Directory service
3. What is the primary administration tool for the Content Platform Engine?
a. Administration Console for the Content Platform Engine
b. FileNet Enterprise Manager
c. Configuration Manager
d. Deployment Manager
4. You can log in to Administration Console for the Content Platform Engine, but you cannot see
any of the object stores. Which cause is most likely?
a. The application server is down.
b. IBM FileNet Content Manager is down.
c. The directory service is down.
d. The RDBMS is down.
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Start
EXNoSideHead and stop System Components: Activity
Introduction
In this activity, you start the IBM Content Manager system and then use the
Ping pages to check the system status. You then shut down individual
components and observe the results of the component dependencies.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Start WebSphere Application Server," on page 1-13
Procedure 2, "View the Content Engine Startup Context page," on page 1-14
Procedure 3, "Open the Content Platform Engine log files," on page 1-14
Procedure 4, "View the Process Engine Server Information (Ping Page)," on
page 1-14
Procedure 5, "View web applications," on page 1-15
Procedure 6, "Shutdown individual components," on page 1-16
Procedure 7, "Restart the system components," on page 1-17
Procedure 1: Start WebSphere Application Server

WebSphere Application Server hosts the following applications:
Tivoli Directory Server Administration tool
Content Platform Engine
IBM Content Navigator
Administration Console for Content Platform Engine
FileNet Workplace XT
1. Click Start > All Programs > IBM WebSphere > IBM WebSphere Application Server V8.5 >
Profiles > AppSrv01 > Start the server.
2. Wait for the Start the server window to close.
Note
You can also use the Start the Server batch file in the WebSphere Admin folder on the desktop to
start WebSphere Application Server.
Student Exercises
Procedure 2: View the Content Engine Startup Context page

The Content Engine Startup Context (Ping Page) provides detailed information about the Content
Platform Engine. You can use the Ping Page to quickly determine whether the Content Platform
Engine is running.
1. Use Firefox to open the Content Engine Startup Context page.
- http://ecmedu01:9080/FileNet/Engine
- In general, the URL is http://<server>:<port>/FileNet/Engine.
2. Verify the following information:
- Product name: P8 Content Platform Engine - 5.2.0
- Log file location: C:\Program
Files\IBM\WebSphere\AppServer\profiles\AppSvr01\FileNet\server1
- P8 Domain: P8Domain
- JDBC Driver: IBM DB2 JDBC Universal Driver Architecture 3.62.56
Procedure 3: Open the Content Platform Engine log files

Inspect the Content Platform Engine log files. If startup problems occur, the log files provide
information for troubleshooting.
1. Go to the location of the log files that you identified in the previous procedure.
2. View each log file by using Notepad.
- p8_server_error.log
- p8_server_trace.log
- pesvr_system.log
- pesvr_trace.log
Note
The Content Platform Engine has two main services: Content Services and Process Services. Both
services create log files in the same location. Content Service log files begin with p8, while
Process Service log files begin with pe.
Procedure 4: View the Process Engine Server Information (Ping Page)

The Process Service also has a ping page.
1. Use Firefox to open the Process Engine Server Information (Ping Page).
- http://ecmedu01:9080/peengine/IOR/ping
- In general, the URL is http://<server>:<port>/peengine/IOR/ping.
2. If prompted, log on as P8Admin.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead - User name: P8Admin

- Password: IBMFileNetP8
3. Review the information on this page.
- Some of the information is the same as on the Content Engine ping page.
- The Process Engine ping page includes Helpful links at the bottom of the page.
- The Database row shows database connection information.
Procedure 5: View web applications

You can view the applications that are running in the WebSphere Administrative Console. From
there, you can also shut down and restart any web application individually.
1. Use Firefox to open the WebSphere Administrative Console:
- https://ecmedu01:9043/ibm/console
- In general, the URL is https://<server>:<port>/ibm/console
Note
The URL is a secure location. Do not forget to include the s in https.
2. Log in to WebSphere Integrated Solutions Console as P8Admin.

- User name: P8Admin
3. In the navigation pane, go to Applications > Application Types > WebSphere enterprise
applications.
4. Verify that the following applications are running (running applications display a green arrow in
the Application Status column):
Application name Purpose
FileNetEngine IBM Content Platform Engine
IDSWebApp Directory Services Web Administration console.
WorkplaceXT FileNet Workplace XT
p8docs Local P8 5.2 Information Center
navigator IBM Content Navigator
SampleEDSService A sample external data service
Student Exercises
Procedure 6: Shutdown individual components

In this procedure, you shut down the components individually. You are viewing the Enterprise
Applications in the WebSphere Integrated Solutions Console.
1. Stop FileNet Workplace XT and IBM Content Navigator:
a. In WebSphere Integrated Solutions Console, select the FileNet Workplace XT and IBM
Content Navigator applications.
b. Click Stop.
c. Wait for the Application Status to change to stopped.
2. Stop FileNetEngine.
3. Log out from WebSphere integrated Solutions Console.
4. Stop WebSphere Application Server:
a. Click Start > All Programs > IBM WebSphere > IBM WebSphere Application Server V8.5 >
Profiles > AppSrv01 > Stop the server.
b. Enter the following username and password to stop the server:
Note
You can also use Stop the Server.bat in the WebSphere Admin folder on the desktop. The batch file
enters the username and password for you.
5. Stop the database server software for the Content Platform Engine:
a. Open the Windows Services Console: Click Start > Services.
b. Locate the two DB2 server instances:
c. Stop these two database services.
Note
IBM Tivoli directory Server Instance V6.3 - dsrdbm01 stops when you stop the directory database
instance.
V10.1
Student Exercises
Procedure
EXNoSideHead 7: Restart the system components
1. Start the Directory Server and Content Platform Engine database DB2 server instances in this
order:
a. DB2 - TDSV63DB2 - DSRDBM01 (Directory Services DB2 instance)
b. DB2-TDSV63DB2 - DB2TDS63-0 (Content Platform Engine DB2 instance)
c. IBM Tivoli Directory Server Instance V6.3 - dsrdbm01 (Directory server)
2. Start WebSphere Application Server.
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Verify
EXNoSideHead that the system is started: Activity
Introduction
In this exercise, you check that the system is running and functioning
normally. Whenever you start working with a system in an unknown state, it is
useful to do a quick verification to ensure that all of the components are
started.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Check Content Platform Engine status," on page 1-19
Procedure 2, "Check object store connectivity," on page 1-19
Procedure 3, "Check the workflow system," on page 1-20
Procedure 1: Check Content Platform Engine status

Open the ping pages to verify that the Content Platform Engine is running. If the ping pages do not
display, start the system.
1. Open the Content Engine ping page:
2. Open the Process Engine ping page as P8Admin
- http://ecmedu01:9080/peengine/IOR/ping
Procedure 2: Check object store connectivity

1. Open the Administration Console for the Content Platform Engine website in Firefox:
http://ecmedu01:9080/acce
2. Log on to Administration Console for the Content Platform Engine as P8Admin.
Student Exercises
3. Verify object store connectivity by expanding the object store node and selecting the object
stores to view their properties
- If you get an error when you attempt to open the object store, the object store database
might be offline.
4. Log out from Administration Console for the Content Platform Engine.
Procedure 3: Check the workflow system

One quick way to check the workflow system is to open the Tasks page. The Tasks page connects
to the process region and displays tasks that are assigned to you. If it cannot connect to the
process region, then the process service is not running, or FileNet Workplace XT is configured
incorrectly.
Information
If you see a Java update message, select the Do not ask me again option and then click Later.
1. Log on to FileNet Workplace XT as P8Admin.

a. Use Firefox to browse to http://ecmedu01:9080/WorkplaceXT.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead b. Log on as P8Admin

User name: P8Admin
Password: IBMFileNetP8
2. Verify that the workflow system is running by clicking the Tasks page icon.
- If the Tasks page opens to My Inbox, then the workflow system is running.
3. Log out from FileNet Workplace XT.
4. Close the browser.
Summary
In this lesson, you started the P8 system and verified that the components started.
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Lesson
EXNoSideHead 1.3. Use IBM Content Navigator to Work with Content
Overview

You are planning to implement a FileNet P8 Content Manager system. Most
users are going to use Content Navigator to work with documents. You need
to understand how users are going to use Content Navigator.
Activities
Use IBM Content Navigator to work with content: Tour, on page 1-25
Practice working with content: Exercises, on page 1-35
User accounts

P8 Administrator P8Admin IBMFileNetP8
Loan Officer Olivia filenet
Clerk Clark filenet
P8User Pamela filenet
Note
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Use
EXNoSideHead IBM Content Navigator to work with content: Tour
Introduction
Perform the procedures in this lesson to learn basic content management
skills.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Log in to IBM Content Navigator," on page 1-25
Procedure 2, "Browse object stores," on page 1-26
Procedure 3, "Inspect document properties," on page 1-26
Procedure 4, "View document content," on page 1-27
Procedure 5, "Create annotations," on page 1-27
Procedure 6, "Search for documents by title," on page 1-28
Procedure 7, "Search for documents by using other metadata," on page 1-28
Procedure 8, "Add folders," on page 1-29
Procedure 9, "Add a document to an object store," on page 1-30
Procedure 10, "Optional: Test document security," on page 1-31
Procedure 11, "File a document," on page 1-31
Procedure 12, "Checkout," on page 1-32
Procedure 13, "Optional: Verify document reservation," on page 1-32
Procedure 14, "Check in," on page 1-33
Procedure 15, "Inspect document versions," on page 1-33
Procedure 1: Log in to IBM Content Navigator

1. Open Firefox and go to http://ecmedu01:9080/navigator.
2. Log in to Content Navigator as Olivia:
- User name: Olivia
- Password: filenet
Information
IBM Content Navigator is configured to open to the Browse page on your system. The default
repository is the Sales object store.
Student Exercises
Procedure 2: Browse object stores

Olivia has access to multiple object stores. As Olivia, you can browse the Sales object store and the
LoanProcess object store. The Sales object store opens by default.
1. Open the LoanProcess object store by selecting LoanProcess from the object store menu.
2. Inspect the folders and contents in the LoanProcess object store by expanding the folder nodes
and viewing the contents in the contents panel.
3. Select the Loans folder. The folder contents are displayed in the content area.
4. Select the document titled J Jones Loan.
5. Review the information that is displayed in the properties pane on the right.
Note
The document class is HomeLoan, which includes many custom properties that are specific to
home loan documents, such as CustomerName, Address, LoanAmount, DownPayment. Content
Navigator also provides a preview of the document.
Procedure 3: Inspect document properties

You can get more details about the document properties by using the Properties page.
1. With the J Jones Loan document selected, click Properties. The Properties page opens to the
Property tab by default.
2. Inspect the property values for this document.
3. Verify that the property values are visible, but not editable by attempting to change the
LoanAmount value.
4. Expand the System Properties section at the bottom of the Properties window. System
properties are read-only.
5. Click the Security tab.
6. Verify that Olivia, as a member of the Loan Officers group, is a reader for this document, but is
not an author or an owner.
7. Click the Versions tab. This document has only one version.
8. Click Folders Filed In. This document is filed in only one folder.
9. Click Cancel.
V10.1
Student Exercises
10. Log out from IBM Content Navigator.

EXNoSideHead
Procedure 4: View document content

The IBM Content Navigator Viewer provides many tools that you can use to change how you view
the document, including rotating, flipping, reversing, and splitting the views on the screen.
1. Log in to IBM Content Navigator as P8Admin:
2. Open J Jones Loan document.
a. Open the LoanProcess object store.
b. Open the Loans folder.
c. Select J Jones Loan.
d. Click Actions > Open. The document opens in the Viewer.
3. Experiment with the Viewer controls to magnify, rotate, and invert the image.
4. Return the image to its original view.
5. Click the View item properties button to view the image and properties at the same time.
Procedure 5: Create annotations

The Viewer provides tools for adding annotations to the document. If you have Author access to the
document, you can save the annotations.
1. Use the Draw Highlight annotator to highlight the Down Payment amount.
2. Hover your cursor over the highlighted area. Verify that the annotation has associated
metadata.
Student Exercises
3. Right-click the highlighted area. New controls open that allow you to change or delete the
annotation.
4. Delete the annotation.
5. Add a stamp that shows that the document was approved:
a. Click the Stamps button.
b. Select Reviewed <user><date>
c. Click the open space at the top of the document, just to the right of the word LoanID.
d. Click somewhere else on the page. The stamp automatically includes your user name and
the date.
6. Click the Save button to save your annotation changes.
7. Close the Viewer.
Procedure 6: Search for documents by title

IBM Content Navigator includes a search tool for finding documents. You can use this tool to search
for documents or folders by their metadata. You are signed in as p8admin and you have the
LoanProcess object store open.
1. Click the Search icon.
2. Create a search:
a. Click New Search.
b. Enter the following search options:
Property Operator Value
Document Title Like Jones
3. Click Search to execute the search.
4. Verify that the Joness loan document is returned, as well as two bank statements.
Procedure 7: Search for documents by using other metadata

Searches can be more useful if you use more specific properties. In this example, you are
interested in loans over $250,000.
1. Expand the Search Criteria area.
2. Create and execute a search for all loan documents for which the LoanAmount is greater than
250000.
V10.1
Student Exercises
3. Verify that your results match the graphic:

EXNoSideHead
Procedure 8: Add folders

When you add a document or folder, you set the property values and the security. You are going to
add two folders. The first folder is going to be for Loan Officers. The second folder is for all P8
users.
1. Log in to IBM Content Navigator as Clark, a clerk.
- User name: Clark
- Password: filenet
2. Open the Sales object store.
3. Click New Folder
4. Name the folder New Docs.
5. Expand the security area to specify folder security:
a. In the Security area, click Select.
b. Select Groups in the Search for menu.
c. Type Clerks in the search field.
d. Click Search.
e. Select Clerks and use the arrow button to add them to the Selected field.
f. Select Author from the Permissions menu.
Student Exercises
g. Click Add.
b c d
Clerks
Clerks
h. Verify that Clerks are now listed in the Author permission area.
i. Click the X to remove P8Users from the Reader permission area.
6. Click Add to create the folder.

7. Verify that you can see your new folder.
8. Create a second folder named Public that allows all P8Users to add documents.
a. Click New Folder.
b. Name the folder Public.
c. In the Security area, click the P8Users link.
d. Select Authors from the menu.
e. Click OK. P8Users are moved from Readers to Authors.
f. Click Add.
Procedure 9: Add a document to an object store

You can add documents to the folder that you recently created.
1. Open the New Docs folder.
V10.1
Student Exercises
2. Add a document to this folder.

EXNoSideHead
a. Click Add Document.
b. Click Browse to select a document from the local machine.
c. Browse to C:\SalesQA\Content.
d. Select the Approved Basic Model 200.doc
e. Click Open.
f. In the Document Title field, change the title to Approved Basic Model 201.doc
g. Click Add.
3. Verify that you can see the new document in the folder.
Information
The Document Title property automatically takes the value of the file name. However, you can edit
the Document Title.
Procedure 10:Optional: Test document security

General P8Users are Readers of this document, but they do not have access to the New Docs
folder. P8Users cannot browse to the document, however, they can search for it. You are going to
log in as Pamela, a P8User who is not a Clerk, in order to verify.
1. Log in to IBM Content Navigator as Pamela:
- User name: Pamela
- Password: filenet
2. On the Browse page, verify that the New Docs folder is not visible in the Sales object store.
3. Open the Search page.
4. Create a search for documents that have 201 in the title by using the like operator.
5. Verify that the search returns the document that you recently added as Clark.
6. Log off from IBM Content Navigator.
Procedure 11:File a document

A single document can be filed in multiple folders within an object store.
1. Log in to IBM Content Navigator as Clark.
- User name: Clark
- Password: filenet
2. On the Browse page, go to the Sales object store > New docs.
Student Exercises
3. Select the document that you added to this folder.

4. Click Actions > Folders > Add to Folder.
5. Select the Public folder. You can select only folders to which you have Author access.
6. Click Add.
7. Open the Public folder to verify that the document is now filed in two folders.
Information
Other folder options include moving and removing from the folder.
If you move a document from one folder to another, then the document is no longer filed in the
original folder.
If a document is removed from all folders, it continues to exist as an unfiled document that can be
found by using Search tools.
Procedure 12:Checkout
When you are working on a document, you can check it out so that other users cannot edit it. While
the document is checked out, only the person who checked it out (or the administrator) can change
it. In this procedure, you are going to change the file name of the document to match the document
title. You are logged in as Clark.
1. Go to the Sales object store > New docs.
3. Click Actions > Check Out > Check Out and Download.
4. Save the file.
5. Locate the file on the local machine. By default, Firefox saves the file in
C:\Users\Administrator\Downloads.
6. Change the file name to Approved Basic Model 201.doc.
7. On IBM Content Navigator, verify that the document has a lock icon. This icon means that the
document is checked out.
Procedure 13:Optional: Verify document reservation

Clark filed the document in the Public folder, so all P8 users can browse to it. The document is
checked out, so only Clark can edit it. You are going to verify these statements.
1. Log on to IBM Content Navigator as Pamela:
- User name: Pamela
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead - Password: filenet

2. On th Browse page, open the Public folder.
3. Verify that you can see the document that you added as Clark.
4. Verify that the document is checked out.
5. Select the document and click Actions.
6. Verify that the Check Out action is disabled.
Procedure 14:Check in
As Clark, you checked out a document and changed the content element. When you check the
document back in, a new version of the document is created in the repository.
1. Log in to IBM Content Navigator as Clark.
- User name: Clark
- Password: filenet
2. On the Browse page, go to the Sales object store > New Docs.
4. Click Actions > Check In.
5. Browse for the document that you changed. If you saved it in the default location, it is in
C:\Users\Administrator\Downloads.
6. Select the document.
7. Click Open.
8. Click Check In.
9. Verify that the lock icon is gone. The document is checked in.
Procedure 15:Inspect document versions

The document that you checked in has a version history. You can download and read earlier
versions of the document. You can also determine when the document versions were created and
by whom. You are logged in to IBM Content Navigator as Clark. You are viewing the Public folder of
the Sales object store.
1. Select the document that you recently checked in.
2. Click Properties.
3. Open the Versions tab.
Student Exercises
4. Verify that the document has two versions that were modified by Clark on both occasions. The
latest version is Released and the prior version is Superseded.
5. Click Cancel to close the Properties page.

V10.1
Student Exercises
Practice
EXNoSideHead working with content: Exercises
Complete the three exercise scenarios to practice the procedures that you
learned in this lesson. You must complete the exercises in order.
Scenario 1: Loan document inspection

You are Olivia, a loan officer. You receive a call from a clerk regarding a loan
with government ID of 571982480. The borrower claims that the loan term of
30 years is incorrect. You must review the loan information.
Challenge
Use the Search page to find the loan document.
Compare the value of the LoanTerm property with the loan term as it was
handwritten on the form.
Data
Loan documents are in the LoanProcess object store.
Verification
Your search returned George Greens loan.
You were able to compare the property value of the loan document side
by side with the scanned content.
You determined that the loan term matched.
Student Exercises
Scenario 2: Changing document access

You are an administrator. Olivia, a loan officer, has requested Author access
to a George Greens loan document in order to add annotations.
Challenge
Add Olivia as an Author to George Greens Loan document.
Data
P8admins password: IBMFileNetP8
Olivias password: filenet
George Greens Loan document is in LoanProcess > Loans.
Hint
You must log on as P8Admin to make the security change, then log on as
Olivia to test the change.
Verification
In the Security tab of the property page, Olivia is listed as an Author.
V10.1
Student Exercises
Scenario
EXNoSideHead 3: Annotations
You are Olivia, a loan officer. You need to make annotations to a loan
document to highlight the loan term.
Challenge
Create and save an annotation to George Greens Loan.
Data
George Greens Loan document is in LoanProcess > Loans.
Hint
Olivia must have Author access to save annotations to the document.
You must have completed the previous scenario.
Verification
After you save the annotation, close and reopen the document. The
annotation must be visible.
Summary
In this lesson, you used IBM Content Manager to perform the most common
content user tasks, including the following task:
Log in to IBM Content Navigator
Browse object stores
Inspect document properties
View document content
Create annotations
Search for documents by title
Search for documents by other metadata
Add folders
Add a document to an object store
File a document
Checkout
Check in
Inspect document versions
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Lesson
EXNoSideHead 1.4. Content Storage Concepts and Components
Overview

You are going to implement the content storage system. You need to be
familiar with the storage capabilities and components of an IBM FileNet
Content Manager system.
Activities
Examine the P8 Domain structure: Tour, on page 1-41
User accounts

P8 administrator P8Admin IBMFileNetP8
Note
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Examine
EXNoSideHead the P8 Domain structure: Tour
Introduction
As an administrator or solution builder, you must be able to quickly find any
structure within the P8 Domain.
In this exercise, you locate and examine structures within the P8 domain.
Important
Do not make changes to the domain, site, or database settings.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Start WebSphere," on page 1-41
Procedure 2, "Explore domain structures by using Administration Console for
the Content Platform Engine," on page 1-41
Procedure 3, "Explore domain structures by using FileNet Enterprise
Manager," on page 1-43
Procedure 4, "Explore the site by using FileNet Enterprise Manager," on
page 1-44
Procedure 5, "Obtain a document GUID," on page 1-45
Procedure 6, "Inspect storage areas," on page 1-46
Procedure 7, "Inspect databases," on page 1-47
Procedure 8, "Inspect the gcdDBfile," on page 1-48
Procedure 1: Start WebSphere

If the IBM WebSphere Application Server is not started, you need start it now.
1. Click Start > All Programs > IBM WebSphere > IBM WebSphere Application Server V8.5 >
Profiles > AppSrv01 > Start the server.
2. Wait for the Start the server window to close.
Procedure 2: Explore domain structures by using Administration

Console for the Content Platform Engine
Examine the hierarchical structure of a P8 domain by using Administration Console for the Content
Platform Engine.
1. Log in to Administration Console for the Content Platform Engine as P8Admin:
a. In Firefox, go to http://ecmedu01:9080/acce.
Student Exercises
b. Log in:
2. Examine the P8 domain properties:
a. Select P8Domain at the top of the tree view.
b. Open the Properties tab to review the domain properties.
c. Open the Directory Configuration tab. Verify that IBM Tivoli is used as a directory service
provider.
3. Examine the database connections:
a. Expand the Global Configuration > Administration > Database Connections node.
b. Verify that one database connection exists: FNOSDS.
4. Examine the object stores:
a. Expand the Object Stores node.
b. Verify that you see the following object stores:
- LoanProcess
- LoanProcessQA
- P8ConfigObjectStore
- Sales
- SalesQA
- SalesSBx
Information
Six object stores share a database connection. Using a single database connection for multiple
object stores can reduce administration time.
5. Examine the site.

a. Expand P8Domain > Global Configuration > Administration > Sites.
b. Expand Initial Site. Only one site exists.
c. Select Content Cache Areas. Verify that none exist.
d. Select Index Areas.
e. Select Object Stores.
f. Select Rendition Engine Connections
g. Select Storage Areas.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead
Information
These items are not yet supported in Administration Console for the Content Platform Engine. You
must use FileNet Enterprise Manager to inspect them.
h. Expand Virtual Servers > P8Node01 > server1

i. Review the properties of the virtual server, opening tabs as needed.
j. Verify that on most tabs, virtual server settings are inherited from the P8Domain.
Information
You can override those settings for this server by selecting server1 as the configuration source.
e
6. Close unnecessary tabs.

7. Inspect Process Engine connection points:
a. Open the P8ConfigObjectStore node.
b. Expand Administrative > Workflow System > Connection Points.
c. Select P8ConnPt1.
8. Inspect the process region:
a. Click the isolated region: P8Region hyperlink.
b. Review the configuration data for P8Region.
c. Confirm that the table space used for the P8Region is PEDATA_TS.
9. Log out from the Administration Console for the Content Platform Engine.
10. Close Firefox.
Procedure 3: Explore domain structures by using FileNet Enterprise

Manager
FileNet Enterprise Manager provides another view into the P8 Domain, and also provides different
capabilities.
1. Log in to FileNet Enterprise Manager:
a. Double-click the FileNet Enterprise Manager desktop icon.
b. Click Connect.
Student Exercises
Hint
FileNet Enterprise Manager sometimes starts behind other windows. If you double-clicked the
desktop icon, but do not see the connection window, select the task from the Tasks bar.
2. Examine the P8 Domain properties:

a. Right-Click Enterprise Manager [P8Domain].
b. Select Properties.
c. Inspect the following tabs, but do not change any data:
- General
- Directory Configuration
- IBM Search Servers
d. Click Cancel when you are finished inspecting the information.
3. Select the Database Connections node. Confirm that a single database connection exists:
FNOSDS.
4. Expand the Object Stores node. Confirm that multiple object stores exist.
5. Select the PE Connection Points node. Verify that you can find the P8ConnPt1 connection
point.
6. Select the PE Region Ids node. Confirm that you can find P8region.
7. Minimize FileNet Enterprise Manager.
Information
In Administration Console for the Content Platform Engine, the process region and connection point
are specified at the object store level. In FileNet Enterprise Manager, the process region and
connection point are specified at the domain level. In either case, each region uses a connection
point.
Procedure 4: Explore the site by using FileNet Enterprise Manager

Your student system has one site. In this procedure, you use FileNet Enterprise Manager to inspect
the structures of that site.
1. Restore FileNet Enterprise Manager.
2. Expand the Sites node.
3. Inspect the Initial Site:
a. Expand and select Initial Site.
- Verify that the site components are shown in both the navigation tree and the details pane.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead - Verify that the site properties are shown in the details pane.
b. Right-Click Initial Site.
c. Select Properties. The site properties page displays.
4. Click cancel on the Properties page.
5. Minimize FileNet Enterprise Manager.
Information
The site properties page has several tabs. The tabs correspond to the properties shown in the
details pane. From here, you can change the site properties. The property values are disabled
because they are inherited from the P8 Domain. If you choose to override these inherited values,
you can set the values here.
Procedure 5: Obtain a document GUID

Every object has a globally unique identifier (GUID). The GUID is a system property that you cannot
change. You can view this ID by using different tools.
1. Open the Administration Console for the Content Platform Engine website in Firefox:
http://ecmedu01:9080/acce
2. Log on to Administration Console for the Content Platform Engine as P8Admin.
4. Select Browse > Root Folder > Manuals.
5. Select User Manual for Basic Model A.doc. You might need to expand the column for document
titles in order to read the entire title.
6. Open the Properties tab.
7. Scroll down until you find the ID field. This ID is the Global Unique Identifier (GUID).
8. Select the text in the ID field and copy that text to the clipboard.
10. Close Firefox.
Information
The Globally Unique Identifier (GUID) is a unique string that individually identifies every object. The
GUID cannot be changed, so it can reference the same document regardless of document title, file
name, or other changes.
Student Exercises
Procedure 6: Inspect storage areas

Your student system has several database storage areas and file storage areas. You can manage
these storage areas by using FileNet Enterprise Manager. Although metadata is stored in the object
store, the content can be stored in the file system. You are going to inspect a storage area and also
find a document in the file system.
1. Restore FileNet Enterprise Manager.
2. Select the Storage Areas folder under the Initial Site.
3. Verify that you see both the database storage areas and the file storage areas that belong to
this site.
Information
Each object store has a default database storage area. Additionally, three object stores have file
storage areas. The file storage areas correspond to folders in the file system.
The File Count and File Bytes columns show the file storage usage. For example, the Sales file
storage area contains 51 files. Your file count might be a different number.
4. Right-click the Sales file storage area and select Properties.

5. Note the root directory field: c:\filenet\file_stores.
6. Click Cancel.
7. Close FileNet Enterprise Manager.
8. Using Windows Explorer, navigate to c:\filenet\file_stores on your student system.
9. Search for the document in the file store:
a. Paste the GUID of the User Manual for Basic Model A into the search field in Windows
Explorer.
b. The search returns one document.

c. Open the file location.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead d. Open the document by using Microsoft Word Viewer.

e. Verify that it is the User Manual for Basic Model A document.
10. Close Microsoft Word Viewer.
11. Close the Windows Explorer folder.
Information
The Content folder contains the documents. The document file names are replaced by their GUIDs.
They are contained in two levels of folders named FNX, where X is an integer between 1 and 22.
Procedure 7: Inspect databases

The Content Platform Engine uses several databases. The Global Configuration Database contains
information about the P8 domain, such as object stores and add-ons. Object store databases
contain all of the object store metadata and sometimes content.
1. Open the DB2 Control Center:
a. Click Start > All Programs > IBM DB2 > TDSV63DB2 (Default) > General Administration
Tools > Control Center.
b. Select Advanced mode and then click OK.
2. Expand All Databases.
3. Verify that you see the following databases:
GCD_DB: This database is for the GCD.
NEXUSDB: This database is for IBM Content Navigator.
OS_DB: This database is for the object stores.
4. Expand OS_DB.
5. Select Table Spaces.
6. Verify that you can see the following table spaces:
CEDATA_TS: This table space is for content services.
PEDATA_TS: This table space is for process services.
7. Select CEDATA_TS.
8. Click Show Related Objects.
9. Scroll through the list of objects. Verify that you can find the following objects:
DocVersion table: This table has a row for each document. Searches for documents are
executed against this table.
Schema names for each object store.
10. Close the CEDATA_TS objects window.
Student Exercises
11. Close the DB2 Control Center.
Information
Each object store has its own set of tables, including a DocVersion table. The tables are listed
under separate schema names.
Procedure 8: Inspect the gcdDBfile

Each site maintains a copy of the GCD in a local file named gcdDBfile. If the GCD cannot be
reached when the Content Platform Engine server is started, the server starts in File Fallback
Mode. The server starts by reading from the gcdDBfile. This file is updated whenever an update is
made to the GCD. You can inspect the file to see what information is contained in the GCD.
Additionally, you can send the file to customer support if you need to provide information about your
system configuration.
1. Use Windows Explorer to go to C:\Program
Files\IBM\WebSphere\Appserver\profiles\AppSrv01\FileNet\server1\GCD.
2. Copy the file and rename the copy to gcdDBFile.Copy.xml.
3. Open the copy by using Internet Explorer.
4. Inspect the contents of this file. Use the search field to try to find the following objects:
An add-on (search for AddOn)
An isolated region (search for Region).
An object store (search for ObjectStore).
5. Close Internet Explorer.
6. Close Windows Explorer.
Summary
In this lesson, you located and examined structures in a P8 Domain, including:
Sites
Object stores
File storage areas
Database tables
The local gcdDBFile
V10.1
Student Exercises
Unit 2. Build an Object Store

EXNoSideHead
Unit Overview
This unit contains these lessons.
Lessons
Lesson 2.1, "Create an Object Store," on page 2-3
Lesson 2.2, "Create a File Storage Area and a Storage Policy," on page 2-25
Lesson 2.3, "Create Properties and Choice Lists," on page 2-43
Lesson 2.4, "Create Document and Folder Classes," on page 2-59
Lesson 2.5, "Modify Classes and Properties," on page 2-71
Unit Dependencies
Refer to Unit 1: Introduction to IBM FileNet Content Manager for the system
startup and system check.
Requirements
Activity, Practice, and Tour

Lessons in this unit contain the following items.
Activity: Provides step by steps directions on how to do a procedure.
Practice: Provides a scenario and data to practice the procedures that
you learned in that lesson.
Tour: Provides directions to explore a preset configuration.
System Startup
Start the WebSphere Application Server by double-clicking the Start
Server.bat file in the WebSphere Admin folder on the desktop.
Wait for the Start the server window to close.
System Check
Perform a system check whenever you start an IBM FileNet P8 system or
start working on a system that is in an unknown state. These activities
assume that you did a system check when you begin an activity session.
Copyright IBM Corp. 2013, 2015 Unit 2. Build an Object Store 2-1
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Lesson
EXNoSideHead 2.1. Create an Object Store
Why is this lesson important to you?

As a Solution Builder, you control how objects and the related metadata are
stored in your Content Platform Engine system. The main steps are to
determine how data sources are shared and to define the object stores along
with storage areas.
You are going to create a Database Connection and an Object Store for
Marketing Department as designed in your business solution.
Activities
Create a Connection Object: Activity, on page 2-5
Create an Object Store: Activity, on page 2-14
Create an Object Store: Practice, on page 2-23
User accounts
Application Name User ID Password
DB2 Control Center p8admin IBMFileNetP8
IBM FileNet Configuration Manager p8admin IBMFileNetP8
Administration Console for Content Platform
p8admin IBMFileNetP8
Engine
Note
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Create
EXNoSideHead a Connection Object: Activity
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Examine the target database," on page 2-5
Procedure 2, "Create the required Data Sources," on page 2-6
Procedure 3, "Test the Data Sources," on page 2-10
Procedure 4, "Create a Database Connection Object," on page 2-12
Procedure 1: Examine the target database

In this procedure, you examine a database that is used as the target for the connection object that
you are going to create.
1. Start the DB2 Control Center.
The Control Center window opens.
b. In Control Center View window, Leave the default value Advanced and click OK.
2. In the left pane, expand All Databases.
a. A list of databases is shown in the left pane.
3. Connect to the MARKDB database.

a. In the left pane of the Control Center, select the All Databases > MARKDB node.
b. In the lower right corner of the Control Center, click the Connect link.
Student Exercises
c. The properties of the MARKDB database are listed in the lower right pane of the Control
Center.
DBM State: Started.
The Size of the database is shown in MB.
The Capacity of the database is shown in MB. A small horizontal bar icon displays the
percentage of the available capacity used (such as 20%).
4. Expand the MARKDB in the left pane of the Control Center window.
Many database components are listed, including Tables, Views, Triggers, Indexes, and Table
Spaces.
5. Examine database components.
a. Click the MARKDB > Table Spaces node.
b. Several table spaces are listed in the upper right pane of the window. MARK_TS,
USERTEMP1 and TEMPSYS1 are user-defined table spaces.
c. From the menu bar, click Control Center > Exit to close the tool.
Procedure 2: Create the required Data Sources

In this procedure, you use the Configuration Manager to create the Data Sources that are required
for the Content Platform Engine to access the MARKDB database.
1. Start the IBM FileNet Configuration Manager.
a. From the Windows desktop, double-click the FileNet Configuration Manager icon.
The IBM FileNet Configuration Manager for Content Platform Engine window opens.
b. If necessary, click the X icon on the Welcome tab to close the Welcome screen.
2. Open the profile.
a. Click File > Open Profile. The window opens.
b. In the Open window, go to the following folder:
C:\Program Files (x86)\IBM\cpit\install-scripts\profiles\CEConfig
c. Select the CEConfig.cfgp file and then click Open.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead d. When prompted with the Verify your application server settings before proceeding
message, click OK.
e. A list of tasks are listed in the left column.

3. Verify that the correct version of WebSphere Application Server selected.
a. Right-click CEConfig in the left pane.
b. Click Edit Application Server Properties from the list. The Properties page opens.
c. Change the Application server version to version 8.5.
d. Enter IBMFileNetP8 in the Application server administrator password.
e. Click Test Connection. A Test Results window is shown with the message that the
connection to the server is successful.
f. Click OK to close the Test Results message window.
g. Click Finish.
4. Create a task for Configure Marketing Object Store JDBC Data Sources.
a. Right-click the Configure Object Store JDBC Data Sources task and click Copy Selected
Task.
Student Exercises
A copy of the task with a name beginning with the string Copy_of_ is listed in the left pane.
b. Right-click the task Copy_of_Configure Object Store JDBC Data Sources and click Rename
Task.
A Rename Task window opens.
c. Enter the following name and then click OK: Configure Marketing OS JDBC Data Sources
d. In the left pane, double-click the renamed task.
e. The Configure Marketing OS JDBC Data Sources task properties are shown in the right
pane.
5. Edit the configuration properties page for the task. Use the following data.
Item Value
JDBC driver name DB2 Universal JDBC Driver
JDBC driver version 3.0
JDBC Data Source name MOSDS
JDBC XA Data Source name MOSDSXA
Database server name localhost
Database port number 50000
Database name MARKDB
Database user name osdbuser
Database password IBMFileNetP8
Important
Make sure that you change the database name to MARKDB.
V10.1
Student Exercises
.
EXNoSideHead
a. Accept the default settings for any values that are not specified in the table
b. Click Test Database Connection.
c. Click Yes on the Action Required window to save the task before proceeding.
d. A Test Results window is shown with the message that the connection to the database is
successful.
e. Click OK to close the Test Results message window.

6. Run the task to create and configure the Data Sources:
a. Right-click the Configure Marketing OS JDBC Data Sources task in the left pane and click
Run Task.
Student Exercises
b. Monitor the status in the Console on the lower right corner of the window.
c. Wait for the message Finished running Configure JDBC Data Sources in the Console.
7. Close the profile and exit Configuration Manager.
a. From the menu bar, click File > Close Profile.
b. Click File > Exit to close the Configuration Manager.
Procedure 3: Test the Data Sources

In this procedure, you test the Data Sources in the WebSphere Application Server Administrative
Console.
1. Open WebSphere Application Server Administrative Console.
a. In a Firefox browser, click the WAS Admin link in the Bookmarks toolbar to open the
Integrated Solutions Console.
You can also use the following URL to open this page:
https://ecmedu01:9043/ibm/console/logon.jsp
The Integrated Solutions Console login page is displayed.
b. Enter the account information and click Login.
User ID: p8admin
The Welcome page is displayed.
If a Login Conflict message is displayed, click OK.
Note
The activities in this unit refer to the Integrated Solutions Console as the WebSphere Application
Server Administrative Console.
2. Open the Data Sources page.

a. In the left pane, expand the Resources > JDBC link.
b. Click the Data Sources link.
The Data Sources page is displayed in the right pane.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead c. Scroll down and locate the MOSDS Data Source.
3. Test the MOSDS connection.

a. Select the MOSDS and the MOSDSXA check boxes.
b. Click Test connection.
After a few moments, a message is shown on the same page that the test connection
operations for Data Source MOSDS and MOSDSXA were successful.
4. Log out of the WebSphere Application Server Administrative Console and close the browser.
Student Exercises
Procedure 4: Create a Database Connection Object

In this procedure, you create a Database Connection Object in the Administrative Console for
Content Platform Engine. You use the Data Source values that you created.
1. Start the Administration Console for Content Platform Engine.
a. In your browser, go to http://ecmedu01:9080/acce
b. Log in as the P8admin user (password: IBMFileNetP8).
2. Open the New Database Connection Object wizard.
a. In the administration console, expand the P8Domain > Global Configuration >
Administration node on the left pane.
b. Click Database Connections.
c. In the Database Connections tab on the right pane, click New.
d. The New Database Connection tab opens.

3. Specify the Database Connection Name and Site.
a. Enter MarketingDC as the value for the Display name field.
b. Leave the default value (Initial Site) for the Site field.
c. Click Next.
4. Specify Database Connection Data Source Names.
a. Enter MOSDS for the JNDI Data Source field.
b. If it is not automatically populated, enter MOSDSXA for the JNDI XA Data Source field.
c. Click Next.
5. Complete the wizard.
a. In the Summary page, view the details and click Finish.
b. In the Success page, click Close.
6. Verify the new Database Connection object.
a. In the Database Connections tab, click Refresh.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead b. Verify that the new MarketingDC connection is listed.
7. Leave the Administration Console open for the next activity.
Troubleshooting
If you get an error similar to the following screen capture when you complete the wizard, do the
following steps:
1. Click OK on the Error page.
2. Verify your inputs and click Cancel in the Error page of the wizard.
3. Repeat the Steps 2-6 to create the Database connection.
Student Exercises
Create an Object Store: Activity

In this activity, you are going to create an object store with the Data Source that you created in the
previous activity.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Create an object store," on page 2-14
Procedure 2, "Verify the new object store," on page 2-18
Procedure 3, "Configure your repository," on page 2-18
Procedure 4, "Edit the desktop to add your repository," on page 2-20
Procedure 1: Create an object store

1. If needed, start the Administration Console for Content Platform Engine.
b. Log in as the P8admin user (password: IBMFileNetP8)
2. Open the New Object Store wizard.
a. In the administration console, click the P8Domain > Object Stores node on the left pane.
b. In the Object Stores tab on the right pane, click New.
c. The New Object Stores tab opens.
3. Name the Object Store.
a. Enter Marketing as the value for the Display name field.
The Symbolic name field is automatically populated with the same name.
Note
The symbolic name, which is used for internal programmatic purposes, must contain only ASCII
characters and must begin with an alphabetic character.
b. Optionally, enter a description to your object store.

c. Click Next.
4. Define the Database with the database connection that you created.
a. Select MarketingDC from the list for the Database connection field.
There is also an option to create a new database connection.
5. Enter MSchema for the Schema name field.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead
Important
Since, the same database can be shared for two or more object stores, each object store must
contain a schema name that is unique for that object store.
6. Leave the default values (no value) for the other fields.
a. Click Next.
7. Select the Type of Storage Area for Content.
a. Accept the default Database Storage Area and click Next.
Information
If you select a storage area other than Database, two storage areas get created because an object
store always has a database storage area. You are going to configure File Storage Area in the next
lesson.
8. Grant Administrative Access.

a. Click Add. The Add Users and Groups window opens.
Student Exercises
b. In the Search for field, clear the Search for Users and Search for Special accounts check
boxes. Leave Search for Groups selected.
c. Type P8 in the text field that is next to the Starts with field. Click Search.
d. In the Search Results section > Available Users and Groups column, a list of groups that
starts with P8 is listed.
e. Select and Move P8Admins to the Selected Users and Groups column by clicking right
arrow. Click OK.
9. Repeat Steps 8a-8e to add the Admins group.
a. The completed list looks like the one in the following screen capture.
b. Click Next.
10. Grant Basic Access.
a. Click Add.
b. Repeat Steps 8a-8e to add the P8Users group.
Note
If you specify an empty list, the wizard automatically adds #AUTHENTICATED-USER, which gives
all network users in the authentication realm access to the object store.
c. Click Next.
11. Select AddOns.
a. Select the following add-ons.
5.2.0 Base Application Extensions
5.2.0 Base Content Engine Extensions (by default selected)
5.2.0 Process Engine Extensions
5.2.0 Publishing Extensions
5.2.0 Stored Search Extensions
5.2.0 Teamspace Extensions
5.2.0Thumbnail Extensions
5.2.0 Workplace Base Extensions
5.2.0 Workplace Template Extensions
5.2.0 Workplace XT Extensions
b. Click Next.
V10.1
Student Exercises
12. Complete the wizard:

EXNoSideHead
a. In the Summary page, review your selections.
b. Click Finish to create the object store.
Information
It could take a few seconds before the progress bar changes, and several more seconds for the
new object store to be created.
If a message states that the script is unresponsive, click OK to continue.
c. In the Success page, click Close.
Student Exercises
Procedure 2: Verify the new object store

In this procedure, you create a test folder in the new object store to verify that the object store is
working.
1. In the Administration Console > Object Stores tab, click Refresh.
a. Verify that the new object store is listed.
b. Observe that the Marketing object store uses the new MOSDS data connection.
c. Click the Marketing object store.
2. Create a folder.
a. In the left pane, expand Marketing > Browse.
b. Right-click the Root Folder and click New Folder from the list.
The New Folder tab opens.
3. Define New Folders.
a. Enter Test Folder in the Folder name field.
b. Notice that Class field has Folder as the value. Click Next.
a. In the Specify Settings for Retaining Objects, leave the defaults and click Next.
b. In the Summary page, click Finish.
c. In the Success page, click Close.
5. Verify the new folder.
a. In the Marketing tab, click Refresh.
b. In the left pane, expand Marketing > Browse > Root Folder.
c. Verify that the Test Folder that you created is listed.
If the new folder is added, you successfully created the object store.
6. Log out of Administration Console for Content Platform Engine.
a. Close the browser.
Procedure 3: Configure your repository

Users access and add content to your object store in IBM Content Navigator.
To access the content in an IBM FileNet P8 repository, you must first configure IBM Content
Navigator to connect to that repository.
Then, you must associate this repository with a desktop to enable users to access the content.
V10.1
Student Exercises
You are going to learn in more detail how to configure the IBM Content Navigator in a separate unit.
EXNoSideHead
In this procedure, you configure the repository that recently created.
1. Start the IBM Content Navigator.
a. In your browser, go to http://ecmedu01:9080/navigator/
The URL value is case-sensitive.
b. Enter the logon credentials for an administrator (user name: P8admin, password:
IBMFileNetP8). The user should have administrative access.
2. On the Content Navigator desktop, click the Open Administration View icon in the leftmost pane.
3. Open the Repositories tab.

a. In the Administration View page, click Repositories in the left pane.
b. On the Repositories tab, a list of the repositories that are configured is shown.
4. Create a connection to your repository.
a. Click New Repository and select FileNet Content Manager from the list.
b. On the General tab of the New Repository page, enter your object store name for the
Display name field, (Marketing).
c. The ID field is automatically populated based on the Display name field entry.
d. Enter the Server URL: iiop://ecmedu01:2809/FileNet/Engine. ecmedu01 is your server

name.
e. Enter the object store symbolic name: Marketing
f. Enter the object store display name: Marketing
Student Exercises
5. Test the connection to the repository.

a. Click Connect.
b. In the Log In page, enter the credentials of a user with administrator access to the repository
(User: P8admin; password: IBMFileNetP8).
c. Click Log In.
6. Save the configuration settings for the new repository.
a. Click Save and Close to save and close the New Repository tab.
7. Test the new repository.
a. Verify that the new repository is listed on the Repositories tab.
b. This repository is now available to be used in the Content Navigator.
c. Close the Repository tab.
Procedure 4: Edit the desktop to add your repository

In this procedure, you associate your repository with a desktop.
1. In the Admin desktop page > Desktops tab, right-click Sample Desktop and click Edit.
a. In the Sample Desktop tab, click the Repositories subtab.
2. Specify the repository for the desktop.
a. In the Repositories tab, Select Marketing repository from the Available Repositories pane
and use the right arrow (Add) to move it to the Selected Repositories pane.
3. Save the settings for the new desktop.

a. Click Save and Close.
b. If you get a prompt: You must refresh your browser, click Close.
4. Test the Desktop.
a. Refresh your browser.
b. The desktop opens in Browse view.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead c. Verify that you are able to select your repository (Marketing) from the list.
d. Click Marketing.
e. The Browser view now shows your object store and the Test Folder that you created.
Information
In the following lessons, you are going to create other content objects in this object store in Content
Navigator.
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Create
EXNoSideHead an Object Store: Practice
Complete the following exercise scenario to practice the procedures that you
learned in this lesson.
Scenario: Create an Object Store for Human Resources Department

You create an object store for the Human Resources department to store
their content. Your Database Administrator advises you to create the object
store with a shared database connection.
Challenge
Create an object store with a shared database connection.
Data
Item Value
Administration Console for Content
Platform Engine account p8admin/IBMFileNetP8
(logon/password)
Name and Symbolic name HR
Database connection MarketingDC
Schema name HRSchema
Storage area type Database
Grant Administrative Access P8Admins, AEAdmins
Grant Basic Access Legal
5.2.0 Base Content Engine Extensions
Add-ons
5.2.0 Process Engine Extensions
Hint
You are sharing an existing database connection. You complete the
create object store activity.
Verification
Verify that the new object store is listed in the Object Stores tab.
Verify that you are able to create a folder in the new object store.
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Lesson
EXNoSideHead 2.2. Create a File Storage Area and a Storage Policy

A Storage Area is a place where Content Platform Engine stores content. A
File Storage Area is a directory tree on a local or shared network drive. You
can create a File Storage Area to group documents with the same deletion or
backup requirements.
Your business solution requires creating File Storage Areas to use them as
part of a Storage Area farm. As the Solution Builder, you must create the File
Storage Areas, define a Storage Area Farm, and create a Storage Policy to
manage how the Storage Area Farm is used.
Activities
Activity: Create a File Storage Area, on page 2-26
Activity: Create a Storage Policy, on page 2-35
User accounts
Engine
IBM FileNet Enterprise Manager p8admin IBMFileNetP8
IBM Content Navigator (Administrator user) p8admin IBMFileNetP8
IBM Content Navigator (Business User) burt filenet
Note
Student Exercises
Activity: Create a File Storage Area

In this activity, you create a file storage area and set it as the default storage area for the Document
class.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Verify the default storage area," on page 2-26
Procedure 2, "Create a subdirectory for the file storage area," on page 2-27
Procedure 3, "Create a file storage area," on page 2-28
Procedure 4, "Verify the storage area directory structure," on page 2-30
Procedure 5, "Configure a Document class," on page 2-31
Procedure 6, "Edit your storage area," on page 2-32
Procedure 7, "Add a document to verify the configuration," on page 2-33
Procedure 1: Verify the default storage area

In this procedure, you add a document to check its default storage option for the Document class.
To add content elements to the document, you use the FileNet Enterprise Manager.
1. Start the FileNet Enterprise Manager by double-clicking the icon on the desktop.
2. In the FileNet P8 Logon page, ECMEDU01 entry is already selected. Click Connect. Verify the
current File Count for the storage area before you add document.
After adding the document, you can compare them.
a. Select Object Stores > Marketing > Storage Areas in the left pane.
b. Observe the File Count column for the Default Database Storage Area.
c. Since you added no documents after creating this object store, the file count is 0.
3. Open Test folder.
a. Expand the Marketing > Root Folder > Test folder in the left pane.
4. Add a document (Class: Document).
a. Right-click the Test folder and click New Document.
b. In the Create New Document wizard, enter TestDoc for the Document Title field.
c. Select the With content option and click Next.
5. Click Browse/Add for the File name field.
a. In the Open window, go to the C:\LabFiles\SampleDocuments folder and select a
document (Example: Testfile.doc)
b. Click Open. In the wizard page, the document path is added. Click Next.
V10.1
Student Exercises
6. In the Class and Properties page, verify that Document is selected for the Class field. Click Next.
EXNoSideHead
a. In the Object Retention page, leave the default values and click Next.
7. In the Advanced Features page > Storage Settings section, verify that <None> is selected. After
you configure a Storage Area for the Document class, your Storage Area is automatically
selected.
a. Notice that Default Database Storage Policy is selected for the Storage Policy field. Click
Finish.
8. Verify the File Count for the storage area after the document is added.
b. From the menu bar, click Action > Refresh to ensure that the current data is shown.
c. Observe the File Count column for the Default Database Storage Area.
d. Since you added one document, the file count is now increased to one.
9. Leave the FileNet Enterprise Manager opened for a later procedure.
Procedure 2: Create a subdirectory for the file storage area

1. View the existing file storage directories.
a. In Windows Explorer, go to C:\filenet drive. The student system uses this folder as the
base directory for file storage.
b. Expand the filenet folder and observe that there are several folders: file_stores,
file_stores2, and BulkMoveFS. These folders are the root directories for file storage in the
student system.
Note
You can use any string value for the base and root directory names. You can select any location in
your local or distributed file system for the base directory.
Student Exercises
c. Expand the file_stores\content folder and verify that there are 23 folders named FN0 to
FN22.
These directories store the committed content element files. The Storage Area wizard
creates these content folders.
d. Expand the FN0 (or any one of the 23 folders) folder and verify that each of them contains a
set 23 folders named FN0 to FN22.
e. Expand the file_stores\inbound folder and verify that there are several folders.
f. The inbound folder is the working area for uploading new content.
2. Create a subfolder to use it as a root directory for the new file storage area.
a. In Windows Explorer, go to C:\filenet drive.
b. Create a folder with a name: Marketing_filestore.
3. Verify and set the security for the folder.
Only the admin user must be able delete and write files in the file store directories.
a. Right-click the Marketing subdirectory and select Properties.
b. In the Properties window, click the Security tab.
c. Verify that the permission for the non-admin users is read-only to the folder.
d. Close the Windows Explorer.
Procedure 3: Create a file storage area

V10.1
Student Exercises
2. Start the New Storage Area wizard.

EXNoSideHead
a. In the administration console, expand the P8Domain > Object Stores node on the left pane
and click the Marketing object store.
b. In the Marketing tab, expand Marketing > Administrative node and click Storage Areas on
the left pane.
c. In the Storage Areas tab on the right pane, click New.

The New Storage Area wizard opens.
3. Create a Storage Area.
a. In the New Storage Area tab, select File for the Storage area type field.
b. Click Next.
4. Name the Storage Area:
a. Enter Marketing Storage Area for the Display name field.
b. Verify that Initial Site is selected for the Site field. Click Next.
5. Configure the Storage Area:
a. Complete this page with the data provided in the following table.
Item Value or option
Root directory C:\filenet\Marketing_filestore
Directory structure size Small
Maximum number of elements Unlimited
Maximum size Maximum allowed on device
Delete method Unrecoverable
Suppress duplicate content elements: Cleared
Options Encrypt content: Cleared
Compress content: selected
Other fields Leave the defaults.
b. Click Next.
Hint
Click the question mark next to each field name to get more details about that field.
Student Exercises
6. Select a Storage Policy for this Storage Area.

a. You are going to create a storage policy in the next activity. Leave the defaults (not selected)
and click Next.
b. When you are prompted with Informational message: The storage area cannot be used
until it is mapped to a storage policy, click OK.
a. In the Summary page, review the details and click Finish.
b. In the Success page, click Close to close the tab.
8. Refresh the view of the Storage Areas.
a. In the Storage Areas tab, click Refresh.
9. Verify that the Marketing Storage Area is listed.
a. Notice that Marketing Storage Area has the Type that you assigned (File Storage Area)
and it is empty (the File Count is 0).

a. Close the Browser.
Procedure 4: Verify the storage area directory structure

1. In Windows Explorer, go to C:\filenet\Marketing_filestore drive.
a. Expand the Marketing_filestore folder and observe the structure.
b. Verify that content and inbound directories are created. The wizard also creates a folder that
is called system and an xml file called fn_stakefile.xml.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead
c. Expand the content folder and verify that there are 23 folders named FN0 to FN22.
d. Expand the FN0 (or any one of the 23 folders) folder and verify that each of them contains a
set of 23 folders named FN0 to FN22.
e. Expand the inbound folder and verify that there are several folders.
f. Close the Windows Explorer.
Procedure 5: Configure a Document class

In this procedure, configure the new file storage area that you created as the default storage
container for the Document class.
2. Open the Document class.
b. In the Marketing tab, expand Marketing > Data Design > Classes > Document on the left
pane.
c. Click Document. The Document tab opens.
3. Set default storage for the document content of Document class.
a. In the General subtab, scroll down and select Marketing Storage Area from the list for the
Default storage area field.
Student Exercises
b. Select <None> from the list for the Default storage policy field.
c. Click Save.
d. When prompted, click Cancel in the Propagate Metadata Changes page.
The configuration on this page affects the subclasses of the Document.
e. Close the Document tab.
4. Refresh the object store.
Procedure 6: Edit your storage area

In this procedure, you edit the Marketing Storage Area that you created.
1. Open Marketing Storage Area.
a. In the Marketing tab, expand Marketing > Administrative > Storage Areas on the left pane.
b. Click Marketing Storage Area. The Marketing Storage Area tab opens.
2. Modify the properties of Marketing Storage Area.
a. Click the Configuration tab.
b. Edit the following values and leave the default values for the other fields.
Item Value
Content Caching Not Allowed
Delete method Purge
3. Update the Statistics tab.
a. Open the Statistics tab.
b. In the Storage Area Maximums section, change Maximum Size to 10 MB.
Click the circle beside the field.
Change the value.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead c. Examine the Storage Policies tab.

Observe that the Storage Area is not mapped to any Storage Policies.
4. Click Save to save your changes to the storage area properties.
a. Click Close to close the tab.
5. Refresh the Marketing object store.
Procedure 7: Add a document to verify the configuration

In this procedure, you verify that adding a document of Document class to the system adds the
content to the new file storage area. To add content elements to the document and verify which
Storage areas are used, you use FileNet Enterprise Manager.
1. If needed, start the FileNet Enterprise Manager by double-clicking the icon on the desktop.
a. In the FileNet P8 Logon page, ECMEDU01 is already selected. Click Connect.
2. Verify the current File Count for the storage area before you add document.
After adding the document, you can compare them.
a. In Enterprise Manager console, Expand Object Stores and select Marketing.
b. Click Action > Refresh from the top menu.
c. Select Marketing > Storage Areas in the left pane.
d. Click Action > Refresh the menu bar to ensure that the most current data is shown.
e. Observe the File Count column for the Marketing Storage Area.
f. Since you added no documents after creating this storage area, the file count is 0.
3. Open Test folder.

4. Add a document (Class: Document).
b. In the Create New Document wizard, enter FSTestDoc for the Document Title field.
c. Select the With content option and click Next.
document (Example: Testfile2.doc)
b. Click Open. In the wizard page, the document path is added. Click Next.
Student Exercises
6. In the Class and Properties page, verify that Document is selected for the Class field. Click Next.
a. In the Object Retention page, leave the default values and click Next.
7. In the Advanced Features page > Storage Settings section, verify that the Marketing Storage
Area <Default> that you created is selected. Observe that it is set as default because you
configured this Storage Area for the Document class.
a. Notice that <None> is selected for the Storage Policy field. Click Finish.
8. Verify the File Count for the storage area after the document is added.
c. Observe the File Count column for the Marketing Storage Area.
d. Since you added one document, the file count now increased to one.
9. Close the FileNet Enterprise Manager by clicking File > Exit from the top menu.
V10.1
Student Exercises
Activity:
EXNoSideHead Create a Storage Policy
Summary
Create two file storage areas to represent a storage area farm. Create a
storage policy that includes both of these storage areas and assign it to the
Document class. The storage policy uses the load-balancing capabilities of
the Content Platform Engine to distribute content within a storage area farm.
Add some documents to the object store and observe the file count
information in the storage areas.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Create storage area farms," on page 2-35
Procedure 2, "Configure a new storage policy," on page 2-37
Procedure 3, "Add more storage areas to the storage policy," on page 2-38
Procedure 4, "Assign the storage policy to the Document class," on
page 2-38
Procedure 5, "Verify that storage area farming is working," on page 2-39
Procedure 1: Create storage area farms

1. Create two subdirectories for storage area farms.
a. In Windows Explorer, go to C:\filenet drive.
b. Create two folders: FS-Farm1 and FS-Farm2.
c. Close the Windows Explorer.
3. Start the New Storage Area wizard.
b. In the Marketing tab, expand Marketing > Administrative > Storage Areas on the left pane.
c. Right-click the Storage Areas and then click New Storage Area from the list.
The New Storage Area wizard opens.
Student Exercises
4. Create two file storage areas in the Marketing object store.

a. In the New Storage Area tab, configure the Storage Area and complete the wizard. Use the
data that is provided in the following table.
Item Value for Storage Area 1 Value for Storage Area 2
Storage area type File File
Display name FS1 FS2
Site Initial Site Initial Site
Root directory C:\filenet\FS-Farm1 C:\filenet\FS-Farm2
Directory structure size Small Small
Maximum number of
Unlimited Unlimited
elements
Maximum size 20 MB 20 MB
Delete method Unrecoverable Unrecoverable
Suppress duplicate content Suppress duplicate content
elements: Cleared elements: Cleared
Options Encrypt content: Cleared Encrypt content: Cleared
Compress content: selected Compress content: selected
Select a Storage Policy
Do not select any at this step. Do not select any at this step.
for this Storage Area
Other fields Leave the defaults. Leave the defaults.
Hint
Select a Storage Policy for this Storage Area.

a. You are going to create a storage policy in the next procedure. Leave the defaults (not
selected).
b. When you are prompted with Informational message: The storage area cannot be used
until it is mapped to a storage policy, click OK.

a. In the Summary page, review the details and click Finish.
b. In the Success page, click Close to close the tab.
6. Refresh the view of the Storage Areas.
a. In the Storage Areas tab, click Refresh.
7. Verify that the FS1 StorageArea is listed.
a. Notice that FS1 has 0 File Count.
8. Create a second File Storage area:
a. Repeat Steps 3-6. Use the data in the table.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead b. Verify that the FS2 StorageArea is listed.

c. Notice that FS2 has 0 File Count.
d. Leave the administration console opened for the next procedure.
Procedure 2: Configure a new storage policy

1. Start the New Storage Policy wizard.
b. In the Marketing tab, expand Marketing > Administrative > Storage Policies on the left pane.
c. Right-click the Storage Policies and then click New Storage Policy from the list.
The New Storage Policy wizard opens.
2. Name the Storage Policy:
a. In the New Storage Policy tab, enter a value for the Display name field. (Example: Farm
Storage Policy)
b. Click Next.
3. In the Select the Content Storage Method page, choose the Select the storage Areas from
a list option.
a. Click Next.
4. In the Specify Storage Areas, select FS1 from the list for the Storage areas field.
a. Click Next.
5. In the Summary page, review the information and click Finish.
a. Click Close to close the tab.
6. Refresh the Object store.
Student Exercises
7. If needed, expand Marketing > Administrative node and click Storage Policies on the left pane.
a. Verify that the Storage Policy that you created is listed.
Procedure 3: Add more storage areas to the storage policy

1. In the administration console > Storage Policies tab, click the storage policy that you created
(Farm Storage Policy).
a. In the Farm Storage Policy tab > General subtab, scroll down to the Associated Storage
Areas section, click Add.
b. In the Add Associated Storage Areas page, select FS2 and click OK.
c. In the Farm Storage Policy tab, verify that FS2 is added to the list.
d. In the Farm Storage Policy tab, click Save.
e. Click Close to close the policy tab.
2. Refresh the object store:
Procedure 4: Assign the storage policy to the Document class

1. In the Marketing tab, expand Marketing > Data Design > Classes > Document on the left pane.
a. Click Document Class. The Document tab opens.
2. In the General tab, scroll down and locate the Default storage policy field.
a. Change the value to Farm Storage Policy by selecting it from the list.
b. Select <None> for the Default storage area field.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead
Important
Verify that <None> is selected for the Default storage area. The Farm Storage policy specifies the
FS1 and FS2 storage areas to save the content for the Document class.
If both the Default storage area and the Default storage policy are set, the Default storage area
setting takes precedence and the storage policy that you defined is ignored.
3. In the Document tab, click Save.

a. When prompted, click Cancel in the Propagate Metadata Changes window.
b. Ensure that the check box for the Storage Policy item is cleared so that the changes are not
propagated to the Document subclasses.
c. In the Document tab, click Refresh.

d. Click Close to close the Document tab.
4. Refresh the Marketing object store:
5. Log out of the Administration Console and close the browser.
Procedure 5: Verify that storage area farming is working

To see the storage area farm at work, you are going to add some documents to the Marketing
object store and then view the statistics of the FS1 and FS2 storage areas. To add content elements
to the document, you use FileNet Enterprise Manager.
a. In the FileNet P8 Logon page, ECMEDU01 is already selected. Click Connect.
b. In Enterprise Manager console, Expand Object Stores > Marketing.
c. Refresh the Marketing object store by right-clicking and then click Refresh.
2. Open the Test folder.
Student Exercises
3. Add a document.
b. In the Create New Document wizard, enter SPTest1 for the Document Title field.
c. Select the With content option.
d. Click Next.
document (Example: Testfile3.doc).
b. Click Open. In the wizard page, the document path is added.
c. Click Next.
a. In the Class and Properties page, leave the default values (Class: Document).
b. Click Next.
c. In the Object Retention page, leave the default values and click Next.
6. In the Advanced Features page > Storage Settings section, verify that the Storage Area field
has <None> value.
a. Verify that Farm Storage Policy <Default> is selected.
b. Click Finish.
7. Add a two more documents by repeating Steps 3-6.
a. Verify that all the documents are listed.
8. Review the results in Enterprise Manager.
a. In Enterprise Manager, select Marketing > Storage Areas.
c. Observe the File Count column for the FS1 and FS2 storage areas and verify that both
storage areas contain files.
d. When you created the FS1 and FS2 file storage areas, the file count was 0.
V10.1
Student Exercises
9. Close the File Enterprise Manager.

EXNoSideHead
a. Click File > Exit.
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Lesson
EXNoSideHead 2.3. Create Properties and Choice Lists

A property is a characteristic of a class. You must create custom property
templates for your classes. As a Solution Builder, you create choice lists and
property templates that are based on the needs of your organization and
assign them to your custom classes.
Activities
Create a Choice List: Activity, on page 2-45
Create a Choice List: Practice, on page 2-49
Create Property Templates: Activity, on page 2-51
User accounts
Engine
IBM Content Navigator p8admin IBMFileNetP8
Note
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Create
EXNoSideHead a Choice List: Activity
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Create a choice list," on page 2-45
Procedure 2, "Verify the new choice list," on page 2-48
Procedure 1: Create a choice list

In this procedure, you create a choice list in the Administrative Console for Content Platform
Engine.
a. In a Firefox browser, go to http://ecmedu01:9080/acce
2. Open the New Choice List wizard.
and click Marketing.
b. In the Marketing tab, expand the Marketing > Data Design node on the left pane and click
Choice Lists.
c. In the Choice Lists tab on the right pane, click New.
d. The New Choice List tab opens.

3. Define Choice Lists.
a. In the New Choice List tab, enter Prospect Type for the Display name field.
b. Click Next.
4. Select Data Types.
a. In the New Choice List tab, select String for the Choice list data type field.
b. Click Next.
5. Add Choice List Items.
a. In the New Choice List tab, click New Items.
Student Exercises
b. In the New Items window, for each name in the table, type the choice item name in the
Display Name field.
Display Name Value
Reseller Reseller
End User End User
c. When you click outside Display Name field, the value is automatically populated in the Value
field. Optionally, you can edit the value field.
Important
Verify that the Value field is populated before you click Add.
d. Click Add. The choice item is added to the panel.
e. Click OK to close the New Item window.
6. Add a group to the choice list.

a. In the New Choice List tab, click New Groups.
b. In the New Groups window, enter Dealer in the Display Name field.
c. Click Add. The group name is added to the panel.
d. Click OK.
7. Add choice items to the group.
a. In the New Choice List tab, select Dealer.
b. Add choice items to the Dealer group by clicking New Items.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead c. In the New Items window, repeat Step 5 with the values in the table.
Display Name Value
Motorcycle Motorcycle
Trailer Trailer
Vehicle Vehicle
d. Verify that your completed choice list looks like the one shown in the screen capture.
Hint
You can edit the choice items. To edit, select the item and click Edit.
You can also rearrange the choice items. To rearrange, click the item and use the Move Up or Move
Down.
e. Click Next.
Student Exercises
Procedure 2: Verify the new choice list

1. Click the Choice Lists tab and click Refresh.
a. Verify that Prospect Type is shown.
b. Click Prospect Type.

c. In the Prospect Type tab, click the Choice Items subtab.
d. Verify that the choice items are listed as you defined.
2. Log out of the administration console and close the browser.
V10.1
Student Exercises
Create
EXNoSideHead a Choice List: Practice
Scenario: Create a Choice List for the Sales Department

You must create a choice list that is based on the specification from the
Solution Designer for the Marketing department.
Challenge
Create a choice list with choice items and a group.
Data
Item Value
Platform Engine account P8admin/IBMFileNetP8
(logon/password)
Object Store Marketing
Choice List Name Product Type
Data type String
Choice Items Software, Services
Choice Group Name Hardware
Choice Items for the group Monitors, Servers, Tablet PC
Verification
Verify that your completed choice list looks like the one shown in the
screen capture.
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Create
EXNoSideHead Property Templates: Activity
Introduction
In this activity, you create several property templates for the Marketing object
store in Administration Console for Content Platform Engine. You associate
the choice list that you created to a property template. You are going to use
them to create Folder and Document classes in the next lesson.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Create a Property Template," on page 2-51
Procedure 2, "Create a Multi-valued Property Template," on page 2-53
Procedure 3, "Create a Value-required Property Template," on page 2-54
Procedure 4, "Create a Property Template with Choice List," on page 2-55
Procedure 5, "Create a Date Time Type Property Template," on page 2-56
Procedure 6, "Create an Integer type Property Template," on page 2-56
Procedure 1: Create a Property Template

2. Open the New Property Template wizard.
Property Templates.
c. In the Property Templates tab on the right pane, click New.
d. The New Property Template tab opens.
3. Name and Describe the Property Template.
a. In the New Property Template tab, enter prospect_name for the Display name field.
b. Verify that the Symbolic name and Descriptions fields are automatically populated. Click
outside of the Display name field.
c. Optionally edit the Description. Click Next.
4. Select the data type.
a. Select String from the list for the data type field.
b. Click Next.
Student Exercises
5. Select Choice List or Marking Set.

a. Select <None> from the list for both the fields.
b. Click Next.
6. Complete the Single or Multi-Value page.
a. Select the Single option for the Single or Multi-Value.
b. Click Next.
8. Verify that the new property template is listed.
a. Click the Property Templates tab and click Refresh.
b. Scroll down and verify that prospect_name is listed.
V10.1
Student Exercises
Procedure
EXNoSideHead 2: Create a Multi-valued Property Template
Property Templates.
a. In the New Property Template tab, enter contact_methods for the Display name.
a. Select String from the list for the Data type field. Click Next.
a. Select <None> from the list for both the fields. Click Next.
a. Select Multi for the Single or Multi-Value.
b. Select Unique and ordered values for the List order option.
c. Click Next.
Student Exercises

b. Verify that contact_methods is listed.
Procedure 3: Create a Value-required Property Template

1. In the administration console, create a property template called prospect_id.
a. Follow the steps in Procedure 1 to complete this task. Use the following data table. Accept
Field Value
Name prospect_id
Symbolic Name prospect_id
Description prospect_id
Data type String
Assign a choice list <None>
Assign marking set <None>
Single or Multi-Value Single
Set other attributes Selected
Value required Selected
the default values for the other fields that are not listed in the table.
Hint
When you select the Set other attributes option in the Single or Multi-Value page,
the wizard opens with more pages to set other attributes for the property template.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead

b. Verify that prospect_id is listed.
Procedure 4: Create a Property Template with Choice List

1. In the administration console, create a property template called prospect_category.
2. Follow the Steps 2-4 in Procedure 1. Use the following data table.
Field Value
Name prospect_category
Symbolic Name prospect_category
Description prospect_category
Data type String
3. In the Select Choice List or Marking Set window, select Assign choice list.
a. Select the Prospect Type choice list that you created in the earlier activity.
b. Click Next.
c. Select Single on the Single or Multi-Value page and click Next.
Student Exercises
d. In the Summary page, click Finish.

e. Click Close in the confirmation page.
b. Verify that prospect_category is listed.
Procedure 5: Create a Date Time Type Property Template

1. In the administration console, create a property template called last_contact_date.
2. Follow the steps in Procedure 1 to complete this task.
a. Use the following data table. Accept the default values for the other fields that are not listed
in the table.
Field Value
Name last_contact_date
Symbolic Name last_contact_date
Description last_contact_date
Data type Date Time
b. Verify that last_contact_date is listed.
Procedure 6: Create an Integer type Property Template

1. In the administration console, create a property template called times_contacted.
2. Follow the steps in Procedure 1 to complete this task. Use the following data table.
a. Accept the default values for the other fields that are not listed in the table.
Field Value
Name times_contacted
Symbolic Name times_contacted
Description times_contacted
Data type Integer
Choice list <none>
b. Verify that times_contacted is listed.
V10.1
Student Exercises
4. Review the Property Templates.

EXNoSideHead
a. Click Display Name in the column heading to sort the property templates in ascending order.
b. Click Data Type in the column heading to sort the property templates by data type.
5. Log out of the Administration Console for Content Platform Engine and close the browser.
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Lesson
EXNoSideHead 2.4. Create Document and Folder Classes

Documents that are checked into Content Platform Engine require a class.
You can organize the documents and other objects into folders. You must
define the Document and Folder classes that are based on the needs of your
organization before you can add documents or other objects to an object
store.
As a Solution Builder, you create custom Document and Folder classes.
Activities
Create Document and Folder Classes: Activity, on page 2-61
Create a Folder Class: Practice, on page 2-67
Create a Document Class: Practice, on page 2-69
User accounts
Engine
Note
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Create
EXNoSideHead Document and Folder Classes: Activity
Introduction
You created property templates and choice lists that are required for your
organization in the previous lesson. In this activity, you create custom Folder
and Document classes with those property templates in the Administration
Console for Content Platform Engine. You test each class by creating an
instance in the IBM Content Navigator client.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Create a Folder Class," on page 2-61
Procedure 2, "Create a Document Class," on page 2-62
Procedure 3, "Test your Folder class," on page 2-64
Procedure 4, "Test your Document class," on page 2-65
Procedure 1: Create a Folder Class

2. Open the New Folder Class wizard.
b. In the Marketing tab, expand the Marketing > Data Design > Classes node on the left pane.
c. Right-click Folder and select New Class from the list.
d. The New Folder Class tab opens.
3. Name and Describe the Class.
a. In the New Folder Class tab, enter ProspectsFolder for the Display name.
a. In the Summary page, click Finish.
5. Verify that the new Folder subclass is listed.
b. If needed, expand the Marketing > Data Design > Classes > Folder node.
Student Exercises
c. Verify that the ProspectsFolder class is listed.

6. Click ProspectsFolder in the left pane. The ProspectsFolder tab opens in the right pane.
7. Add Property Definitions to the class.
a. Select the Property Definitions subtab. Click Add.
b. In the Add Properties page, scroll down and select the following properties that you want to
add to this class.
prospect_category
prospect_id
c. Click OK to close the Add Properties page.
8. Verify that the properties are listed.

a. Click Save. Click Close to close the ProspectsFolder tab.
9. Leave the administration console opened for the next procedure.
Procedure 2: Create a Document Class

1. Open the New Document Class wizard.
b. In the Marketing tab, expand the Marketing > Data Design > Classes node on the left pane.
c. Right-click Document and select New Class from the list.
d. The New Document Class tab opens.
a. In the New Document Class tab, enter Prospect for the Display name field.
V10.1
Student Exercises

EXNoSideHead
4. Verify that the new Document subclass is listed.
b. If needed, expand the Marketing > Data Design > Classes > Document node.
c. Verify that the Prospect class is listed.
a. Click Prospect in the left pane. The Prospect tab opens in the right pane.
b. Select the Property Definitions subtab. Click Add.
c. In the Add Properties page, select the following properties that you want to add.
contact_methods,
last_contact_date
prospect_category,
prospect_name
times_contacted
d. Click OK. Verify that all the properties are listed.

e. Click Save and then Close.
Student Exercises
Procedure 3: Test your Folder class

In this activity, you create an instance of your Folder class in IBM Content Navigator. You verify that
the instance has the metadata as specified in the class specification.
IBMFileNetP8).
c. The Content Navigator Sample Desktop opens in Browse view.
d. Select the Marketing repository from the list.
e. The Browser view now displays your object store.

2. Create a folder of the class that you created.
3. Select your Folder class.

a. In the New Folder window > Properties section, select ProspectsFolder from the list for the
Class field.
b. Click OK.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead c. Enter NYB Company for the Folder Name.

d. Select Reseller for the prospect_category from the list.
e. Enter NYBC for the prospect_id. The value for the field is required as you specified.
5. Verify that your new folder is listed.
Procedure 4: Test your Document class

In this activity, you create an instance of your Document class in IBM Content Navigator. You verify
that the instance has the metadata as specified by the class. You can add documents to the folder
that you created.
1. Double-click the NYB Company folder to open.
2. Click Add Document to add a document to this folder.
3. Enter the properties for your class.
a. In Add Document page, select Information about the document for the What do you want
to save? field.
b. In the Properties section, select Prospect from the list for the Class field. Click OK.
c. Enter the values for the other fields from the following table.
Field Value
Document Title NYB 252
contact_methods Email, phone call
last_contact_date Five days before the current date
Re seller
prospect_category
(Select from the choice list)
prospect_name Victor Byrd
times_contacted 2
d. For the contact_methods, click the field. A new window opens. Enter each value in the New
field and click Add.
e. Click OK.
f. Click Add.
4. Verify that your new document is listed in the folder.
Student Exercises
5. Click the document. Verify that the properties and their values are shown in the rightmost pane.
Note
Optional step: Add content to the document in Procedure 4, Step 3a.

a. In the Add Document page, select Local document for the What do you want to save?
field.
b. Click Browse for the File name field.
c. In the File Upload window, go to the C:\LabFiles\SampleDocuments folder and select a
document (Example: BasicModel_500.doc)
d. Click Open. In the Add Document page, the document path is added.
e. Continue with the Procedure 4, Step 3b.
6. Log out of IBM Content Navigator and close the window.
V10.1
Student Exercises
Create
EXNoSideHead a Folder Class: Practice
learned in the two lessons.
Scenario: Create a Folder class to organize Vendor information

Your Solution Designer sends you the specification for a Folder class to
organize the Vendor-related information.
Challenge
Create two property templates in the Administration Console.
Create a Folder class in the Administration Console.
Verify the class by creating an instance of that class in the IBM Content
Navigator.
Use the default values for the fields that are not specified in the tables.
Data
Field Value
Administration Console for
Content Platform Engine p8admin/IBMFileNetP8
account (logon/password)
Object Store name Marketing
Data for the property template - 1

Field Value
Name vendor_name
Symbolic Name vendor_name
Description vendor_name
Data type String
Assign a choice list <none>
Student Exercises

Field Value
Name vendor_ID
Symbolic Name vendor_ID
Description vendor_ID
Data type Integer
Data for creating a Folder class

Field Value
Name Vendor
Symbolic Name Vendor
Description Vendor Folder
vendor_name
Add Properties
vendor_id
Data for creating an instance of a Folder
Field Value
IBM Content Navigator client account
p8admin/IBMFileNetP8
(logon/password)
Object Store name Marketing
Folder class Vendor
Name of the Folder Vendors
vendor_name PC Paper
vendor_id 1001
Verification
Verify that the property templates are available to add to the Folder class.
Verify that the new Folder class is listed under the Folder class node on
the left pane.
Verify that you are able to create an instance of this Folder class.
V10.1
Student Exercises
Create
EXNoSideHead a Document Class: Practice
learned in the two lessons.
Scenario: Create a Document class for the Quotes information

Your Solution Designer sends you the specification for a Document class to
store the Quotes information.
Challenge
Create two property templates in the Administration Console.
Create a Document class in the Administration Console.
Verify the class by creating an instance of that class in the IBM Content
Navigator.
Use the default values for the fields that are not specified in the tables.
Data
Item Value
Administration Console for
Content Platform Engine p8admin/IBMFileNetP8
account (logon/password)
Object store Marketing

Field Value
Name salesperson_name
Symbolic Name salesperson_name
Description Sales person name
Data type String
Student Exercises

Field Value
Name salesperson_id
Symbolic Name salesperson_id
Description Sales person ID
Data type Integer
Data for creating a Document class

Field Value
Name Quote
Symbolic Name Quote
Description Quote
salesperson_name
Add Properties
salesperson_id
Data for creating an instance of a Document
Field Value
IBM Content Navigator client account
(logon/password)
Object store Marketing
Folder Vendors
Document Title TestPriceQuote
salesperson_name Mary Williams
salesperson_id 1
Verification
Verify that the property templates are available to add to the Document
class.
Verify that the new Document class is listed under the Document class
node on the left pane.
Verify that you are able to create an instance of this Document class.
Verify that the properties have the value that you entered.
V10.1
Student Exercises
Lesson
EXNoSideHead 2.5. Modify Classes and Properties

Your Solution Designer identifies the aspects of your business solution that
require changes to existing content data structures. As the Solution Builder,
you must implement the required changes.
Activities
Change the Property Template Name: Activity, on page 2-73
Modify a Choice List: Activity, on page 2-77
Change the Class for an Object: Activity, on page 2-81
Work with Metadata Dependencies: Optional Activity, on page 2-85
User accounts
Engine
Note
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Change
EXNoSideHead the Property Template Name: Activity
Procedures
Procedure 1, "View the property template display name," on page 2-73
Procedure 2, "Change the property template display name," on page 2-73
Procedure 1: View the property template display name

a. In a Firefox browser, go to http://ecmedu01:9080/navigator/
IBMFileNetP8).
c. The Content Navigator Sample Desktop opens in Browse view.
d. Select the Marketing repository from the list. The Browser view now displays Marketing.
2. View the display name of the prospect_id property definition.
a. Click Marketing in the left pane.
b. Select the NYB Company folder in the middle pane.
c. Click Properties.
d. Observe the property display name prospect_id.
e. You are going to change this display name to Prospect Code.
f. Log out of the Content Navigator.
Procedure 2: Change the property template display name

In this procedure, you change the display name of the prospect_id property template to Prospect
Code.
2. Open the property definition.
b. In the Marketing tab, expand the Marketing > Data Design > Property Templates node on
the left pane and click prospect_id.
c. The prospect_id tab opens in the right pane.
Student Exercises
3. Change the display name for the property definition.

a. In the prospect_id tab > General subtab, delete the existing value (prospect_id) and enter
Prospect Code for the Display name field.
b. Observe that the Symbolic Name field and Description field continues to display
prospect_id.
c. Edit the Description field value to prospect_id is changed to Prospect Code.
d. Click Save to save the changes and then Close.
The Properties page closes.
5. Verify the name change.
a. If needed, expand the Marketing > Data Design > Property Templates node on the left pane.
b. Verify that the property template is listed as Prospect Code in the right pane.
6. Verify the name change in your Folder class.
a. Expand the Marketing > Data Design > Classes > Folder node on the left pane and click
PropspectsFolder.
b. In the PropspectsFolder tab > Property Definitions subtab, verify that the value is displayed
as Prospect Code.

8. Verify the new display name for the property definition in the IBM Content Navigator.
a. In a Firefox browser, clear the cache by clicking Tools > Clear Recent History from the top
menu.
b. In the Clear All History window, click Clear Now.
c. Repeat Step 1 and 2 in procedure 1 to go to the NYB Company folder properties.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead d. Verify that the property display name now shows as Prospect Code (in stead of the old
name: prospect_id).
e. Verify that the value of the property was retained.

9. Log out of the IBM Content Navigator and close the browser.
Note
The name change to the property template was automatically propagated to the property definition
based on the property template.
Only name changes to a property template are automatically propagated to property definitions.
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Modify
EXNoSideHead a Choice List: Activity
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Add a group to a choice list," on page 2-77
Procedure 2, "Verify the modified choice list," on page 2-78
Procedure 1: Add a group to a choice list

In this procedure, you add a group to an existing choice list.
2. Open the choice list.
b. In the Marketing tab, expand the Marketing > Data Design > Choice List node on the left
pane and click Prospect Type.
The Prospect Type tab opens in the right pane.
3. Open the Choice Items.
a. In the Prospect Type tab, click the Choice Items tab.
b. In the Choice Items tab, verify and select the Prospect Type node.
4. Add a group to the choice list.
a. Click New Groups.
b. In the New Groups window, enter Manufacturer in the Display name field.
c. Click Add.
d. The group name is added to the panel. Click OK.
5. Add choice items to the group.
a. In the Choice Items tab, select Manufacturer.
b. Add choice items to the Manufacturer group by clicking New Items.
c. In the New Items window, for each name in the table, type the choice item name in the
Display name field.
Display Name Value
Cars Cars
Vans Vans
Trucks Trucks
Student Exercises
d. When you click outside Display name field, the value is automatically populated in the Value
field. Optionally, you can edit the value field.
Important
Verify that the Value field is populated before you click Add.
e. Click Add. The choice item is added to the panel.
f. Click OK to close the New Item window.

6. Click Save to save the choice list changes.
7. Verify that your completed choice list looks like the one shown in the screen capture.

a. In the Prospect Type tab, click Close.
b. In the Marketing tab, click Refresh.
Procedure 2: Verify the modified choice list

V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead b. Enter the logon credentials for an administrator (user name: P8admin, password:
IBMFileNetP8).
The Content Navigator Sample Desktop opens in Browse view.
c. Select the Marketing repository from the list.
The Browser view now displays your object store.
2. Create a folder.
3. Select your Folder class.
a. In the New Folder window > Properties section, select ProspectsFolder from the list for the
Class field.
b. Click OK.
c. Enter Test New Choice for the Folder Name.
4. Verify that you are able view and select a choice item from you new choice group.
a. Select Cars for the prospect_category from the list. Click OK.
b. Enter TNC for the Prospect Code. The value for the field is required.
Student Exercises

6. Verify that your new folder is listed.
7. Click the Test New Choice folder. Verify that the properties are shown in the rightmost pane.
8. Optional: Examine an existing folder (that was created before you added the new choice item)
to verify the new choice group.
a. Right-click the NYB folder and click Properties.
b. In the Properties window, verify that you are able view and select a choice item from you
new choice group.
c. Select Vans for the prospect_category from the list and click OK.
d. Click Save.
e. Right-click the NYB folder and click Properties. Verify that the properties are shown.
9. Log out of the IBM Content Navigator and close the browser.
V10.1
Student Exercises
Change
EXNoSideHead the Class for an Object: Activity
Introduction
In this activity, you create a Document class and use it to change the class
for an existing document (that belongs to a different class).
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Create a Document class," on page 2-81
Procedure 2, "Examine the properties of a document," on page 2-82
Procedure 3, "Change the class of an object," on page 2-82
Procedure 1: Create a Document class

2. Open the New Document Class wizard.
b. In the Marketing tab, expand the Marketing > Data Design > Classes node.
c. Right-click Document and click New Class.
The New Document Class tab opens in the right pane.
3. Complete the wizard and create a Document class with the data in the table.
Field Value
Name ProspectUpdated
Symbolic Name ProspectUpdated
Description ProspectUpdated
4. Add Property Definitions to the ProspectUpdated class.
a. Click Document > ProspectUpdated in the left pane. The ProspectUpdated tab opens in the
right pane.
b. Select the Property Definitions subtab. Click Add.
c. In the Add Properties page, scroll down and select the following properties that you want to
add.
contact_methods
Prospect Code
prospect_category
prospect_name
d. Click OK. Verify that all the properties are listed.
Student Exercises
e. Click Save and then Close.
Procedure 2: Examine the properties of a document

In this procedure, you examine the properties of the document (Class: Prospect) for which you are
going to change the class to ProspectUpdated.
1. Recall a document that you added in a previous lesson.
a. You added a document (Name: NYB252) to the Marketing object store > NYB Company
folder.
2. Optionally, you can access this document in Content Navigator and examine it.
3. Examine the properties of the document in the following screen capture.
a. Observe that the object class is Prospect.
b. Verify that the document has last_contact_date, times_contacted property names, and
values.
These properties are removed from this instantiated object when you change the class of
this object.
c. Verify that the document does not have Prospect Code property is displayed.
These properties are added to this instantiated object when you change the class of this
object.
Procedure 3: Change the class of an object

1. Open the document.
a. In the administration console, expand the Marketing > Browse > Root Folder node.
b. Click the NYB Company folder.
The NYB Company tab opens in the right pane.
c. In the NYB Company tab, click NYB252. The document tab opens.
V10.1
Student Exercises
2. Change the class of a document from Prospect to ProspectUpdated.

EXNoSideHead
a. In the NYB252 tab, click Actions > Change Class.
The Change Class window opens.

b. In the Change Class window, select ProspectUpdated from the list of classes in Class List.
c. Select the Change the class of all versions option.
d. Click OK.
e. Click Close to close the document tab.

f. In the Marketing object store tab, click Refresh.
Procedure 4: Verify the class change

1. Open the document.
a. In the NYB Company tab, click NYB252. The document tab opens.
b. Click the Properties tab.
Student Exercises
2. Verify the Properties for the document.

a. Verify that Prospect Code property is listed. Recall that this document did not have this
property before changing the class.
b. Observe that the Class Description has the new class name (ProspectUpdated).
c. The last_contact_date, times_contacted properties are removed from the document.
d. Log out of the admin console and close the browser.
V10.1
Student Exercises
Work
EXNoSideHead with Metadata Dependencies: Optional Activity
Introduction
In this activity, you replace a choice list with a data entry value for a property
template. The updates to a property template do not automatically update the
existing property definitions of a class. You must apply this change to a class
definition. You must remove the original property definition from the class and
add the updated one.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Remove the choice list," on page 2-85
Procedure 2, "Remove a property definition from a class," on page 2-86
Procedure 3, "Assign the property definition to the class," on page 2-87
Procedure 4, "Verify the modifications," on page 2-88
Procedure 5, "Examine the ProspectsFolder class," on page 2-90
Procedure 1: Remove the choice list

In this procedure, you remove the association of a choice list from a property template and make
the template as a data entry value.
2. Open the prospect_category property template.
b. In the Marketing tab, expand the Marketing > Data Design > Property Templates node on
the left pane.
c. Scroll down and click prospect_category.
3. Remove the Prospect Type choice list from the property template.
a. In the prospect_category tab, click the Properties subtab.
b. Click the Property Name column to list the items in alphabetical order.
c. Scroll down and find the Choice List property.
d. Observe that this property template is associated with the Prospect Type choice list.
Student Exercises
e. To remove the association of the choice list, click the arrow next to it and select Unset Value.
f. Verify that the Choice List field has no value.

g. Click Save to save the changes.
h. This change makes the prospect_category as a data entry property template.
Procedure 2: Remove a property definition from a class

1. Check the classes that use the prospect_category property template.
a. In the prospect_category tab > Properties subtab, click the Property Name column to list the
items in alphabetical order.
b. Scroll down and find the Used in Classes property.
c. Click the arrow to see the list. Observe that the classes that use this property template is
listed.
d. Close the prospect_category tab.

2. Remove the unmodified prospect_category property definition from the ProspectUpdated class
definition.
a. In the Marketing tab, expand the Marketing > Data Design > Classes > Document node on
the left pane.
b. Click ProspectUpdated.
c. In the ProspectUpdated tab, click the Property Definitions subtab.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead d. Select the prospect_category property definition and click Remove.
e. Verify that the property is removed from the list and click Save to save the changes.
f. Click Close to close the tab.
g. In the Marketing tab, click Refresh.
3. Optionally, examine the changes to the document in the IBM Content Navigator.
a. Verify that the document (that you created earlier with the choice list value; Document class:
PropspectUpdated) does not have the choice list property called prospect_category
Procedure 3: Assign the property definition to the class

In this procedure, you assign the modified prospect_category property (without the choice list) to
the PropspectUpdated class.
1. Open the PropspectUpdated class.
a. In the administration console > Marketing tab, expand the Marketing > Data Design >
Classes > Document node.
b. Click the ProspectUpdated class.
c. In the PropspectUpdated tab, click Property Definitions subtab.
Student Exercises
2. Assign the property.

a. Click Add.
b. In the Add Properties window, scroll down and select prospect_category.
c. Click OK.
d. Verify that the property is added to the list.
e. Click Save to save your changes.
f. Click Close to close the tab.
g. In the Marketing tab, click Refresh.
3. Log out of IBM Content Navigator.
Procedure 4: Verify the modifications

In this procedure, you create a document of the PropspectUpdated class and verify the change in
property definition.
1. Open the WebSphere Integrated Solutions Console:
a. In a Firefox browser, go to https://ecmedu01:9043/ibm/console/logon.jsp
c. The WebSphere Application Server console opens.
2. Restart the Content Navigator application.
a. Expand the Applications > Application Types.
b. Click the WebSphere enterprise applications node in the left pane.
c. Select navigator from the list on the right pane.
d. Click Stop. Wait until the message is shown.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead e. Select navigator and click Start. Wait until the message is shown.
f. Log out of the WebSphere Integrated Solutions Console.
Important
For the property template changes to show in the IBM Content Navigator, you must restart the
Content Navigator in the WebSphere Application Server.

a. In a Firefox browser, go to http://ecmedu01:9080/navigator/
b. Enter the logon credentials for an administrator.
c. Log in as the P8admin user (password: IBMFileNetP8)
d. The Content Navigator Sample Desktop opens in Browse view.
e. Select the Marketing repository from the list. The Browser view now displays Marketing.
4. Add a document.
a. Click the Marketing > NYB Company folder in the left pane.
b. Click Add Document in the tool bar.
5. Enter the properties.
a. In Add Document page, select Information about the document for the What do you want
to save? field.
b. In the Properties section, select PropspectUpdated from the list for the Class field.
c. Click OK.
d. Enter the values for the other fields from the following table.
Field Value
Document Title Test Prop
Prospect Code TP724
prospect_name Gloria Stanton
e. For the prospect_category, notice that there is no choice list. Enter Dealer as the value.
Student Exercises
f. Click Add.
6. Verify that your new document is listed in the folder.
Procedure 5: Examine the ProspectsFolder class

Recall that you created a ProspectsFolder class that also uses the prospect_category property
template. This class still retains the choice list, because this property definition for the folder class is
not updated after you removed the choice list from the template. The change in the property
template is not automatically propagated to the Classes.
In this procedure, you verify the prospect_category property of the folder class.
7. Open the folder properties:
a. In the Content Navigator, click Marketing in the left pane.
b. Select the NYB Company folder in the middle pane.
c. Click Properties from the toolbar.
8. Observe the prospect_category property.
a. Verify that if you edit the prospect_category property, the choice list is available.
b. Click Cancel to close the Properties page.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead
9. Log out of the Content Navigator and close the browser.
Summary
In this activity, you did the following steps.
Removed the choice list from a property template.
Removed the original property definition (that has the choice list) from a class.
Assigned the modified property definition (no choice list) to the class.
Verified the modifications by creating a document class.
Examined the ProspectsFolder class that did not get affected by the change.
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Unit 3. Extend Content Platform Engine Functions

EXNoSideHead
Unit Overview
Lessons
Lesson 3.1, "Create a Subscription with an Event Action," on page 3-3
Unit dependencies
Requirements

System Startup
System Check
start working on a system that is in an unknown state.
Copyright IBM Corp. 2013, 2015 Unit 3. Extend Content Platform Engine Functions 3-1
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Lesson
EXNoSideHead 3.1. Create a Subscription with an Event Action

Your business requires a customized action when a particular Content
Platform Engine event occurs. For example, whenever a business user
creates a document, you want to log the event in a file. You can extend
Content Platform Engine functionality with your own server-based action
handlers.
The solution developer for your company provides you the Java code for the
customized actions. As a Solution Builder, you must create subscription with
event actions that uses the code.
Activities
Create a Subscription with an Event Action: Activity, on page 3-5
Update the Event Action with new Code Module: Activity, on page 3-11
Examine a Workflow Subscription: Tour, on page 3-15
Create a Subscription with an Event Action: Practice, on page 3-19
User accounts
Engine
FileNet Enterprise Manager p8admin IBMFileNetP8
Note
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Create
EXNoSideHead a Subscription with an Event Action: Activity
In this activity, you create a code module with prewritten Java code, an event action, and a
subscription for the Order document subclass. You associate the event action with the subscription
and test it by creating an Order document. Document creation triggers the subscription and the
code is executed which creates an entry in a log file.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Create an Event Action," on page 3-5
Procedure 2, "Create a Subscription," on page 3-7
Procedure 3, "Test the Subscription and Event Action," on page 3-9
Procedure 4, "Examine the EventLog.txt file," on page 3-10
Procedure 1: Create an Event Action

a. In the FileNet P8 Logon page, ECMEDU01 entry is already selected. Click Connect.
b. In the Enterprise Manager console, Expand Object Stores > Sales > Events > Event Action.
2. Create an event action.
a. Right-click the Event Action and click New Event Action.
b. Create Event Action wizard opens.
c. In the Welcome window, click Next.
3. Name and Describe the Event Action.
a. Enter Log Event Action in the Name field.
b. Optionally, enter a description and click Next.
4. Specify the Type of Event Action.
a. Leave the Enabled checked for the Initial Status field.
b. Select the Class option.
c. For the Handler Java Class Name field, type the following text:
com.ibm.filenet.edu.LogEventActionEDU
Note
Type the Java class name exactly as shown because it is case-sensitive.
d. Select the Configure Code Module option.
Student Exercises
e. Click Next.
5. Specify the Code Module to be configured.

a. Click Browse/Add.
b. In the Open window, go to C:\LabFiles\ExtendCPEFxn.
c. For the File of type field, select JAR files (*.jar) from the list.
d. Select EDULog.jar and click Open.

e. Click Next.
f. Note the entries in the Create an Event Action wizard and click Finish.
g. Click OK when it prompts with the confirmation message that you successfully created the
Log Event Action.
h. Verify that the Event Action that you created is listed on the right pane.
i. This event action is now one of the event actions available for selection when you create a
subscription.
6. Close the Enterprise Manager application.
V10.1
Student Exercises
Procedure
EXNoSideHead 2: Create a Subscription
2. Create a subscription.
and click the Sales object store.
b. In the Sales tab, expand Sales > Data Design > Classes > Document > Order on the left
pane.
c. Right-click Order and then click New Subscription from the list.
d. The New Subscription tab opens on the right pane.

3. Name and Describe the Subscription.
a. In the New Subscription tab, enter Log Subscription in the Display name field.
b. Optionally enter a description and click Next.
4. Specify the Subscription Behavior.
a. Leave the default option of Applies to all objects of this class for the Scope field.
Note
Observe that the Create a workflow subscription is not selected for the workflow subscription
option field since you are not launching a workflow with this subscription. Later in this lesson, you
explore a workflow subscription.
b. Click Next.
Student Exercises
5. Select the Triggers.

a. Select Creation Event in the Event Name list.
b. Click Next.
6. Select an Event Action.

a. Select Log Event Action from the list.
b. Click Next.
7. Specify Additional Options.
a. Select Enable this subscription.
b. Optionally, select Include subclasses.
c. For the filter expression field, enter the following text:
(MajorVersionNumber=1 and MinorVersionNumber=0) OR (MajorVersionNumber=0 and
MinorVersionNumber=1)
d. Click Next.
8. Review the summary and click Finish.
9. Click Close when you receive the confirmation message that you successfully created the Log
Subscription.
10. View the subscription that you created.
a. Select the Sales tab, and click Refresh.
b. Expand Sales > Events, Actions, Processes > Subscriptions on the left pane.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead c. Click Subscriptions and verify that Log Subscription is listed on the right pane.
Procedure 3: Test the Subscription and Event Action
Note
The Java Code Module contains instructions to write an entry into a log file each time a document of
the class that is subscribed to is created.
1. Create a folder.
a. In the Sales object store tab, expand the Sales > Browse > Root Folder node on the left
pane.
b. Right-click the Root Folder and click New Folder.
c. Enter Test Folder for the folder name.
d. Leave the default value (Folder) for the Class field.
e. Click Next and leave the default values for all other fields.
f. Click Next and click Finish.
g. Click Close to close the New Folder tab.
h. In the Sales object store tab, click Refresh to refresh the Object store.
2. Add a document.
a. In the Sales object store tab, expand the Sales > Browse > Root Folder > Test Folder node
on the left pane.
b. Right-click Test Folder and click New Document.
c. Enter Log Test as the Document title.
d. Select Order from the list for the Class field.
e. Complete the wizard by clicking Next three times. Leave the default values for all the fields.
f. In the final page, view the summary and click Finish.
Student Exercises
g. When the page displays that the Log Test document is created, click Close to close the New
Document tab.
3. In the Test folder tab, click Refresh.
a. Verify that the new document is listed.
a. Close the Browser.
Procedure 4: Examine the EventLog.txt file

1. Verify that the file EventLog.txt was created.
a. In Windows Explorer, open the following folder and locate the file:
C:\Program Files\IBM\WebSphere\AppServer\profiles\AppSrv01.
b. Verify that the EventLog.txt file has the current date and time.
Note
The code for the Log Action adds a text line to the EventLog.txt file each time that the event action
executes. This line consists of the following statement:
A new document is created on: Day Mon DD HH:MM:SS EDT YYYY. Document class name =
Order, Document id = {GUID}
2. Verify that the log file has an entry for the Order document that you created.
a. Open the EventLog.txt file with the text editor. Example: Notepad
b. Verify that it includes a line that identifies the date and time that your new document was
created in the object store.
c. Close the EventLog.txt file.
V10.1
Student Exercises
Update
EXNoSideHead the Event Action with new Code Module: Activity
Your Management wants to include the user who creates the document in the event log every time
a document is added. The Developer provides the new JAR file that contains the updated code to
the Administrator.
In this activity, you are going to modify the Code Module to use the new JAR file. You also update
the Event Action that references the Code Module and test it.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Update the Code Module," on page 3-11
Procedure 2, "Update the Event Action," on page 3-12
Procedure 3, "Test the new Code Module," on page 3-13
Procedure 1: Update the Code Module

In this procedure, you check in a new version of code module that contains more line code.
a. In the FileNet P8 Logon page, ECMEDU01 entry is already selected. Click Connect.
b. In Enterprise Manager console, Expand Object Stores > Sales > Root Folder >
CodeModules on the left pane.
2. Check out the code module:
a. Click the CodeModules folder.
b. Select the EDULog.jar code module on the right pane.
c. In the menu bar, select Action > Exclusive Check Out (default).
d. In the Open window, go to C:\Temp from the Look in selection list at the top of the window.
The JAR file is saved in this location when you complete the checkout.
e. Click Open.
f. Click No at the prompt Would you like to edit the file?
You should see a checked out icon next to the containment/Folder Name.
3. Check in the new version of the code module.

a. Select the EDULog.jar code module on the right pane.
b. From the menu bar click Action > Check In.
The Check In Content window opens.
c. In Content Elements section, click Browse/Add next to the File Name field.
d. Browse to C:\LabFiles\ExtendCPEFxn.
Student Exercises
e. For the File of type field, select Jar files (*.jar) from the list.
f. Select EDULogv2.jar and click Open.

g. Click Check In.
4. Verify that the new version was created. Locate the Major Version column in the list view and
confirm that the version value is 2.
Procedure 2: Update the Event Action

In this procedure, you edit the event action to associate it with the new version of code module.
1. Copy the object reference for the new code module version.
a. Select the code module EDULog.jar.
b. From the menu bar, click Action > Copy Object Reference.
No visible change occurs.
2. Select the event action to update:
a. Expand Sales > Events > Event Action.
b. In the list view, open the Properties page of the Log Event Action by right-clicking and
selecting Properties from the list.
The Log Action Properties window is displayed.
3. Update the event action with the new code module version:
a. Click the Properties tab and select the All Properties option in the Filter the properties
displayed field.
b. Scroll down to the Code Module property at the bottom of the window.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead c. Right-click the Code Module value field and click Paste Object.
The Select Object from Paste Buffer window opens.

d. Select the latest version (Version value is 2.00) object reference.
e. Click OK.
f. Click Apply to save the changes.
g. Click OK to close the window.
Procedure 3: Test the new Code Module

c. In the Administration Console, expand P8 Domain > Object Stores in the left pane.
d. Click Sales.
2. Add a document.
a. In the Sales tab, expand the Sales > Browse > Root Folder > Test Folder node on the left
pane.
b. Right-click the Test folder and click New Document.
c. Enter Log Update as the Document title.
d. Select Order from the list for the Class field.
e. Complete the wizard by clicking Next three times. Leave the default values for all the fields.
f. In the final page, view the summary and click Finish.
g. When the page displays that the document is created, click Close to close the New
Document tab.
3. In the Test folder tab, click Refresh.
a. Verify that the new document is listed.
Student Exercises
4. Verify that the file EventLog.txt was updated.

a. In Windows Explorer, open the following folder and locate the file:
C:\Program Files\IBM\WebSphere\AppServer\profiles\AppSrv01.
b. Verify that the EventLog.txt file has the current date and time.
Note
The updated Code Module generates an event log entry that also includes the name of user that
added the document:
The entry consists of the following statement:
A new document is created on: Day Mon DD HH:MM:SS EDT YYYY. Document class name =
Order, Document id = {GUID}
Added by: P8Admin
5. Verify that the log file has an entry for the Order document that you created.
a. Open the EventLog.txt file with the text editor. Example: Notepad
b. Verify that it includes a line that identifies the date and time that your new document was
created in the object store and the user who created it.
c. Close the EventLog.txt file.

d. Log out of the Administration Console for Content Platform Engine and close the browser.
e. Close the FileNet Enterprise Manager application.
V10.1
Student Exercises
Examine
EXNoSideHead a Workflow Subscription: Tour
In response to a fired event on an object, a Workflow Subscription launches a workflow. In this
activity, you examine a Subscription that is already configured on your student system.
Information
You can create a subscription that launches a workflow as well as executes an event action
handler.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Open a Workflow Subscription," on page 3-15
Procedure 2, "Explore the Workflow Subscription," on page 3-16
Procedure 3, "Test the Workflow Subscription," on page 3-17
Procedure 1: Open a Workflow Subscription

a. Go to the http://ecmedu01:9080/acce
b. Log in as theP8admin user (password: IBMFileNetP8)
2. Open a workflow subscription.
a. In the Sales object store tab, expand the Sales > Events, Actions, Processes node and click
the Subscriptions on the left pane.
b. In the Subscriptions tab, observe that Test Workflow Subscription is listed.
c. Verify that the subscription is enabled. The Enabled column has the value as True.
d. Click Test Workflow Subscription to open the Properties page.
Student Exercises
Procedure 2: Explore the Workflow Subscription

1. Open the General tab:
a. Verify that the Description field identifies it as a workflow subscription.
b. The Target ID is Product, indicating that the subscription monitors this object class.
2. Examine the Properties tab.
a. The Event Action field has a value: Workflow Event Action indicating that when an event
triggers a workflow is launched.
3. Examine the Configuration tab.
a. There are options to enable the event action to include the subclasses, and to run the event
action as a synchronously.
b. In the Filter expression field, you specify conditions to trigger the subscription. This workflow
is launched when quantity property has a value of 20.
4. Examine the Subscribed Events tab.
a. Creation Event is selected. When a document is created, it triggers the subscription.
5. Examine the WorkFlow tab.
Information
The Properties page for this subscription has a WorkFlow tab because it is a Workflow
Subscription. When the subscription is only associated with a custom event handler, the Properties
page does not have a WorkFlow tab.
a. Verify that for the Workflow definition field, Test Subscription Workflow is selected. (Version
number is selected at the time of creation but not shown in the view).
b. Scroll down and locate the Property Maps.
c. Notice that the workflow properties are mapped to the document properties.
6. Log out of Administration Console for Content Platform Engine and close the browser.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead
Important
The names of workflow and document properties do not have to match, but they must be of the
same data type. Example: both quantity properties are of integer type; description and
product_description are of string type.
Procedure 3: Test the Workflow Subscription

In this procedure, you create a document of Product class that triggers the workflow. You verify that
a workflow is launched and a work item is shown.
1. Start IBM Content Navigator for the Sample Desktop.
a. In your browser, go to http://ecmedu01:9080/navigator/?desktop=SampleDesktop.
IBMFileNetP8).
c. The IBM Content Navigator client opens with the Browse view.
d. Verify that Sales object store is shown.
2. Add a document.
a. Expand Sales object store node and click Test Folder in the left pane.
b. Click Add Document from the toolbar on the right pane. Add Document page opens.
3. Specify the content:
a. For the What do you want to save field, select Information about a document from the list.
4. Enter the properties:
a. In the Properties section, select Product from the list for the Class field. Notice that a list of
properties for this object class are displayed.
b. Enter the following values for each property:
Property Name Value
Document Title Subscription Test
product_id PYM01
product_description Good
price 15
20
quantity (This value needs to be 20 for the workflow to launch as
defined in the subscription filter).
c. Click Add.
d. Verify that the new document is listed.
Student Exercises
5. Verify that the workflow is launched and work item is shown.

a. Click the Work View icon on the left pane.
Information
Your student system is configured for the Workflow Subscription. When you add a document of
Product class, a workflow is launched. A work item is available in the Sales Officer in-box.
b. Expand Sales Officer and click My work items.

c. Verify that a work item with the subject Verify the subscription is listed with the current date
and time.
d. Notice that the product_id, quantity, and description fields have the same values that you set
for the document properties. These fields are the workflow properties that are mapped to the
document properties
e. Log out of Administration Console for Content Platform Engine and Content Navigator.
f. Close the browsers.
V10.1
Student Exercises
Create
EXNoSideHead a Subscription with an Event Action: Practice
Scenario: Create an automated action for the Sales Department

Sales Department of your company requests the following automated action
for their IBM FileNet Content Manager system: Whenever, a business user
creates a Project folder, they want specific subfolders to be automatically
created for that project.
Name of the sub folders: Contracts, Orders, and Quotes
The Solution Developer provides you the Java code that creates these
subfolders. As the Solution Builder, you must create a Subscription with an
Event Action that uses the code.
Challenge
Create an event action with Code Module. Associate it with a
Subscription and test it. Use the data in the following tables.
Data for creating an Event Action

Item Value
Name of the Event Action CreateProjectSubFoldersAction
Initial Status: Enabled
Class
Handler Java Class:
Type of Event Action
com.ibm.filenet.edu.CreateProjectSubFoldersActio
n
Configure code module: Yes
C:\LabFiles\ExtendCPEFxn\CreateProjectSubFold
Location of the Java class
ersAction.class
.class
File type
(Note: You used .jar type in the previous activity)
Hint
Steps:
1. Create an Event Action with a code module in FileNet Enterprise Manager.
2. Create a Subscription in Administration Console for Content Platform Engine.
Student Exercises
3. Test the subscription by creating the specified folder under the Test folder in Administration
Console for Content Platform Engine.
Data for creating a Subscription

Item Value
Engine account (logon/password)
Object store Sales
Target Object
ProjectFolder
(Folder Class name)
Sales > Data Design > Classes > Folder >
Folder class node in the object store
ProjectFolder
Name of the Subscription Project Folder Subscription
Scope: Apply to all objects of this class
Subscription Behavior
(default value)
Triggers > Event Name Creation event
Name of the Event Action CreateProjectSubFoldersAction
Initial state: Enabled
Specify Additional Options
Subclass option: Include Subclasses
Verification
Create a folder (Name: Subscription Test) of ProjectFolder class
under the Test Folder in Administration Console for Content Platform
Engine. Verify that the subfolders (Contracts, Orders, and Quotes) are
created under the Project folder.
V10.1
Student Exercises
Unit 4. Configure IBM Content Navigator

EXNoSideHead
Unit Overview
Lessons
Lesson 4.1, "Configure a Content Navigator Desktop," on page 4-3
Unit Dependencies
Requirements

System Startup
System Check
Copyright IBM Corp. 2013, 2015 Unit 4. Configure IBM Content Navigator 4-1
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Lesson
EXNoSideHead 4.1. Configure a Content Navigator Desktop

The Content Navigator installation provides the Admin desktop for
administering the web client. You must create at least one desktop for
business users. In addition, you must also configure connections to your
Content Management repositories to access content through the web client.
As a Solution Builder, you configure these features in the IBM Content
Navigator web client application.
Activities
Configure a Content Navigator Desktop: Activity, on page 4-5
Configure a Content Navigator Desktop: Practice, on page 4-17
User accounts
Engine
Note
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Configure
EXNoSideHead a Content Navigator Desktop: Activity
In this activity, you configure a new desktop in the IBM Content Navigator web client application.
You also change the appearance of the banner for this decktop.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Configure Repositories," on page 4-5
Procedure 2, "Create a Desktop," on page 4-8
Procedure 3, "Configure the Layout and Menus," on page 4-9
Procedure 4, "Configure Workflow options," on page 4-10
Procedure 5, "Save the Desktop Configuration and test," on page 4-10
Procedure 6, "Edit the Desktop to customize the Banner," on page 4-12
Procedure 7, "Configure Sample Desktop as the default," on page 4-14
Procedure 1: Configure Repositories

To access the content in an IBM FileNet P8 repository, you must first configure IBM Content
Navigator to connect to that repository. Then, you must associate a desktop with this repository to
enable users to access the content.
a. In your browser, go to http://ecmedu01:9080/navigator/?desktop=admin. The URL
value is case-sensitive.
b. Enter the logon credentials for an administrator:
User name: P8admin
2. Create a connection to a repository.
a. On the Admin desktop, click Repositories in the left pane. On the Repositories tab is a list of
the repositories that are configured.
b. Click New Repository and select FileNet Content Manager.
c. On the General tab of the New Repository page, enter a value for the Display name field,
(Example: SalesQA).
d. The ID field is automatically populated based on the Display name field entry.
Hint
Click the question mark next to each field name to get more details about that field.
e. Enter the Server URL: iiop://ecmedu01:2809/FileNet/Engine. ecmedu01 is your server

name.
Student Exercises
f. Enter a value for the object store symbolic name: SalesQA

g. Enter a value for the object store display name: SalesQA
h. Click Connect to test the repository connection.
i. In the Log In page, enter the logon credentials for an administrator and click Log In.
User name: P8admin
j. Save the changes by clicking Save.
3. Configure Parameters:
a. In the Configuration Parameters tab, select Enable to use Teamspaces on this repository.
b. Accept the default value (Yes) to Add and Check in as a Major version.
c. Select Inherit from the document for Annotation security.
d. Select a value from the list for workflow connection point. (Example: P8ConnPt2:2)
e. For all other fields, leave the defaults.

4. Set the system properties to display for documents.
a. On the System Properties tab, accept the default values.
The document properties that are listed in Selected Properties are displayed.
V10.1
Student Exercises
5. Set the system properties to display for folders.

EXNoSideHead
a. Select Folders from the list for the System properties for field.
b. Select Folder Name in the Available Properties pane.
c. Move it to the Selected Properties pane by clicking the forward arrow.
d. The Folder Name property is listed in the Selected Properties pane.
6. Configure the properties to display in the Browse view.
a. On the Browse tab, the properties in the Selected Properties pane are shown in the content
list for users.
b. Select customer_name in the Available Properties pane.
c. Move it to the Selected Properties pane by clicking the forward arrow.
d. Change the order of the properties in the Selected Properties by clicking the upward or
downward arrow.
7. Configure the Search view.
a. In the Search tab, select the values that are given in the following data table.
Field Value
Cross-repository searches Enable
Number of results Limit to:10
Timeout (in seconds) Limit to:180
Match All of the search criteria
Default Search Type Documents
8. Configure Searchable properties.
a. Users can search on the properties in the Displayed Properties list.
b. In the Search tab > Searchable properties section, move the following properties to the
Hidden Properties pane to hide them. Use the forward arrow.
Application name
Classification Status
Is Frozen Version
9. Configure Search operators.
a. You can use the operators in the Displayed Operators list for search.
b. In the Search tab > Search operators section, move Include Any to the Hidden Operators
pane to hide them. Use the forward arrow.
10. Configure Search results.
a. In the Search tab > Search results section, the properties in the Displayed Properties list are
shown for the search results.
b. Leave the defaults for this exercise.
c. You can move the properties from the Displayed Properties list to hide them from the Search
results. Use the Forward arrow.
Student Exercises
11. Save the configuration settings for the new repository.

a. Click Save and Close to save the settings and close the New Repository tab.
b. During repository configuration, save your work at stages by clicking Save.
12. Test the new repository.
a. Verify that the new repository is listed on the Repositories tab.
b. This repository is now available to be used in the Content Navigator.
Procedure 2: Create a Desktop

1. If the IBM Content Navigator is not already opened, start the IBM Content Navigator.
a. In your browser, go to http://ecmedu01:9080/navigator/?desktop=admin. The URL
value is case-sensitive.
b. Enter the logon credentials (user name: P8admin, password: IBMFileNetP8).
2. Create a desktop.
a. In the Desktops tab, a list of the existing desktops is shown. Click New Desktop.
b. On the General tab, enter a name for your desktop, for example My Desktop.
Note
The ID field is automatically populated based on the Name field entry.

This desktop ID is used in the URL for accessing the desktop. It is case-sensitive.
3. Specify a repository (already configured) that you want to use to authenticate users.
a. Select Sales from the list for the Repository field.
b. Select Enable to Limit access to specific users and groups.
c. Click Select Users.
d. Enter the logon credentials (user name: P8admin, password: IBMFileNetP8).
e. In the Add Users and Groups page, search for P8admin.
f. Move it to the Selected pane.
g. Select Allow from the list for the Permission field.
h. Click Add to save the changes and close the page.
i. Repeat the steps to add the user called burt.
4. Select a Viewer map for the Viewer map field:
a. On the General tab, verify that Default viewer map is selected in the list.
5. Configure Error message information:
a. Accept the default option (IBM Information center).
V10.1
Student Exercises
6. Set this desktop as the default desktop:

EXNoSideHead
a. In the Additional Settings area, select the option Set as the default desktop.
b. For all other fields, leave the defaults.
You can also control some aspects of how documents are added and checked in and
prevent users from some actions.
7. Click the Mobile tab and explore the options available for the Mobile applications.
a. Leave the defaults.
8. Specify the repositories that can be accessed from this desktop.
a. On the Repositories tab, move Sales from Available to Selected Repositories.
Use the right arrow to move it.
b. Move more repositories. (Example: LoanProcess, SalesQA, and P8ConfigObjectStore)
When you move your mouse over a repository name, the repository type and connection
details are shown.
9. Configure an application name for this desktop:
a. On the Appearance tab, enter a value for the Application name (Example: My Desktop).
This value is displayed at the top of the page and on the Log In page for this desktop.
You can also change other aspects of the banner and login pages in this section.
Procedure 3: Configure the Layout and Menus

1. On the Appearance tab, scroll down to the Layout section.
2. Select the features that you want to display in this desktop.
a. Verify that Browse, Favorites, and Search are listed in the Selected Features pane.
b. If they are not already moved, move Browse, Favorites, and Search.
c. Move Work from Available to Selected Features by clicking the right arrow.
d. Arrange them into the order that you want by clicking the up and down arrows.
3. Set a feature to be the default for this desktop.
The web client opens with this feature when a user logs in to this desktop.
a. Select Browse from the list for the Default feature field.
4. Set default repositories for other features:
a. On the Appearance tab, scroll down to the Default repository section.
b. Select Sales as a default repository for the Work view.
c. Select Sales as a default repository for the Search and Browse views.
A user can switch to other available repositories for searching and browsing.
d. Click Save to save the changes.
Student Exercises
5. Set other options for appearance:

a. Select Enable to show document thumbnails for documents in a preview pane.
b. Leave the default value (Disable) for the Filmstrip view for this activity.
c. Select the Enable option to show global toolbar above the content in the web client.
6. Set menu options for the desktop:
You can specify the default toolbars and menus, or use custom toolbars and menus that are
created and registered as plug-ins.
a. On the Menus tab, scroll down to see the options available for each menu.
b. Accept the defaults for this activity.
Procedure 4: Configure Workflow options

1. Click the Workflows tab.
a. Select Sales from the list for the Repository field.
b. When you are prompted to log in, enter the logon credentials for an administrator.
User name: P8admin
c. Select DefaultApplication from Available to Selected Application Spaces. Use the right arrow
to move it.
2. Repeat the step 1 to select the application spaces for other repositories in the list (Example:
LoanProcess and SalesQA).
Procedure 5: Save the Desktop Configuration and test

1. Click Save and Close to save the Changes and to close the tab.
2. Verify that the new desktop is listed on the Desktops tab. Log out and close the browser.
V10.1
Student Exercises
3. Test the new desktop by accessing it with the (case sensitive) web address for that desktop in a
EXNoSideHead
browser: http://ecmedu01:9080/navigator/?desktop=MyDesktop
a. Enter the logon credentials for a business user.
User name: burt
Password: filenet
The desktop opens to the specified default feature page (Browse).
b. Verify that the application name is shown in the banner area at the top of the page.
c. The global toolbar that you enabled is shown at the top of the page.
d. Log out of IBM Content Navigator.

4. Log in as olivia (password:filenet) who does not have access to the desktop.
a. Verify that do not have access message is shown.
Note
After creating a desktop, you can copy your desktop and save it as another desktop.
The http://ecmedu01:9080/navigator/ URL also brings up your desktop, since you set your
desktop as the default desktop.
Student Exercises
Procedure 6: Edit the Desktop to customize the Banner

1. Start the IBM Content Navigator admin page.
a. In your browser, go to http://ecmedu01:9080/navigator/?desktop=admin.
b. Enter the logon credentials for an administrator.
User name: P8admin
2. Edit the desktop.
a. On the Admin desktop, the Desktops tab is already opened.
b. In the Desktops tab, right-click My Desktop that you created and click Edit.
c. Click the Appearance tab.
3. For the Banner and Login Page section, enter the values in the table.
Field Name Option Value
Banner Logo URL MyImages/IBM_Nav_logo.png
Banner background color Custom #FFFFCC
Application name text color Custom #006600
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead
Note
An image for the banner logo is already copied into the C:\Program
Files\IBM\WebSphere\AppServer\profiles\AppSrv01\installedApps\P8Node01Cell\navigat
or.ear\navigator.war\MyImages folder.
4. Click Save and close.

a. If prompted, click Close on the Information page.
b. Log out of the IBM Content Navigator.
5. Test the desktop banner.

a. Start your desktop in a browser: http://ecmedu01:9080/navigator/?desktop=MyDesktop
b. Enter the logon credentials (user name: p8admin, password: IBMFileNetP8). The desktop
opens.
Student Exercises
6. Observe the following changes (as you configured) in the banner for your desktop.
- The banner background color
- Banner logo
- Application name text color
7. Compare the banner appearance with the desktop before editing.
Procedure 7: Configure Sample Desktop as the default

Before you created My Desktop as the default, Sample Desktop was the default desktop. In this
procedure, you reset the Sample Desktop configuration.
1. In your browser, go to http://ecmedu01:9080/navigator/?desktop=admin.
a. Enter the logon credentials for an administrator.
User name: P8admin
2. In the Desktops tab, My Desktop is shown as the default desktop.
a. Click Sample Desktop to select it and click Edit.
3. Set Sample Desktop as the default desktop:

a. On the Sample Desktop tab > General subtab, Scroll down to Desktop configuration section.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead b. In the Additional Settings area, select the option Set as the default desktop.
c. Click Save and Close.

d. In the Desktops tab, verify that Sample Desktop is shown as the default desktop.
4. Log out of IBM Content Navigator and close the Browser.
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Configure
EXNoSideHead a Content Navigator Desktop: Practice
Scenario: Create a Desktop for Loan Department

Loan Process Department requests a customized desktop for their business
use and they provide specifications for their desktop. As their administrator,
you must configure a desktop with their specifications.
Challenge
Create and configure a desktop.
Data
Item Value
Engine account (logon/password)
IBM Content Navigator Administrator account
(logon/password)
Business User accounts for this desktop sydney/filenet
(logon/password) sylvia/filenet
Repositories to add to the desktop LoanProcess
Default Repository LoanProcess
Default Feature Browse
Viewer Map, Layout, and Menu Use Default.
Hint
You must log in as P8admin to configure the desktop. After the
configuration, log in as Sydney or Sylvia to test the desktop.
The URL for the desktop:
http://ecmedu01:9080/navigator/?desktop=<your Desktop name>
Verification
Log in to the desktop that you created. Verify that the desktop contains
the repositories and other settings as you configured.
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Unit 5. Security
EXNoSideHead
Unit overview
Lessons
Lesson 5.1, "Security Concepts," on page 5-7
Lesson 5.2, "Modify Direct Security," on page 5-17
Lesson 5.3, "Configure object store security," on page 5-29
Lesson 5.4, "Configure Class and Property Security," on page 5-47
Lesson 5.5, "Configure Security Inheritance," on page 5-55
Lesson 5.6, "Work with Security Policies," on page 5-69
Requirements
Clearing the browser cache

In some instances, the browser cache might contain security information that prevents you from
logging onto an application. If you see the following message, you must clear the browser cache
before you can continue.
To clear the browse cache, do the following:

1. In Firefox, click Tools > Clear Recent History.
Copyright IBM Corp. 2013, 2015 Unit 5. Security 5-1

Student Exercises
2. On the Clear All History window, click Clear Now.
3. With the browser cache cleared, you can proceed with the lab activity.
Users and groups list

This table shows the users and groups defined on your student system.
Group Members Object stores
P8ConfigObjectStore
#Authenticated Users *
SalesSBx
Accounting Allison
Finance admins
Admins
Legal
AEadmin
AEAdmins LoanProcessQA
P8Admin
Allen
Agent
Amy
Approver Ana
BPM Administrator P8admin
BPM Designer P8admin
BPM User P8admin
P8admin
Case admins
Sue
Sue
Case initiators P8admin
Cody
Sue
Cody
Case workers
Fred
Addington
P8admin LoanProcess
CEadmins
Ceadmin LoanProcessQA
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead
Clara
Clerks LoanProcessQA
Clark
Components Component
Connie
Coordinators
Conrad
Customers Customer
Adam
Finance Admins Allison LoanProcessQA
Steve
Carol
Finance Clerks LoanProcessQA
Charles
Mark
Finance Managers LoanProcessQA
May
Richard
Finance reviewers LoanProcessQA
Roberta
Larry
Legal
Linda
Barb
Loan business analysts LoanProcess
Barry
Burke
Loan business users LoanProcess
Burt
Gabe
LoanProcess
Loan guests Gail
loanGuest
Mabel
Mac
Loan Managers LoanProcess
Mary
Matt
Olivia LoanProcess
Loan officers
Oscar
Opal
Loan operations LoanProcess
Ophelia
Pat
Loan processors LoanProcess
Peter
Sydney
Loan system administrators LoanProcess
Sylvia
Uma
Loan underwriters LoanProcess
Uri
Manny
Managers
Mary
Opal
Operations
Oscar

Student Exercises

P8ConfigObjectStore
LoanProcess
P8admins P8admin LoanProcessQA
Sales
SalesQA
CaseAdmins
CaseWorkers
CaseInitiators
Accounting
Agent
Approver
BPM Administrator
BPM Designer
BPM User
Clerks
Components
Coordinators
Customers
Finance Admins
Finance Clerks
Finance Managers
Finance Reviewers
Legal Sales
P8users Loan Business Analysts
Loan Business Users SalesQA
Loan Guests
Loan Managers
Loan Officers
Loan Operations
Loan Processors
Loan System Admins
Loan Underwriters
Managers
Operations
ProductDev
QualityAssurance
Reviewer
Supervisor
SysAdmins
joe
loanGuest
p8guest
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead
P8admin
PEadmins LoanProcess
PEadmin
Pamela
ProductDev
Paul
Queenie
QualityAssurance
Quincy
Reviewer Mark
Supervisor Sue
P8admin
CEadmin
Scott
Sysadmins
Steve
AEadmin
PEadmin

Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Lesson
EXNoSideHead 5.1. Security Concepts
Overview

You are going to implement and maintain the security on your IBM FileNet P8
business solution. You need to be familiar with the basic security concepts.
Activities
Resolve Logon Failure, on page 5-9
Verify object store access: Practice, on page 5-15
User accounts
Operating system Administrator passw0rd
P8 Domain p8admin IBMFileNetP8
Note
Before you begin

Ensure that your student system is started.
If it is not started, run StartServer.bat from the WebSphere Admin folder on
your desktop and then wait for the startup sequence to complete before you
continue.

Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Resolve
EXNoSideHead Logon Failure
Introduction
In this exercise, you simulate a problem with the authentication provider and
then observe the results.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Stop the authentication provider," on page 5-9
Procedure 2, "Observe logon failure," on page 5-9
Procedure 3, "Observe object store access," on page 5-10
Procedure 4, "Create a user," on page 5-11
Procedure 5, "Log on to IBM Content Navigator as outsider," on page 5-12
Procedure 6, "Log on to Workplace XT as outsider," on page 5-12
Procedure 1: Stop the authentication provider

You stop the service that provides authentication information to the web application server and then
observe the effects on the users who attempt to log on.
1. On the desktop of your student system, click Start > Services.
2. Select IBM Tivoli Directory Server Instance V6.3 - dsrdbm01
3. Stop the service.
Procedure 2: Observe logon failure

Carol, a user, complains that she cannot log onto the system. You need to determine the reason.
Assume that you have already eliminated the possibility that her account information is wrong.
1. Use Firefox to log on to IBM Content Navigator as carol:
- http://ecmedu01:9080/navigator
- User name: carol
- Password: filenet
2. Verify that you get an error with the logon that indicates the wrong username or password was
used.
3. Verify that the Content Platform Engine is running by going to the CE Ping Page.

Student Exercises
Note
The ping page is up. You have verified that the Content Platform Engine is running. You can check
the log files to find out what happened.
4. Copy the location of the log files from the CE Ping page.
5. Using Windows Explorer, open the p8_server_error.log file from this location:
- C:\Program Files\IBM\WebSphere\AppServer\profiles\AppSrv01\FileNet\server1
6. Search the log files for any errors that relate to connectivity to the LDAP provider.
7. Use Windows Services console to restart IBM Tivoli Directory Server Instance V6.3 - dsrdbm01.
Procedure 3: Observe object store access

Object stores are usually secured by using group memberships. Users who have access to object
stores can log on and use the object stores. In addition, when a user logs on to IBM Content
Navigator, the desktop must have the object store configured as a repository for that desktop.
1. Log on to IBM Content Navigator as carol:
- User name: carol
- Password: filenet
2. Verify that you can see the following object stores in the repository menu:
- LoanProcess
- Sales
- LoanProcessQA
- SalesSBx
- Marketing (if you completed the unit Build the Object Store)
3. Attempt to open each of the object stores from the object stores menu.
4. Verify that carol is denied access to LoanProcess, but is able to view LoanProcessQA, Sales,
and SalesSBx.
6. Use Firefox to log on to Workplace XT as carol.
- URL: http://ecmedu01:9080/WorkplaceXT
- User name: carol
- Password: filenet
7. Verify that you can see the following object stores in the Workplace XT navigation panel:
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead - LoanProcessQA
- P8ConfigObjectStoreLog out
- Sales
- SalesQA
- SalesSBx
- Marketing (if you completed the unit Build the Object Store)
8. Log out of Workplace XT.
Information
You can see more object stores in Workplace XT than in IBM Content Navigator because, in
addition to having authorization to use the object store, the object store must be defined as a
repository for your IBM Content Navigator desktop.
Procedure 4: Create a user

A user must have permission on at least one object store in order to log on to an IBM FileNet
Content Manager client. However, if an object store is configured so that #AUTHENTICATED
USERS have access, then anyone who can log into the domain can have access. You are going to
create a user for testing system security. Use Internet Explorer for connecting to Tivoli Directory
Service Web Administration Tool in order to ensure proper correct user interface presentation.
1. Use Internet Explorer to go to the Tivoli Directory Service Web Administration Tool.
- http://localhost:9080/IDSWebApp/
- User DN: cn=root
2. In the navigation pane, expand Directory Management > Manage entries.
3. In the details area, expand o=sample by clicking the plus (+) sign.
4. Expand cn=users.
5. Click Add to add a new user.

Student Exercises
6. In the Select object class window, do the following steps:

a. Select inetOrgPerson from the Structural object class menu.
b. Click Next.
Note
You use inetOrgPerson to match the other entries in LDAP.
7. On the Select auxiliary object classes page, click Next.

8. On the Required Attributes page, enter the following information, an then click Next:
- Relative DN: cn=outsider
- Parent DN: cn=users,o=sample
- cn: outsider
- sn: outsider
9. On the Optional Attributes page, do the following steps:
a. Scroll down to the bottom of the page.
b. Enter a value for userPassword: filenet
c. Click Finish.
d. Click No to add a similar entry.
Procedure 5: Log on to IBM Content Navigator as outsider

1. Attempt to log on to IBM Content Navigator as outsider:
- User name: outsider
- Password: filenet
2. Verify that you cannot log on.
Information
Outsider does not have access to the object stores defined for the default user desktop. A user
must have access to at least one object store in order to log on. In some cases, an authorization
problem might appear to be an authentication problem.
Procedure 6: Log on to Workplace XT as outsider

1. Log on to Workplace XT as outsider.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead - http://ecmedu01:9080/WorkplaceXT
- User name: outsider
- Password: filenet
2. Verify that you can log on. Outsider has access to two object stores: P8ConfigObjectStore and
SalesSBx.
Information
The P8ConfigObjectStore and SalesSBx object stores were configured to allow all authenticated
users to access them. Therefore, anyone who can log in with the authentication provider can also
access these object stores. Ensure that security issues are resolved before moving any solution
into production.
Remember that if someone cannot log onto IBM Content Navigator, it is not always an
authentication problem.

Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Verify
EXNoSideHead object store access: Practice
Introduction
In this exercise, you log onto Workplace XT as different users to see the
effects that group membership has on object store visibility.
Challenge
Log onto Workplace XT as various users. Note any differences in object
store visibility.
Data
Use the users and groups list Table on page 5-1for user names to test.
All passwords (except for administrators) are filenet.
Hint
Try using users from groups that have access to different object stores.
Try using groups that do not have access to any object stores.
Verification
Verify that the LoanProcess, LoanProcessQA, Sales, SalesQA object stores
are not visible to all users.
Summary
In this lesson, you did the following tasks:
Resolved logon failure from stopped authentication system.
Observed logon failure from failed object store authorization.
Observed object store security.

Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Lesson
EXNoSideHead 5.2. Modify Direct Security
Overview

Users with sufficient authorization can change the direct security on
documents. This is particularly true with the owner of the document. You are
going to change security of a document.
Activities
Change direct security of a document: Activity, on page 5-19
Customize access: Activity, on page 5-25
User accounts
Finance clerk Carol filenet
Finance clerk Charles filenet
Note

Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Change
EXNoSideHead direct security of a document: Activity
Introduction
In this exercise, you create a document as one user in order to observe
default instance security. You then modify the security directly and observe
the results.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Add a folder and document," on page 5-19
Procedure 2, "Verify access," on page 5-20
Procedure 3, "Remove group access to a document," on page 5-20
Procedure 4, "Verify that access is removed," on page 5-21
Procedure 5, "Change access level," on page 5-21
Procedure 6, "Remove ownership," on page 5-22
Procedure 7, "Change ownership," on page 5-23
Procedure 8, "Verify the change in ownership," on page 5-24
Procedure 1: Add a folder and document

You create a document and then change security on it.
1. Log on to IBM Content Navigator as carol:
- User name: carol
- Password: filenet
2. Open the LoanProcessQA object store.
3. Create a folder:
b. Name the folder Loandocs.
4. Open the Loandocs folder.
5. Create a document:
a. Click Add Document.
b. For the document content, select any file from C:\LabFiles\SampleDocuments.
c. Click Add.

Student Exercises
Procedure 2: Verify access

1. Log on to IBM Content Navigator as charles.
- User name: charles
- Password: filenet
4. Verify that you can see and open the document.
Procedure 3: Remove group access to a document

1. Log on to IBM Content Navigator as carol.
- User name: carol
- Password: filenet
4. Open the properties of the document.
5. Open the Security tab.
6. Verify the following settings:
Access group Members
AEAdmins
CEAdmins
Finance Admins
Owners
P8Admin
P8Admins
carol
Clerks
Finance Clerks
Readers
Finance Managers
Finance Reviewers
V10.1
Student Exercises
7. Remove the permission for Finance Clerks to read the document.

EXNoSideHead
a. Click the X on the Finance Clerks group.
b. Click Save.
Procedure 4: Verify that access is removed

Carol has removed access to the document to Finance Clerks. Other Finance clerks, such as
Charles, should no longer see the document. However, Carol still has access. You are going to
verify these statements.
1. Log on to IBM Content Navigator as Charles.
- User name: charles
- Password: filenet
2. Go to LoanProcessQA > Loandocs.
3. Verify that the folder is empty.
Procedure 5: Change access level

Finance Managers should be authors of the document. As an owner, Carol can change access
levels.
1. Log on to IBM Content Navigator as Carol.
- User name: carol
- Password: filenet
2. Go to LoanProcessQA > Loandocs.
3. Open the document Properties page.

Student Exercises
5. Click Finance Managers.

6. Select Author from the Permissions menu.
7. Click OK.
8. Verify that Finance Managers are now in the Authors group.
9. Click Save.
Procedure 6: Remove ownership

Carol has removed Finance Clerks from the document Readers. Other Finance Clerks can no
longer access the document. However, Carol can still access the document. Carol will now remove
herself from the document owners. You are logged on to IBM Content Navigator as Carol. You are
in the Loandocs folder of the LoanProcessQA object store.
1. Open the Security tab for the document.
2. Remove carol from the Owners group.
3. Click Save. Note that you can still see the file.
Note
You might think that Carols continued access to the file is caused by browser caching or some
other glitch. It is not, but you can test this hypothesis if you want.
V10.1
Student Exercises
Procedure
EXNoSideHead 7: Change ownership
Both Finance Clerks and Carol have been removed from the documents ACL. However, Carol can
still see it. To find out why she can still see it, you must use Administration Console for Content
Platform Engine to investigate.
1. Use Firefox to log on to Administration Console for Content Platform Engine:
- URL: http://emcedu01:9080/acce
- User name: p8admin
2. Go to LoanProcessQA > Browse > Root Folder > Loandocs.
3. Open the document properties.
5. Verify that Carol is still the owner.
a. Scroll down the page to the Owner/Active Markings area.
b. Confirm that the Owner is CN=carol, cn=users,o=sample.
6. Change the owner to Charles:

a. Click Change Owner.
b. Select the Change Owner to option.
c. Click Find.
d. Search for Charles.
e. Select Charles and click the right-facing arrow.
f. Click OK.
g. Verify that Charles is now the owner.
7. Click Save.
8. Log out from Administration Console for Content Platform Engine.

Student Exercises
Information
The Owner of a document is not the same thing as a member of the Owner role in the ACL. The
Owner of an object has implicit READ, WRITE_OWNER and WRITE_ACL privileges no matter
what is in the object's ACL.
These implicit rights can be lost by marking sets.
Procedure 8: Verify the change in ownership

1. Verify that Charles can see the document:
a. Log on to IBM Content Navigator as Charles.
b. Go to LoanProcessQA > Loandocs.
c. Verify that you can see the document.
2. Verify that Carol cannot see the document:
a. Log on to IBM Content Navigator as Carol.
b. Go to LoanProcessQA > Loandocs.
c. Verify that you cannot see the document.
V10.1
Student Exercises
Customize
EXNoSideHead access: Activity
Introduction
In IBM Content Navigator, you can specify security on a document or folder
using predefined security roles, including:
Owner
Author
Reader
No access
Each of these groups has a predefined set of access rights.
In Administration Console for Content Platform Engine, you can specify
security using predefined Permission Groups. These groups are similar to,
but not identical with the roles in IBM Content Navigator. The groups include:
Full Control
Minor versioning
major versioning
Modify properties
View content
View properties
Publish
Create subfolder
Custom
In this exercise, you are going to see how to use Permission Groups for
common security scenarios, and specify custom permissions for fine-grained
security configurations.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Add typical document permissions," on page 5-25
Procedure 2, "Edit security settings," on page 5-27
Procedure 1: Add typical document permissions

You create a document and then modify permissions for different security principals using the
predefined Permission Groups.
1. Log on to Administration Console for Content Platform Engine as p8admin.
2. Open the SalesSBx object store.
3. Go to Browse > Root Folder.

Student Exercises
4. Use the Actions menu to create a folder named Access Test.

5. Add a document to this folder, using one of the files in C:\LabFiles\SampleDocuments as a
content element.
a. Click Actions > New Document.
b. Name the document anything that you want.

c. Click Add to add a content element.
d. Browse to select a document from C:\LabFiles\SampleDocuments.
e. Select default values to complete the wizard.
f. Open the properties of the document.
6. On the document properties page, open the Security tab.
7. Add Major Versioning permission to Coordinators.
a. Click Add.
b. Search for Coordinators.
c. Add Coordinators to Selected Users and groups.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead d. Select Major Versioning from the Permission group menu.
Troubleshooting
If all the rights do not show, logout and log back in to retry.
e. Verify that the following individual permissions are selected:

View all properties
View content
Change state
Major versioning
Read permissions
Modify all properties
Link a document/Annotate
Create instance
Minor versioning
Unlink document
f. Click OK.
8. Click Save.
Procedure 2: Edit security settings

The Major Versioning Permission group has permissions that are not quite what you need. You do
not want coordinators to be able to unlink a document. You can specify security more precisely by

Student Exercises
setting custom permissions. You are logged on to Administration Console for Content Platform
Engine as p8admin. You are viewing document properties.
1. Select the Coordinators row.
2. Click Edit.
3. Clear the Unlink document permission.

4. Click OK.
5. Click Save.
6. Verify that the Permission group for Coordinators is now Custom.
Summary
In this lesson, you completed the following tasks:
Modified direct security on a document.
Changed the owner of a document.
Customized user permissions on a document.
Observed the effects of implicit denial.
V10.1
Student Exercises
Lesson
EXNoSideHead 5.3. Configure object store security
Overview

Your IBM FileNet P8 solution design identifies specific security requirements
for the object store used in the business solution. As the solution builder you
must implement these security requirements. Document security begins with
object store security. Correctly configured object store security can make the
difference between a security schema that is effective and flexible and one
that must be constantly worked around.
Activities
Configure Initial Object Store Security: Exercise, on page 5-31
Add groups to an object store using a supergroup: Procedure, on
page 5-37
Use the Security Script wizard: Procedure, on page 5-43
Configure Finance for Content Navigator: Exercise, on page 5-45
User accounts
Legal user Larry filenet
unauthorized
outsider filenet
authenticated user
Finance Admin Adam filenet
Finance Admin Allison filenet
Note

ddd

Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Configure
EXNoSideHead Initial Object Store Security: Exercise
Introduction
In this exercise, you create an object store. You specify security on the object
store so that all P8 users (but not all authenticated users) can see it.
The procedure for creating an object store is covered in the unit: Build an
Object Store.
Important
You must complete this exercise to continue the lesson exercises.
Scenario
The Finance department needs an object store for its operations. All P8
users must have default access to the object store. You can further configure
security on objects within the object store at a later time.
Challenge
Create an object store for Finance.
Provide basic user access to the P8users group.
Reference
Review the procedure for creating an object store: "Create an Object Store:
Activity" on page 2-14
Object Store Data

Use this data in the object store creation wizard.
Page Property Value
Name the Object Store Display name Finance
Database Connection FNOSDS
Define the Database
Schema name Finance
Select the Type of Storage Area
for Content
Grant Administrative Access Administrative users P8admins (remove P8Admin)
Grant Basic Access Basic access users P8users
Workplace/Workplace XT
Select Add-ons Add-ons
Configuration

Student Exercises
Important
For Add-ons, click the Workplace/Workplace XT Configuration button above the table.
Test user data

Use the following users for testing object store security.
Larry (from the Legal department)
Outsider (see "Create a user" on page 5-11)
Passwords are both filenet.
Verification
Object store creation success message.
Use Workplace XT to test object store security.
Larry can access the object store.
Outsider cannot see the object store.
V10.1
Student Exercises
Modify
EXNoSideHead Root Folder Security: Procedure
Introduction
The initial security on the object store allows P8users to use the object store.
However, you do not want everyone to be able to add folders at the root
level. This permission must be given only to Finance Administrators.
Scenario
You have created an object store. The object store currently allows all P8
users default permission (Use object store). Any users can currently add
documents and folders to the Root folder. In order to reserve the right to
organize the top folders for P8admins, you must remove this access. You
must also create the folders in which Finance users can create subfolders.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Edit Root Folder security," on page 5-33
Procedure 2, "Add a folder for Finance group," on page 5-34
Procedure 1: Edit Root Folder security

Restrict general Root Folder permissions but give special permissions to the Finance Admins
group.
2. Open the Finance object store.
3. Expand the Browse node.
4. Open the properties page for the Root Folder.
5. Open the Security tab for Root Folder.
6. Edit the P8Users access control entry:
a. Select the P8users entry.

Student Exercises
b. Click Edit.
c. In the Permission group menu, select View Properties.

d. Click OK.
7. Provide Finance Admins with Root Folder access:
a. Click Add.
b. Search for Finance Admins.
c. Add Finance Admins group to the Selected Users and Groups.
d. Select This Object Only from the Apply To field.
e. Specify the following custom permissions:
View all properties.
Create subfolder.
Read Permissions.
f. Click OK.
8. Click Save to save the changes on the Root Folder.
Information
Finance Admins are now allowed to add subfolders to the Root Folder. Finance Admins can then
specify security on the folders that they create.
Procedure 2: Add a folder for Finance group

Users in the various Finance groups need to be able to add folders and documents, but they can
only be allowed to do this in designated subfolders. The P8 administrator has given the Finance
Admin group permission to add subfolders to the Root Folder. You log on as a Finance Admin to
add a folder and observe the permissions.
1. Use Firefox to log on to Workplace XT as Adam.
- User name: adam
- Password: filenet
V10.1
Student Exercises
2. Open the Finance object store.

EXNoSideHead
3. Create a subfolder named Invoices.
4. Add Finance groups to the folder permissions:
a. Select the Invoices folder.
b. Right-click the Invoices folder.
c. Select More information > Security.
d. Click Add New.
e. Search for Finance groups.
f. Select all Finance groups by holding the shift key and selecting the first and last group.
g. Click Accept.
5. Edit the permissions for each group:
a. Click Finance Admins.
b. Select the Allow option in the Owner Control row.
c. Click Accept.
d. Use this data to configure permissions for the remaining Finance groups:
Group Access Level
Finance Admins Owner Control
Finance Clerks Create subfolder
Create Subfolder
Finance Managers
File in folder
Finance Reviewers File in Folder
e. Verify that the completed folder ACL looks like this:
f. Click OK.

Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Add
EXNoSideHead groups to an object store using a supergroup: Procedure
Introduction
After you create an object store, you might have to add group access to new
groups that did not exist when you first created the object store. When the
object store is created, specified groups have access because they are
added when the object store is instantiated. You cannot add new groups to
the object store security because too many instantiated objects would need
to be updated.
You can add groups to an existing object store in either of two ways:
Using supergroups.
Using the security script wizard.
In this lesson, you are going to practice both methods.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Preparation: Create users and groups," on page 5-37
Procedure 2, "Create test groups," on page 5-38
Procedure 3, "Test the accounts," on page 5-39
Procedure 4, "Edit the user token TTL," on page 5-40
Procedure 5, "Add the grouptest group to P8Users group," on page 5-40
Procedure 6, "Retest grouptester," on page 5-41
Procedure 1: Preparation: Create users and groups

You are going to test security using new groups and users. You must create these groups and users
for this lesson exercise.
- User DN: cn=root
4. Expand cn=users.
5. To create the user grouptester, click Add.
a. In the Structural object classes menu, select inetOrgPerson .
b. Click Next.
6. On the Select auxiliary object classes page click Next.

Student Exercises
- Relative DN: cn=grouptester
- cn: grouptester
c. sn: grouptester
c. Click Finish.
d. Click Yes to add a similar entry.
9. Create the user Scriptester:
a. In the Structural object classes menu, select inetOrgPerson.
b. Click Next.
10. On the Select auxiliary object classes page Click Next.
- Relative DN: cn=scriptester
- cn: scriptester
- sn: scriptester
c. Click Finish.
d. Click No to add a similar entry.
Procedure 2: Create test groups

You have created the grouptester and scriptester users. Now you are going to create their groups.
You are currently logged into Tivoli Directory Services, viewing cn=users.
1. Click o=sample to go up one level in the LDAP directory.
2. Expand cn=groups.
3. Click Add to add a new group.
V10.1
Student Exercises
4. Select Object Class:

EXNoSideHead
a. Select groupOfUniqueNames in the Structural object classes menu.
b. Click Next.
5. Click Next on the Select Auxiliary object classes page.
6. On the Required Attributes page, enter the following information, then click Next:
- Relative DN: cn=grouptest
- Parent DN: cn=groups,o=sample
- cn: grouptest
- Unique Member: cn=grouptester,cn=users,o=sample
7. Click Finish.
8. Click Yes to add another group.
9. Click Next on the Select Object Class page (groupOfUniqueNames is selected)
10. Click Next on the Select Auxiliary Object Classes page.
11. On the Required Attributes page, enter the following information, then click Next:
- Relative DN: cn=scriptest
- Parent DN: cn=groups,o=sample
- cn: scriptest
- Unique Member: cn=scriptester,cn=users,o=sample
12. Click Finish.
13. Click No to add another group.
Procedure 3: Test the accounts

The users that you recently created are authenticated users now, but they are not members of the
P8Users group. You are going to log on to Workplace XT to test the user access before proceeding.
1. Clear the Firefox browser cache.
2. Use Firefox to log on to Workplace XT as grouptester.
- User name: grouptester
- Password: filenet
3. Verify that you can see only the P8ConfigObjectStore and SalesSBX object stores.
4. Log out from Workplace XT.
5. Log on to Workplace XT as scriptester. The password is filenet.
6. Verify that you can see only the P8ConfigObjectStore and SalesSBX object stores.

Student Exercises

Procedure 4: Edit the user token TTL

The Server Cache Subsystem caches user token information on the Content Platform Engine
server in order to reduce traffic between the Content Platform Engine server and the authentication
provider. The User Token Cache Entry TTL (time to live) value is set to 3600 seconds by default.
This means that a user token is stored in cache for six minutes, so any changes that you make to
users on the authentication provider take six minutes to be updated on the Content Platform
Engine. To shorten this time, you can edit the User Token Cache Entry TTL value.
- URL: http://ecmedu01:9080/acce
2. On the P8Domain object, open the Server Cache Subsystem tab.
3. Scroll down to the User Token Cache area.
4. Change the value of the Entry TTL field to 36 seconds.
5. Click Save to save your changes to the P8Domain.
7. Close Firefox.
Procedure 5: Add the grouptest group to P8Users group

Several object stores are configured with the P8Users supergroup. By adding a new group to the
supergroup, you can instantly provide them default access to these object stores.
- User DN: cn=root
5. Open the P8Users group on Page 2 of the display.
V10.1
Student Exercises
6. Add the grouptest group:

EXNoSideHead
a. Click Multiple Values next to the uniqueMember field.
b. In the uniqueMember field, type: cn=grouptest,cn=groups,o=sample

c. Click Add.
d. Click OK at the bottom of the page.
e. Click Next on the Edit an entry page.
f. Click Finish.
Procedure 6: Retest grouptester

1. Clear the Firefox browser cache.
2. Use Firefox to log on to Workplace XT as grouptester.
- User name: grouptester
- Password: filenet
3. Verify that you can see the following object stores:
- Finance
- P8ConfigObjectStore
- Sales
- SalesQA
- SalesSBx
Troubleshooting
If you cannot see these object stores, check the following:

- The User Token Cache Entry TTL period has been shortened to 36 seconds. If not, then you
can wait a few minutes and try again.
- The user, grouptester, must be a member of the grouptest group.
- The group, grouptest, must be a member of the P8Users group.

Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Use
EXNoSideHead the Security Script wizard: Procedure
Introduction
If you need to add a group of users to an object store, and you do not have
an established group to add them to, then you can use the Security Script
Wizard. The Security Script wizard allows you to assign security roles to user
and group accounts in order to create security principals for the objects in an
object store. You must run the Security Script Wizard on each object store to
which you are adding the accounts.
Security Script Wizard is currently available only in FileNet Enterprise
Manager.
Important
Be cautious about running the SecurityUpdate script. This script updates an object store's set of
administrator groups and regular users. It makes wholesale changes to the Default Instance
Permissions settings of many class definitions and also changes the security permissions of all
folders. After running it you must remake your Default Instance Permissions changes and possibly
redo the security for your folders.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Run the Security Script Wizard," on page 5-43
Procedure 2, "Test object store access," on page 5-44
Procedure 1: Run the Security Script Wizard

1. Start FileNet Enterprise Manager and connect to the P8Domain.
a. Double-click the FileNet Enterprise Manager desktop icon.
b. Click Connect.
2. Expand the Object Stores node.
3. Select the Finance object store.
4. Right-click Finance and then click All Tasks > Run Security Script Wizard.
5. On the Welcome page, click Next.
6. Select security script information file:
a. Browse to and select C:\Program Files\IBM\FileNet\ContentEngine\Scripts\Component
Library\OSecurityUpdate.xml
b. Click Next.

Student Exercises
7. Define Security Roles:

a. Add Object Store Users
b. Click Add.
c. Search for scriptest.
d. Select the scriptest group (do not select the user, scriptester).
e. Click OK.
f. Click Finish.
8. Click OK to close the Notice.
9. Click OK to acknowledge log file location.
10. Wait for the Security Script Wizard to complete.
11. Click OK to close the completion notice.
Procedure 2: Test object store access

You ran the Security Script Wizard to provide default object store access to the scriptest group. You
are now going to log on to Workplace XT to verify that the security change was successful.
1. Log on to Workplace XT as scriptester.
- User name: scriptester
- Password: filenet
2. Verify that you can see the Finance object store.
3. Verify that you can open the Finance Object Store.
V10.1
Student Exercises
Configure
EXNoSideHead Finance for Content Navigator: Exercise
Introduction
Although this issue is not specifically related to security, the new object store
cannot currently be seen by IBM Content Navigator users. You must
configure the Finance object store as a repository so that IBM Content
Navigator users can access it.
The procedure to configure a repository is in the unit: Configure IBM Content
Navigator.
You must complete this exercise to continue the lesson exercises.
Challenge
Use the IBM Content Navigator Configuration feature to add the Finance
object store as a FileNet Content Manager repository.
Add the new repository to the Sample Desktop.
Repository Data
Property Value
Display name Finance
ID Finance
Protocol EJB
Server URL iiop://ecmedu01:2809/FileNet/Engine
Object store symbolic name Finance
Object store display name Finance
Verification
Log on to IBM Content Navigator as May (password: filenet).
Verify that you can see the Finance object store as a repository.
Summary
Configured initial security on a new object store.
Configured the security on the Root Folder of an object store.
Provided access to an existing object store by adding a group to an established group.
Provided access to an existing object store by using the Security Script Wizard.

Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Lesson
EXNoSideHead 5.4. Configure Class and Property Security
Overview

Your business solution requires specific group access to certain document
classes. You must configure default instance security on those document
classes.
A document class has a custom property that you want to make modifiable
only by people who have permission to delete the object.
Activities
Configure Default Instance Security: Activity, on page 5-49
Configure property modification access, on page 5-53
User accounts
Finance Clerk Carol filenet
Note

Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Configure
EXNoSideHead Default Instance Security: Activity
Introduction
In this activity, you configure default instance security on a document class.
Whenever an instance of that class is created, its security is determined by
the default instance security.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Set default instance security on a new document class," on
page 5-49
Procedure 2, "Verify default instance security," on page 5-50
Procedure 1: Set default instance security on a new document class

Create a document class that includes one custom property. The procedures for creating classes
and properties are covered in the unit: Build an Object Store. You need for Finance Managers to
have ownership and Finance Clerks to have Modify Properties permission. You also want the
creator of the document to be unauthorized to delete the document after it is created.
2. Create the Invoice number property template:
a. Go to Finance > Data Design > Property Templates.
b. Select the Property Templates folder.
c. Click New to create a property template with the following characteristics.
Page Field Value
Name and Describe the
Display name InvoiceNumber
Property Template
Select the Data Type Data type String
Single or Multi-value Single or multi-value Single
3. Create the Invoice document class:
a. Go to Finance > Data Design > Classes > Document.
b. Select the Document class.
c. Click Actions > New Class to create a document subclass named Invoice.
4. Add the InvoiceNumber property to the Invoice document class.
a. Click Open to edit the class.
b. Open the Property Definitions tab.

Student Exercises
c. Add the InvoiceNumber property.

d. Save the change to the Invoice document class.
5. Remove default instance security on the class:
a. Open the Default Instance Security tab.
b. Select P8Users
c. Select scriptest
d. Click Remove.
6. Add the following principals with these Permission groups:
Group Permission level
Finance Managers Full Control
Finance Clerks Modify properties
7. Change the permission level of #CREATOR-OWNER to Major versioning.
8. Verify your default instance security settings:
9. Click Save to save the Invoice class properties.

10. Log out of Administration Client for Content Platform Engine.
11. Clear the browser cache.
Procedure 2: Verify default instance security

In this procedure, you create an Invoice document and verify the security settings.
- URL: http://ecmedu01:9080/Navigator
- User name: Carol
- Password: filenet
2. Go to Finance > Invoices.
3. Add a new subfolder to Invoices. Name the folder Carol.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead
Note
Finance Clerks do not have permission to file documents directly into the Invoices folder, but they
can add subfolders.
4. Add a document to the Carol folder:

Property Value
File Any file from C:\LabFiles\SampleDocuments
Class Invoice
Document Title Invoice 1
InvoiceNumber 1
5. Open the Security Information page for the new Invoice. Verify the following settings:
6. Click Cancel.

Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Configure
EXNoSideHead property modification access
Introduction
Finance clerks can currently edit the value of the InvoiceNumber property of
any Invoice that they create. You want only users who have Full Access to
the Invoice documents to be able to change this property. You can customize
property modification access to change this.
Information
Property modification access behavior is a feature primarily intended for the IBM Enterprise
Records application, especially in connection with markings. It is available for use by non-records
management applications that need granular control over user ability to modify properties.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Set property modification access," on page 5-53
Procedure 2, "Verify property modification restriction," on page 5-53
Procedure 1: Set property modification access

2. Go to Object Stores > Finance > Data Design > Classes > Document > Invoice.
3. Open the Property Definitions tab.
4. Click InvoiceNumber.
5. On the Property Definition page, open the Modification Access tab.
6. Select the Delete option.
7. Click OK.
8. Click Save on the Invoice class definition page.
Procedure 2: Verify property modification restriction

- URL: http://ecmedu01:9080/navigator

Student Exercises
- User name: Carol

- Password: filenet
2. Go to Finance > Invoices > Carol.
3. Open the Properties page for the Invoice document that you added.
4. Verify that you cannot edit the value of the InvoiceNumber property, even though you can edit
the Document Title.
5. Click Cancel.
Note
You changed the InvoiceNumber property definition on the Invoice document class, but you did not
change the InvoiceNumber property template. If you create a new class and you use this property
template, the property will have normal modification access.
Summary
Configured default instance security on a document class.
Configured property modification access on a custom property.
V10.1
Student Exercises
Lesson
EXNoSideHead 5.5. Configure Security Inheritance
Overview

The design for your business solution calls for some documents to have their
security determined by the security of a folder or another object. As the
solution builder, you must use security inheritance features to implement this
functionality.
Activities
Configure folder inheritance: Procedure, on page 5-57
Configure a security parent using a custom OVP: Procedure, on
page 5-61
User accounts
Finance Admin Adam filenet
Note

ddd

Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Configure
EXNoSideHead folder inheritance: Procedure
Introduction
In this exercise, you create a folder and use folder inheritance to secure
documents.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Preparation: Create a document class," on page 5-57
Procedure 2, "Create a parent folder," on page 5-58
Procedure 3, "Create a receipt," on page 5-58
Procedure 4, "Configure the document to inherit security," on page 5-58
Procedure 5, "Verify security change," on page 5-59
Procedure 1: Preparation: Create a document class

To have security completely controlled by inheritance, you must eliminate the default instance
permissions. To set up the exercises for this lesson, you are going to create a document class that
has no default instance permissions.
2. Create the Receipt document class:
a. Go to Finance > Data Design > Classes > Document.
b. Select the Document class.
c. Click Actions > New Class to create a document subclass named Receipt.
d. Open the document class definition page after you create the class.
3. Remove default instance security on the class:
a. Open the Default Instance Security tab.
b. Select all entries except P8Admins.
c. Click Remove.
d. Click Save.
e. Close the Receipt tab.

Student Exercises
Procedure 2: Create a parent folder

Create the folder from which receipts inherit permissions.
1. Go to Finance > Browse > Root folder.
2. Click Actions > New Folder.
3. Name the folder: Receipts.
4. Accept default values to complete the wizard.
5. Add inheritable security settings:
a. Click Add.
b. Search for Finance groups.
c. Add the Finance Admins and Finance Managers.
d. From the Apply to menu, select All children, but not this object.
e. From the Permission group menu, select Full Control.
f. Click OK.
6. Save the changes to the folder.
Procedure 3: Create a receipt

1. On the Receipts tab, click Actions > New Document.
2. Define the new document object:
a. Name the new document Test receipt.
b. Select the Receipt class.
c. Click Next.
3. Add document content:
a. Browse to and add any document from C:\LabFiles\SampleDocuments.
b. Click Next.
4. Use default settings to complete the add document wizard.
5. Click Open to open the Test receipt properties page.
7. Verify that the only ACE is P8Admins.
Procedure 4: Configure the document to inherit security

1. Open the General tab for the Test Receipt document.
2. Scroll down.
3. From the Inherit Security from folder, select Receipts.
4. Click Save.
V10.1
Student Exercises
Procedure
EXNoSideHead 5: Verify security change
1. Open the Security tab of the Test receipt.
2. Verify that Finance Admins and Finance Managers have inherited permissions.
3. Select one of the inherited ACEs.

4. Click Edit.
5. Verify that all of the permissions are selected.
6. Click Cancel.
Procedure 6: (Optional) Test security inheritance

1. Use Firefox to log on to IBM Content Navigator as Adam:
- User name: adam
- Password: filenet
2. Go to Finance > Receipts.
3. Open the properties page for the Test Receipt document.
4. On the security tab.
5. Confirm the security settings:

Student Exercises
- Finance Manager, Finance Admins, and P8admins are all owners.

6. Delete the Test Receipt document.
a. Select the document.
b. Click Actions > Delete.
V10.1
Student Exercises
Configure
EXNoSideHead a security parent using a custom OVP: Procedure
Introduction
In this procedure, you create an object specifically to be a security parent.
Documents that inherit security from this parent will be affected when you
change security on the parent.
You use a custom object-valued property (OVP) to designate a security
parent. You can set this propertys default value on the class definition, so
that all new documents of this class are created with the same default
security parent.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Create a security parent folder," on page 5-61
Procedure 2, "Create a security parent," on page 5-62
Procedure 3, "Edit security of the security parent," on page 5-62
Procedure 4, "Create a custom object valued property template," on
page 5-63
Procedure 5, "Create a document class," on page 5-63
Procedure 6, "Change default instance security," on page 5-64
Procedure 7, "Add the custom OVP to the document class," on page 5-64
Procedure 8, "Configure the default value for the custom OVP," on page 5-64
Procedure 9, "Create test document," on page 5-66
Procedure 10, "(Optional) Observe inherited security changes," on
page 5-67
Procedure 1: Create a security parent folder

Create a folder to keep track of security parents.
1. If you are not already logged on to Administration Console for Content Platform Engine, use
Firefox to log on as p8admin.
2. Go to Finance > Root Folder.
3. Create a folder named Security Parents.
4. Open the folder.

Student Exercises
Procedure 2: Create a security parent

1. In the Security Parents folder, create a contentless document:
a. From the Security Parents folder, click Action > New Document.
b. Name the document Accounts Payable Access.
c. Clear the With Content option.
d. Use default values to complete the wizard.
2. Open the Accounts Payable Access document.
3. Click Actions > Copy Object Reference.
Information
You are copying the object reference now, but you do not actually need to paste it until you edit the
property definition for the document class that inherits security from this object. If for any reason
your copy buffer gets erased before you edit the property definition, you must come back to this
document to copy the object reference.
Procedure 3: Edit security of the security parent

The security parent must have at least one inheritable ACE. You are viewing the Accounts Payable
Access document properties page.
1. On the Accounts Payable Access document, open the Security tab.
2. Remove P8users, scriptest, and the P8admin entries. Do not remove the P8admins entry.
3. Save the changes to the document.
4. Add the following permissions.
Principal Permission group Apply To
Finance Admins Full Control All children, but not his object
Finance Managers Full Control All children, but not his object
Finance Reviewers View Content All children, but not his object
Finance Clerks Major Versioning All children, but not his object
5. Verify that the ACL for the Accounts Payable Access document has the correct permissions:
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead
Troubleshooting
If the permissions are not what you expected after saving the document, try editing each ACE
separately and saving between.
6. Save the changes to the document.
Procedure 4: Create a custom object valued property template

The custom object valued property assigns the security parent to the document. You must create
the property template before you can add it to the document class. You are signed into
Administration Console for Content Platform Engine as p8admin.
1. Go to Finance > Data Design > Property Templates.
2. Click New to create a property template.
3. Complete the property template using the following values.
Page Property Value
Name and describe the property
Display name Security parent OVP
template
Select the data type Data type Object
Single or Multi-value Single
Single or Multi-value
Set other attributes Selected
Additional property template
Security Proxy Type Inherited
attributes
Information
The Security Proxy Type value of Inherited appears as the integer 2 when viewed in the documents
property grid.
4. Use default values to complete the wizard.

5. Click Close.
Procedure 5: Create a document class

The new document class must include the object valued property that you created.
1. Go to Finance > Data Design > Classes > Document.
2. Click Actions > New Class.
3. Name the class Accounts Payable.
4. Complete the document class wizard.
5. Click Open.

Student Exercises
Procedure 6: Change default instance security

You want all of the security to be inherited from the security parent. Therefore, you are going to
remove the default instance permissions.
1. Open the Default Instance Security tab.
2. Remove all of the ACEs except for P8admins.
3. Save the changes to the Accounts Payable class.
Procedure 7: Add the custom OVP to the document class

You now add the custom OVP property to the Accounts Payable class. The Accounts Payable class
definition is open.
1. Open the Property Definitions tab.
2. Click Add.
3. Select Security Parent OVP from the Add Properties menu.
4. Click OK.
5. Edit the property definition attributes:
a. On the Property Definitions tab, click Security Parent OVP.
b. In the Required Class field, select Document.
c. Click OK.
6. Click Save to save the changes to the class definition.
Information
For the Required Class property, you must select the exact class of the parent object.
Procedure 8: Configure the default value for the custom OVP

To save time when users add documents, you can configure the default value of Security Parent
OVP property to point to the security parent. All new documents of this class automatically use the
Accounts Payable Access document as a security parent by default. The Accounts Payble class
definition is open.
V10.1
Student Exercises
2. Open the Property Definitions menu.

EXNoSideHead
Hint
Be patient: this menu sometimes takes a couple minutes to load. Click the arrow one time and wait.
If you are prompted to continue running scripts or stop, select Continue.
Information
The Property Definitions menu on the Properties tab is not the same as selecting the Property
Definitions tab of the class definition.
3. Select Security Parent OVP from the list.

4. On the Security Parent OVP Properties page, do the following tasks:
a. Scroll down to the Property Default Object property.
b. Click the options arrow to the right of the field, and then select Paste Object.

Student Exercises
Hint
If the Paste Object option is inactive, you need to copy the object reference of the Accounts
Payable Access document.
c. Verify that the Property Default Object Value is now Accounts Payable Access.
Note
You cannot save the values on the Security Parent OVP Properties page: you must save the
changes to the class definition.
5. Select the Accounts Payable class definition tab.

6. Click Save.
Procedure 9: Create test document

With all the preparations in place, you can create a test instance of an accounts payable document
and verify that the inherited security is correct. You are logged on to Administration Console for
Content Platform Engine.
1. Create a folder in the Root Folder of Finance. Name the folder Accounts Payable.
2. Open the folder.
3. In the Accounts Payable folder, Create a document:
a. Type a name for the document. The document name is unimportant.
b. Select the Accounts Payable document class.
c. Use any document from C:\LabFiles\SampleDocuments for content.
d. Complete the wizard using default values.
4. Click Open.
5. Select the Security tab.
V10.1
Student Exercises
6. Verify that the document has inherited the security settings from the security parent:
EXNoSideHead
Procedure 10:(Optional) Observe inherited security changes

Imagine that you have several thousand documents in the accounts payable class. A change to
business practices requires that Finance Reviewers must have Major Versioning access to
Accounts Payables. You can make the change on the parent document one time, and the security is
changed on all child documents. You are signed in to Administration Console for Content Platform
Engine as p8admin.
1. Go to Finance > Browse > Root Folder > Security Parents.
2. Open the Properties page of the Accounts Payable Access document.
3. Change the ACE to give Reviewers the Major Versioning permission group. Be sure to apply
this setting to all children, but not the current object.
4. Save your changes to the document.
5. Verify the inherited security changes:
a. Go to Finance > Browse > Root Folder > Accounts Payable.
b. Open the properties page for the document in this folder.
c. On the Security tab, verify that Reviewers have Major Versioning permission. You may need
to refresh to see the security update.
7. Close Firefox.

Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Lesson
EXNoSideHead 5.6. Work with Security Policies
Overview

The design for your business solution calls for certain documents to have
different security settings based on their version status. As the solution
builder, you must create security policies to implement this requirement
Activities
Configure a security policy: Procedure, on page 5-71
User accounts
Finance Manager May filenet
Finance Reviewer Richard filenet
Finance Clerk Clara filenet
Note

Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Configure
EXNoSideHead a security policy: Procedure
Introduction
In this procedure, you create a security policy that changes document
security when the document version status changes.
Scenario
The solution requires a new Contracts class. When a Contract is first added
to the system, it must be editable by Finance Managers. Finance Reviewers
must be able to view the contract information, but not edit it. Finance
Managers will promote the document to a Major Version. When it is released,
the Contract content must be viewable by all P8users, but only Finance
Managers can make changes.
P8Admins must retain full control at all times.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Change versioning preference configuration," on page 5-71
Procedure 2, "Create the Contracts document class," on page 5-72
Procedure 3, "Create a security policy," on page 5-73
Procedure 4, "Configure security templates," on page 5-73
Procedure 5, "Add a Contract document," on page 5-76
Procedure 6, "Add a security policy to the document," on page 5-77
Procedure 7, "Promote the document," on page 5-77
Procedure 8, "Configure the default security policy on the class," on
page 5-78
Procedure 9, "Test users and interfaces," on page 5-78
Procedure 1: Change versioning preference configuration

By default, when a user adds a document to the Finance repository, it is added as a Major version.
You are going to change this behavior so that new documents are always added as Minor versions
first, so that they must be promoted before they can be accessed generally.
1. Use Firefox to log on to IBM Content Navigator as p8admin:
- User name: P8admin
2. Open Administration View.
3. From Administration, go to Repositories > Finance.

Student Exercises
4. Click Connect.
5. Log on using p8admin user name and password.
6. Open the Configuration Paremeters tab.
7. Change the Add as major version option to No.
8. Change the Check in as major version option to No.
9. Click Save and Close.

Procedure 2: Create the Contracts document class

You create a document class. You can ignore the default instance security settings because you are
going to use a security policy to override direct security.
1. Use Firefox to log on to Administration Console for Content Platform Engine.
2. Go to Finance > Data Design > Classes > Document.
3. Create a New Class.
- Name the class Contracts.
4. Click Open.
5. Open the Default Instance Security tab.
6. Review the Default Instance security.
- P8Users have View Content
- scriptest users have View Content
7. Close the Contracts class definition.
V10.1
Student Exercises
Procedure
EXNoSideHead 3: Create a security policy
You are logged on to Administration Console for Content Platform Engine.
1. Go to Finance > Administrative > Security Policies.
2. Click New.
3. Name and Describe the Security Policy:
a. In the Display Name field, enter Contracts Security Policy.
b. Click Next.
4. Specify Security Templates:
a. Click Add.
b. Select the following templates:
Released
In Process
c. Click OK.
d. Click Next.
5. Click Finish.
6. Click Open.
7. Clear the Preserve Direct Permissions option.
8. Click Save.
Information
By default, security templates add to the default instance security. You are changing this setting to
allow the Security Policy to replace direct security.
Procedure 4: Configure security templates

You have created the Security Policy for contracts, and you have created the versioning security
templates. You must now edit the security templates. To edit the security template, you must first
add an ACE, then go back and edit the ACE to specify permissions. You are logged on to
Administration Console for Content Platform Engine. The Security Policy page is open.
1. Open the Security Templates tab.
2. Configure the In Process template:
a. Select In Process.

Student Exercises
b. Under Template Permissions, click Add.
c. Search for and add the following security principals to Selected Users and Groups:
Finance Managers
Finance Reviewers
P8admins
d. Click OK.
e. Click Save.
3. Edit the Finance Managers ACE:
a. Select the Finance Managers.
b. Click Edit.
c. Select Major Versioning.
d. Click OK.
e. Click Save.
Note
All permissions for this security policy apply to This Object Only.
4. Edit the Finance Reviewers ACE.

a. Select Finance Reviewers.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead b. Give Finance Reviewers View Content permissions.

c. Click Save.
5. Edit the P8Admins ACE.
a. Select P8Admins
b. Give P8Admins Full Control.
c. Click Save.
6. Verify the ACL for the In Process template:
7. Configure the Released template:

a. Select Released.
b. Add, then edit the entries to create the following permissions:
Principal Permission Group Apply to
P8users View Content This object only
Finance Managers Major Versioning This object only
p8admins Full Control This object only
Hint
Remember to save the Security Policy after you edit each ACE.
After you save, you must re-select the Released security template.
8. Click Save to save the changes to the Security Policy.

9. Verify the ACL for the Released template:

Student Exercises
Procedure 5: Add a Contract document

To see the security policy work, you are going to create a contract and then add a security policy to
it. Add the document as a minor version to simulate how the document is added with IBM Content
Navigator.
1. Go to Finance > Root Folder.
2. Create a folder named Contracts.
3. Edit security on the Contracts folder:
a. Open the Contracts folder properties.
b. Open the Security tab.
c. Add permission for Finance Managers to add documents to the Contracts folder (Add to
folder).
d. Click Save.
4. Create a document in the Contracts folder.
a. On the Contracts folder, click Actions > New Document.
b. Name the document Contract 1.

c. Use the Contracts class.
d. Use content from C:\LabFiles\SampleDocuments.
e. On the Document Content and Version page, select Create Minor Version.
f. Use default values to complete the wizard.
5. Click Open to inspect the document properties.
V10.1
Student Exercises
7. Verify the following security settings:

EXNoSideHead
Procedure 6: Add a security policy to the document

You are viewing the Properties page of a Contract document.
1. Open the Security Policy tab.
2. In the Security Policy menu, select Contracts Security Policy.
3. Click Save.
4. Open the Security page.
5. Verify that the Security Template has replaced Direct Security:
Information
The direct permissions are gone. Only the Template permissions remain.
Procedure 7: Promote the document

If you promote the document to a major version, the Released security template is applied.
Consequently, security permissions change. You are logged on to Administration Console for
Content Platform Engine. You are viewing the properties page of the Contract 1 document.
1. Click Actions > Version > Promote Version.
2. Open or refresh the Security tab.

Student Exercises
3. Verify the security change:
Procedure 8: Configure the default security policy on the class

You have tested the security policy to ensure that the permissions meet the business requirements.
Now you are going to edit the Contracts class definition so that the policy is applied whenever a
new Contract is created. You are logged on to Administration Console for Content Platform Engine.
1. Go to Finance > Data Design > Classes > Document > Contracts.
2. Open the Security Policy tab.
3. From the Default Security Policy menu, select Contracts Security Policy.
4. Click Save.
Procedure 9: Test users and interfaces

As a final test, you are going to use IBM Content Navigator to add a Contract document. You are
going to use Finance Manager, Finance Reviewer, and P8User accounts to verify the security
settings.
1. Use Firefox to log on to IBM Content Navigator:
- User name: may
- password: filenet
2. Go to the Finance object store.
3. Open the Contracts folder.
4. Create a Contract document as a Finance Manager:
a. Use any file in C:\LabFiles\SampleDocuments for content.
b. Use the Contracts document class.
c. Name the document Contract 2
d. Click Add.
5. Verify the document settings:
a. Open the properties page for Contract 2.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead b. Open the Versions tab.

c. Verify that the contract was added as a minor version.
d. Open the Security tab.
e. Verify that the contract has only the ACEs provided by the In Process template.
f. Verify that you can check the document out.

g. Cancel the checkout.
7. Test document security as a Finance Clerk:
a. Log on to IBM Content Navigator as clara.
User name: clara
Password: filenet
b. Open the Finance object store.
c. Open the Contracts folder.
d. Verify that you cannot see Contract 2.
e. Log out from IBM Content Navigator.
8. Promote the document:
a. Log on to IBM Content Navigator:
User name: may
password: filenet
b. Go to the Finance object store.
d. Select the Contract 2 document.
e. Click Actions > Version > Promote Version.
9. Open the properties page.

Student Exercises

11. Verify the document settings:
12. Close the document properties page.

14. Retest security as a Finance Clerk.
a. Log on to IBM Content Navigator as Clara:
User name: clara
Password: filenet
b. Open the Finance object store.
d. Verify that you can now see Contract 2.
e. Verify that you can view the content, but cannot check the document out.
16. Close Firefox.
Summary
Created a Security Policy.
Created security templates.
Applied a security policy to a document.
Associated a security policy with a document class.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty
Unit 6. Optimizing Search Performance
Unit overview
Lessons
Lesson 6.1, "Create Property Indexes," on page 6-3
Lesson 6.2, "Create Stored Searches and Search Templates," on page 6-11
Lesson 6.3, "Configure Content Search Services," on page 6-27
Lesson 6.4, "Configure Index Partitions," on page 6-33
Lesson 6.5, "Create Content-based Indexes," on page 6-41
Lesson 6.6, "Optimize CBR Queries," on page 6-55
Requirements
Copyright IBM Corp. 2013, 2015 Unit 6. Optimizing Search Performance 6-1
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Lesson 6.1. Create Property Indexes
Overview

Property indexes can improve the efficiency of the system by shortening the
amount of time that the database is accessed during user queries. You must
create a property index to improve system efficiency.
Activities
Create a Property Index: Procedure, on page 6-5
Create a Property Index: Exercise, on page 6-9
User accounts

Administrator
Note
Before you begin

continue.
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Create a Property Index: Procedure
Introduction
This exercise shows you how to create a property index and then verify that it
exists.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Create a property index," on page 6-5
Procedure 2, "Verify that the property index exists," on page 6-6
Procedure 1: Create a property index

You are going to create a property index for the Order_ID property of the Order class.
1. Use Firefox to log in to Administration Console for Content Platform Engine:
2. Open the object class properties.
a. Expand Sales > Data Design > Classes > Document> Order.
b. Open the Property Definitions tab.
c. Click the order_id link to open the property definition attributes.
d. Select Single Indexed.
e. Click OK
Student Exercises
f. Click Save to save the changes to the object store.

Procedure 2: Verify that the property index exists

Use the DB2 Control Center to verify that the property index was created.
1. Start the DB2 Control Center:
a. Click Start > All Programs > IBM DB2 > TDSV63DB2 (Default) > General
Administration Tools > Control Center.
b. Click OK to select Advanced mode.

2. Find the DocVersion table for the Sales object store:
a. Expand All Databases > OS_DB.
b. Select Tables.
c. Click the heading for the Name column to alphabetize the tables by table name.
d. Scroll down to find the DocVersion tables.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty e. Select the DocVersion table for the Sales schema.
3. Find the related indexes:

a. Right-click the DocVersion table.
b. Select Show Related.
c. Select the Indexes tab.
d. Verify that the order_id index exists.
4. Click Close.
5. Close DB2 Control Center.
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Create a Property Index: Exercise
Introduction
In this exercise, you practice creating a property index.
Scenario
Customer service representatives are going to be searching the Sales object
store for Orders by using the customer_id property frequently. You must
improve the search performance by indexing the customer_id property.
Challenge
Create a property index for the customer_id property on the Sales object
store.
Verification
Use the DB2 Control Center to verify that the property index exists.
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Lesson 6.2. Create Stored Searches and Search Templates
Overview

In your application, clerks are going to need to be able to quickly find account
documents by their account number. You can create a search template that
streamlines the search process.
You want users to be able to find specific documents that are contained
folders with thousands of documents. You create a stored search that targets
the specific documents that you want users to access.
Activities
Create Stored Searches and Search Templates: Walkthrough, on
page 6-13
Practice Creating a Search Template: Exercise, on page 6-25
User accounts

Content Platform CEAdmin filenet
Engine administrator
Note
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Create Stored Searches and Search Templates: Walkthrough
Introduction
This exercise gives you the opportunity to practice creating stored searches
and search templates by using the Search Designer tool.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Create a stored search," on page 6-13
Procedure 2, "Create a stored search with multiple conditions," on page 6-18
Procedure 3, "Create a search template," on page 6-22
Windows
For this activity, you use the Windows student system.
Procedure 1: Create a stored search

Use the following instructions to create a simple stored search by using the Search Designer. The
search must return documents that meet the following criteria:
Sales documents that have a quantity value that is greater than 1000.
1. Open the Search Designer.
a. Use Firefox to log in to WorkplaceXT at the following URL:
http://ecmedu01:9080/WorkplaceXT.
b. Log in as CEAdmin:
User name: CEAdmin
Password: filenet
c. On the FileNet Workplace XT menu bar, click Tools > Advanced Tools > Search
Designer.
The Search Designer browser window opens.
Student Exercises
2. Configure the search to be a stored search.

a. In Search Designer, select Stored Search from the selection list near the top of the
window.
3. Configure Object Stores.

a. Select Sales from the Available Object Stores column.
b. Click the green arrow button.
The Sales object store is listed in the Selected Object Stores column.
4. Configure Object Types.

a. Click the Object Types tab.
b. Accept the default Object Type selection of Document.
5. Configure Subfolders.
a. Click the Subfolders tab.
b. Note the empty table with the three column headings.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty c. Click the folder icon above the Include Subfolders column.
The Select a Folder window opens.
i. Select the Sales icon and click Open.
ii. Select Products.
iii. Click Select.

d. Click the Include Subfolders check box.
View Object Subclass Include Subfolders
<ignored> Sales:\Products <selected>
Note
The View column has no affect on a stored search even though it is settable in the UI. Not setting
simply allows it to default to the first item in the list, which just happens to be Editable.
6. Configure Search Criteria.

a. Click the Search Criteria tab.
b. Accept the Current View selection of Document.
c. Select the values for the Property and Operator columns, and then type the value in
the Value column.
View Property Operator Value
quantity is greater than or equal to 1000
7. Configure Format Results.
a. Click the Format Results tab.
Student Exercises
b. Select or verify the values for each column on each of the three lines as shown here.
Property Alignment Sort Priority
Document title left none 0
product_id left none 0
price left descending 1
quantity left none 0
Note
If necessary, reorder the sequence in which the properties are listed by using the Up and Down
arrows.
8. Save the search:

a. Click File > Add New to add the search to the object store.
The Add a new search browser window opens.
i. Browse to Sales and then click Open.
ii. Click Add New Folder.
iii. Type Searches for the new folder name.

iv. Click Finish.
v. Click Select to select the Searches folder.
vi. Click Next.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty b. Complete the Properties page.

i. In the Document Title field, type Excess Inventory.
ii. Click Next.
c. Accept the default security settings and click Finish.

9. Click File > Exit to close the Search Designer applet.
10. Log out from FileNet Workplace XT.
11. Run the search.
a. Use Firefox to log in to IBM Content Navigator.
- User name: CEAdmin
- Password: filenet
b. Select the Sales object store.
c. Browse to the Sales > Searches folder.
Student Exercises
d. Double-click the search Excess Inventory to run it.

The window displays the results of the search.
e. Observe the results of the stored search:

i. Verify that all the returned documents have a value for the quantity property of
greater than 1000.
ii. Verify that the results are sorted by price, with the highest price at the top of the
list.
f. Explore the columns in the search results:
i. Click one or more of the different column headings to see that the results can be
resorted.
ii. Click one of the column headings twice to see that you can sort the results in
either ascending or descending order.
g. Close IBM Content Navigator.
Procedure 2: Create a stored search with multiple conditions

You can combine multiple search conditions with Boolean operators (AND and OR). Use the
following instructions to create another stored search by using the Search Designer. The search
must return Sales documents that meet one or both of the following criteria:
ServiceOrder documents that have the requested amount due and have the number of
hours that are listed in the table.
Service orders that are for a customer that has ABC in its name.
1. Open the Search Designer.
a. Use Firefox to log in to FileNet Workplace XT:
- Password: filenet
b. On the FileNet Workplace XT menu bar, click Tools > Advanced Tools > Search
Designer.
The Search Designer browser window opens.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty c. In Search Designer, select Stored Search from the selection list near the top of the
window.
2. Configure Object Stores.

a. Add the Sales object store from the Available Object Stores column.
3. Configure Object Types.
a. Click the Object Types tab.
b. Accept the default Object Type check box selection of Document.
c. Note the empty table with View and Object Subclass column headings.
d. Click the object Subclass column of the first line of the empty table.
e. From the displayed selection list, scroll down and select ServiceOrder.
The table is now populated as shown here.

View Object Subclass
Hidden ServiceOrder
4. Configure Search Criteria.
a. Click the Search Criteria tab.
b. Accept the Current View selection of Document.
Student Exercises
c. Add entries in the first table.
View Property Operator Value

Read Only amount_due is less than or equal to 1000
Read Only hours is less than or equal to 100
Read Only customer_name is like %ABC%
d. Click the Value column for the first entry in the table. Next, hold down the Ctrl key
and click the Value column for each of the remaining two entries in turn, and then
click the OR icon and release the Ctrl key.
All three entries are shown as being part of a single OR clause.

e. Click the value for the first entry, hold down the Ctrl key again, and click the value
column for the second entry, and then click the AND icon and release the Ctrl key.
Now the first two entries are shown as part of an AND clause, and this pair of entries and the
third entry are shown as part of an OR clause.
5. Configure Format Results.
a. Click the Format Results tab.
b. Change the Alignment values for amount_due and hours to right-aligned.

amount_due right none 0
hours right none 0
customer_name left none 0
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty 6. Save the search:

a. Click File > Add New to add the search to the object store.
i. Browse to Sales and click Open.
ii. Select the Searches folder and then click Select.
iii. Click Next.
b. Complete the Properties page.
i. In the Document Title field, type Priority Service Orders.
ii. Click Next.
c. Accept the default security settings and click Finish.
d. Click File > Exit to close the Search Designer applet.
7. Close FileNet Workplace XT.
8. Open the search.
a. Use Firefox to log in to IBM Content Navigator.
- Password: filenet
b. Select the Sales object store
c. Browse to the Sales > Searches folder.
9. In the navigation pane, double-click Priority Service Orders to run it.
The browser window displays the search results in the right pane.
The right pane of the browser window displays a number of documents that meet the search
criteria.
i. Verify that at all but one service order has an hours value less than or equal to
100.
ii. Verify that one service order has an hours value greater than 100, and that this
service order is for a customer that has ABC in its name. This result is because
of the OR condition in the search.
Student Exercises
iii. Verify that at least one service order has an amount_due value of greater than
100, and that this service order is for a customer that has ABC in its name. This
result is because of the OR condition in the search.
10. Close IBM Content Navigator.
Procedure 3: Create a search template

In this activity, you use Search Designer to create, save, and use a search template.
1. Use Firefox to go to http://ecmedu01:9080/WorkplaceXT
- Password: filenet
2. Open the Search Designer tool.
3. In Search Designer, select Search Template from the selection list near the top of the
window.
4. Create a Find Service Orders search template.

Use the data in the following tables to build a search template that allows users to edit the
maximum amount due, the maximum allowed hours, and the customer name. To be returned by
the search, a service order must meet all of the requirements.
a. Configure Object Stores, Object Types, and Subfolders
Tab Selection Value
Object Stores Selected Object Stores Sales
Object Type Document
Object Types Object Subclass View Read Only
Object Sublass ServiceOrder
View Editable
Subfolders Subfolders Sales:\Orders
Include Subfolders <Selected>
Hint
To specify which subfolder in an object store to limit a search to, click the Select a Folder button
or type the subfolder path exactly as shown in the table.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty b. Configure Search Criteria tab.
View Property Operator Value AND/OR

Editable amount_due is less than or equal to <blank>
Editable hours is less than or equal to <blank> AND
Editable customer_name is like <blank>
c. Configure Format Results tab.
amount_due right none 0
hours right none 0
customer_name left none 0
d. Save the search:

i. Click File > Add New to add the search.
ii. Browse to and select the Sales > Searches folder.
iii. Click Next.

iv. Enter a document title Find Service Orders and click Next.
v. Accept the default security settings and click Finish.
e. Exit Search Designer.
i. From the menu bar, click File > Exit.
6. Run the search.
a. Use Firefox to log in to IBM Content Navigator as CEAdmin.
- Password: filenet
b. In IBM Content Navigator, go to Sales > Searches.
Double-click Find Service Orders to open it.
Student Exercises
Hint
Search fields are case-sensitive.
c. Enter the following sample data to test it:

Amount_due is less than or equal to 500.
Hours is less than or equal to 70
Customer_name starts with XY.
d. Verify that one result is returned: Quote_XYZ.pdf
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Practice Creating a Search Template: Exercise
Scenario
The Sales team often verifies service orders over the telephone. The caller
must have the order_id, which the clerk uses to find the order. The clerk must
be able to see the customer_name, po_number, and service_date in the
results to verify the order.
Challenge
Use Search Designer to create a search template that searches by order_id
and displays the order_id, customer_name, po_number, and service_date
fields in the results. The search must be available to Sales clerks.
Data
Document class: ServiceOrder
Test user: Clara
Password: filenet
Verification
Log in to IBM Content Navigator as Clara and then run the search. Use the
following test value: Order_id = 9992131. The search must display the
following result:
Summary
In this lesson you did the following tasks:
Created a Search Template and Stored Searches.
Combined search criteria by using Boolean operators.
Selected document subclasses.
Formatted the search results.
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Lesson 6.3. Configure Content Search Services
Overview

IBM Content Search Services manages content-based indexing and
searching tasks. After IBM Content Search Services is installed, you must
configure Content Platform Engine to use it.
Activities
Configure a Text Search Server: Exercise, on page 6-29
User accounts

Content Platform P8Admin IBMFileNetP8
Note
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Configure a Text Search Server: Exercise
Introduction
In this exercise, you learn how to obtain the Content Search Services
authentication token, and then use that token to create a text search server.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Obtain the authentication token," on page 6-29
Procedure 2, "Create a text search server," on page 6-30
Procedure 3, "Inspect the text search server," on page 6-31
Procedure 4, "Verify indexing on P8 Domain," on page 6-31
Procedure 5, "Verify indexing at the site level," on page 6-32
Procedure 1: Obtain the authentication token

The IBM Content Search Services server uses a security token to identify itself with Content
Platform Engine. The authentication token is displayed on the last window of the IBM Content
Search Services installation window. IBM Content Search Services was installed some time ago, so
you do not have that window open. You need to obtain the authentication token by using a
command-line request.
1. Open a command prompt by clicking Start > Command Prompt.
2. Change directory to C:\Program Files\IBM\Content Search Services\CSS Server\bin
3. Enter the following command, exactly as shown:
configTool printToken -configPath C:/Program Files/IBM/Content Search
Services/CSS Server/config
Note
Use forward slashes (/) in the path.
4. Copy the authentication token from the screen output.
Student Exercises
Hint
Do not confuse the security token with the encryption key. The security token in this example is
printed on line 5 of the output: ISzPjZk=.
You must include the equals sign (=) as part of the token text.
The token is case-sensitive.
5. Create a text document on your desktop.

6. Paste the security token into this document and save the document. You will use the
security token in the next procedure.
Procedure 2: Create a text search server

You need to register the IBM Content Search Services server with the P8 Domain. You can register
the server in Index mode, Server mode, or Index and Server mode. You are going to configure only
one server, so it must perform both index and search operations.
2. Select the following node: P8Domain > Global Configuration > Administration > Text
Search Servers.
3. Click New to create a text search server entry.
4. Name the server:
a. Enter a display name, such as CBR Server.
b. Click Next.
5. Define the server,
a. Complete the fields by using the following values:
Property Value
Mode Dual Index and Search
Status Enabled
Host Name ecmedu01
Port 8191
Authentication token <authentication token>
b. In the Authentication Token field, paste or type the authentication token that you
obtained in the previous procedure.
c. Click next.
6. Click Finish. Wait for the Success message.
7. Verify that your new CBR Server is now displayed under Text Search Servers.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty 8. Click Open.
Procedure 3: Inspect the text search server

The text search server that you configured in the previous procedure is open.
1. Inspect the text search server configuration.
Field Notes
The name that you see in Administration Console
Display name
for Content Platform Engine.
Description Descriptive text
Dual mode runs both indexing and search
Mode services. If you have multiple search servers, you
can dedicate them to a specific role.
You can disable the status to prevent the
Status submission of index or search requests to the
server.
Host name The computer that hosts the search server.
Port The default is 8191.
The token is required for setup, but is not shown
Authentication token
for security reasons.
Corresponds to the physical location of
Site
connected resources.
You can assign or reassign an affinity group
Affinity Group
when the server topology changes.
2. Click the Properties tab and review the information that the Properties page provides.
Note
On the Properties tab is a required Text Search Credential field. This property contains the value of
the authentication token that you entered when you created the Text Search Server. The field is not
actually blank, but the value is hidden.
Procedure 4: Verify indexing on P8 Domain

You can configure parameters that govern the way that Content Platform Engine performs
content-based retrieval functions at the domain and site levels. Unless otherwise specified, each
site inherits the domain level settings.
1. In Administration Console for Content Platform Engine, select the P8 Domain node in
the Navigation pane.
2. Open the Text Search Subsystem tab.
Student Exercises
Hint
Use the left and right arrows to shift the tabs; then select Text Search Subsystem.
3. Verify that the Enable indexing check box is checked.

4. Inspect the Searching, Indexing, Extracting, and Schedule areas. These values can be
customized to improve performance.
Procedure 5: Verify indexing at the site level

Indexing is enabled at the domain level, but you must ensure that indexing is also either inheriting
from the domain or configured separately.
1. In Administration Console for Content Platform Engine, go to Global Configuration >
Administration > Sites > Initial Site.
2. Open the Text Search Subsystem tab.
3. Verify that the Configuration source has the P8 domain selected.
Note
The Searching, Indexing, Extracting areas have values that are disabled. These values are set at
the domain level. If you choose to override them at the site level, they become editable.
Summary
Obtained an authorization token for IBM Content Search Services to communicate with
Registered IBM Content Search Services with Content Platform Engine as a text search
server.
Inspected the text search server properties.
Verified that indexing is enabled at the domain and site levels.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Lesson 6.4. Configure Index Partitions
Overview

Users need to be able to find documents in an object store according to text
within the document. Many documents fall into a few categories that vary on
a string property. You can make the searches more efficient by creating an
index partition.
Activities
Select a Property for an Index Partition: Written Exercise, on page 6-35
Configure a String Index Partition: Procedure, on page 6-37
Configure a Date Property Index Partition: Practice, on page 6-39
User accounts

Note
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Select a Property for an Index Partition: Written Exercise
Introduction
Selecting a property for an index partition is not a trivial task. A good index
partition can improve search efficiency for properties that are often used in
searches, but has no effect otherwise. Plan to make the selection before you
create the indexes: If you change the index partition later, you must reindex.
Scenario
Users are going to be searching mainly for Product Orders and Service
Orders, which both belong to the Orders document class. Users often search
by customer_name, customer_id, po_number, product_id (for product
orders), and service date (for service orders).
Student Exercises
Instructions
Read the notes for each property and then circle the property that would
make best candidate for a string index partition.
Property Notes
Inherited from the Document class.
String data type.
Document title
Large number of values that are non-unique.
Occasionally used in searches.
System property.
String data type.
ID
Globally unique identifier.
Never used in searches.
Custom property.
String data type.
customer_name
Often used in searches.
Custom property.
String data type.
customer_id
Large number of values that are unique.
Custom property.
String data type.
po_number
Small number of values that are non-unique.
Custom property.
String data type.
product_id
Currently unused.
Not used in searches.
Custom property.
service_date DateTime data type.
Sometimes used in searches.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Configure a String Index Partition: Procedure
Introduction
This procedure shows how to configure an index partition for a string
property.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Change the property settability option," on page 6-37
Procedure 2, "Create the index partition," on page 6-37
Procedure 1: Change the property settability option

A property must be Settable only on create in order to be configured as an index partition. In
Administration Console for Content Platform Engine, the Settable only on create option is
represented by the value 2. You must set this attribute on the property template (not the property
definition on a particular class). All classes that use this property template are indexed with this
partition.
2. Go to the Sales object store > Data Design > Property Templates.
3. Click the po_number property link to open the property template.
5. Change the Settability value to 2.
6. Click Save.
7. Close the po_number tab.
8. Close the Property Templates page. The Sales object store page is left open.
Procedure 2: Create the index partition

1. On the Sales object store page, open the Text Search tab.
Student Exercises
2. In the Index Partitions area, select po_number.
3. Click Save.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Configure a Date Property Index Partition: Practice
Introduction
In this exercise, you practice the steps to create an index partition. You can
have only one string property partition and one date property partition for
each object store. You must create a date property partition.
Scenario
Customer service representatives often search for service orders by using
the service_date property.
Challenge
Create an index partition based on the service_date property. Set the Date
property interval to 1 month.
Verification
Your Text Search page Index Partitions section must show the following field
values:
Summary
Selected a string property for an index partition.
Configured a string property index partition
Configured a date property index partition.
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Lesson 6.5. Create Content-based Indexes
Overview

Users must be able to find documents in an object store by using text within
the document. Many documents fall into a few categories that vary on a
string property. You can make the searches more efficient by creating an
index partition.
Activities
Configure CBR: Walkthrough, on page 6-43
Configure an Index Area: Practice, on page 6-49
Check Indexing Logs: Activity, on page 6-51
Reindex: Challenge, on page 6-53
User accounts

User Charles filenet
Note
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Configure CBR: Walkthrough
Introduction
In this exercise, you create and configure a content-based index area.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Create an index area," on page 6-43
Procedure 2, "Enable IBM Content Search Services on the object store," on
page 6-44
Procedure 3, "Enable CBR on the document class," on page 6-45
Procedure 4, "Create an index job," on page 6-45
Procedure 5, "View the index job progress," on page 6-45
Procedure 6, "View the index properties," on page 6-46
Procedure 7, "View the index in the file system," on page 6-46
Procedure 8, "Create a content-based search," on page 6-46
Procedure 9, "Create a search by using an SQL query," on page 6-47
Procedure 1: Create an index area

The index area must be created in a file system location. The folder location must exist before you
can create the index area. The IBM Content Services Server user must have full access to the
folder. The IBM Content Services Server user is P8Admin. If P8Admin has insufficient permissions
on this folder, the index area creation process fails.
1. Create the following folder: C:\Indexes.
2. Ensure that the folder allows the CSS Server account user full access:
a. Right-click C:\Indexes and select Properties.
b. Open the Security tab.
c. Click Edit.
d. Click Add.
e. Type P8Admin and then click Check Names. Verify that the name
ECMEDU01\P8Admin is displayed.
f. Click OK.
g. Select the check box for to allow P8Admin Full control of this folder.
h. Click OK to save your changes.
i. Click OK to close the folder properties page.
Student Exercises
4. Go to Sales > Administrative > Index Areas.
5. Click New.
6. Name the Index Area
a. Type Index Area 1 in the Display Name field. The name that you choose is
unimportant but lesson activities refer to this name.
b. Click Next.
7. Configure the Index Area:
a. In the Root directory field, type C:\Indexes.
b. Click Next.
8. On the Summary page, click Finish.
9. Wait for confirmation of success.
10. Click Open.
Note
The index area is currently in the Open state. You can change the state from here if you need to.
You cannot change the state to Full. However, you can set the Maximum index count to some
number greater than zero so that when that limit is reached, the index status changes to Full. You
can have another index in Standby mode so that it can be opened when the previous index is full.
Procedure 2: Enable IBM Content Search Services on the object store

You must enable IBM Content Search Services at the object store level before you can use it for
indexing.
1. In Administration Console for Content Platform Engine, open the Sales object store.
2. Open the Text Search tab for the Sales object store.
3. Select the Indexing Language:
a. Scroll down the Available Languages list.
b. Select en (for English).
c. Click the arrow button to move the language to Selected Languages.
d. Click Save.
4. Place a check mark in the Enable IBM Content Search Services option.
5. Click Save.
6. Click Refresh to ensure that the changes are saved.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Procedure 3: Enable CBR on the document class

You must enable content-based retrieval (CBR) on a document class. You can enable this option on
the root Document class if you want, but if you can more selectively specify only subclasses that
need to be indexed, you can shorten the indexing time.
The Sales object store page is open in Administration Console for Content Platform Engine.
1. Select Data Design > Classes > Document > Product. The Product class definition is
open.
2. Scroll down the page until you see the CBR enabled check box.
3. Place a check mark in the CBR enabled check box.
4. Click Save to save your changes for the document class.
Procedure 4: Create an index job

Indexing is now configured on the Sales object store for the Product document class. The index
does not exist until you initiate an index job. When you create an index job, the system creates the
index.
The Product document class definition is open in Administration Console for Content Platform
Engine.
1. Click Actions > Index Class for Content Search (include subclasses).
2. Click OK to close the message that informs you that the system created an index job.
Procedure 5: View the index job progress

The index job is started. You can view the progress of the index job.
1. Go to Sales > Administrative > Index Jobs Manager.
2. Click Refresh if you see no index jobs.
3. Wait for your index job status to change to Terminated Normally. If it is Pending or In
Progress, click Refresh.
Student Exercises
Note
Indexing can take several minutes. On a production system, the index job might take several hours,
so you must plan the index job to run when the system resources are not in high demand.
e
Procedure 6: View the index properties

When the indexing job completes, the index area contains an index. You are going to view the index
properties.
1. Go to Sales > Administrative > Index Areas > Index Area 1.
2. Open the Index tab.
3. Verify that the Index Selection field contains a value:

5. Close Firefox.
Procedure 7: View the index in the file system

The index job created an index. You can view the index properties from the Index Area node. You
can also verify the index area by going to the location in the file system.
1. Using Windows Explorer, open C:\Indexes
2. Verify that C:\Indexes contains a new subfolder that begins Sales_Document_XXX,
where XXX is a long string of alphanumeric characters.
3. Explore the contents of this folder. Most of the files cannot be opened with standard
viewing tools.
Procedure 8: Create a content-based search

Test content-based retrieval by creating a content-based search.
1. Use Firefox to log on to IBM Content Navigator as Charles
- User name: Charles
- Password: filenet
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty 2. Open the Search page.
3. Click New Search.

4. Type Model A in the Find items with the following terms field.
5. Change the text options:
a. Click Text options.
b. Select the All of the terms option.
c. Click OK.
6. Click Search (you might need to scroll down to see the button).
7. Verify that the search returned a few documents.
8. Open one of the documents to verify that it contains the term Model A.
Procedure 9: Create a search by using an SQL query

You might need to create an SQL query for administrative purposes.
1. Start FileNet Enterprise Manager by using the desktop icon.
2. Connect to the P8 domain.
3. Expand the Sales object store.
4. Right-click Search Results and then select New Search.
5. Click View > SQL View.
6. Click File > Clear All to delete the SQL Text field contents.
7. Enter the following SQL statement exactly as shown:
SELECT d.This
FROM Document d
INNER JOIN ContentSearch c ON d.This =
c.QueriedObject
WHERE CONTAINS(d.*,'Model')
Student Exercises
8. Save the search:

a. Click Save.
b. Save the search to C:\LabFiles\SampleDocuments
c. Name the search CBRQuery.qry
d. Click Save.
9. Click OK to run the search.
10. Review the results.
If the result is this... Then, do this.

1. Click OK.
The query finds and displays objects.
2. Review the returned object names.
1. Read the error message carefully.
2. Correct any errors in your query syntax.
The query produces an error.
3. Save the query.
4. Rerun the query.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Configure an Index Area: Practice
Introduction
You created an index area and a full-text index using the procedures in this
lesson. Now you are going to practice what you learned.
Scenario
Users must search for service orders. You need to index the ServiceOrder
class so that users can find service orders based on their content.
Data
ServiceOrder is a subclass of the Order document class in the Sales object
store.
Challenge
Enable the ServiceOrder class for CBR.
Create an index job for the ServiceOrder index.
Verification
Use the Index Jobs Manager to verify that the index job for the ServiceOrder
class terminates normally.
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Check Indexing Logs: Activity
Introduction
Index jobs sometimes generate errors when documents fail to be indexed.
The error messages contain enough information for you to find the problem
document and identify the cause of the error. When an index job completes,
review the log file to see whether any problems occurred.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Check indexing entries in the log file," on page 6-51
Procedure 1: Check indexing entries in the log file

1. Find the P8 server log files:
a. Using Firefox, go to the Content Engine Ping Page:
http://ecmedu01:9080/FileNet/Engine
b. Find and then copy the Log File Location path.
c. Use the Log File Location to find the p8_server_error.log.
2. Open the p8_server_error.log file by using Notepad.
3. Scroll to the bottom of the log file.
4. Look for any errors or warnings.
- If you find this log entry, read the entry and verify that you can identify the reason for
the error.
- If you do not find any errors or warnings, continue to the next exercise.
Hint
The ServiceOrder class contains only images without text. Images cannot be indexed.
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Reindex: Challenge
Introduction
You can change the status of an index area and an index itself by changing
the options in the index area General and Index tabs. You can use these
controls to recover from data corruption errors.
Scenario
The ServiceOrder class contains only images, not indexable documents. The
attempt to index this class causes errors in the log file. You must disable
CBR on this class in order to prevent indexing errors.
Additionally, data corruption occurred. The index in Index Area 1 is failing.
Challenge
Disable CBR on the ServiceOrder class.
Make the full-text index in Index Area 1 unavailable and then reindex.
Hints
You can use the Reindex button on the Index tab to reindex.
You must shut down Content Platform Engine to delete the
p8_server_error.log file.
Verification
Review the P8_Server_error.log file. Verify that the reindex operation
completed without errors.
Student Exercises
Summary
Created an index area.
Enabled IBM Content Search Services on an object store.
Enabled CBR on a document class.
Created an index job.
Viewed index job progress.
Viewed index properties.
Viewed the index in the file system.
Created a content-based search.
Created a search .using an SQL Query
Reviewed index log files.
Reindexed a full-text index.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Lesson 6.6. Optimize CBR Queries
Overview

You want content-based searches to run faster and more efficiently.
Searches that include both property-based criteria and content-based criteria
take too long. You want these mixed searches to run faster and more
efficiently.
Activities
Configure CBR Query Optimization Options: Procedure, on page 6-57
User accounts

Note
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Configure CBR Query Optimization Options: Procedure
Introduction
In this lesson, you configure the CBR Query Optimization option for dynamic
switching between CBR-first searches and DB-first searches.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Set the CBR Query Optimization options," on page 6-57
Procedure 1: Set the CBR Query Optimization options

1. Use Firefox to log in to Administration Console for Content Platform Engine as P8Admin.
3. Open the Query page.
4. In the CBR Query Optimization area, select the Dynamic Switching option.
5. In the Excessive full-text search hits threshold, type 1000.
6. Requests for ranked results, select Grant never.
7. Click Save.
Summary
Set the CBR Query Optimization mode.
Set the Requests for ranked results option.
Set the Excessive full-text search hits threshold.
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty
Unit 7. Deploy Assets with FileNet Deployment
Manager
Unit Overview
Lessons
Lesson 7.1, "Configure Deployment Environments," on page 7-3
Lesson 7.2, "Export Assets," on page 7-11
Lesson 7.3, "Prepare the Half Maps," on page 7-21
Lesson 7.4, "Map and convert assets," on page 7-33
Lesson 7.5, "Analyze and import assets," on page 7-39
Requirements
Copyright IBM Corp. 2013, 2015 Unit 7. Deploy Assets with FileNet Deployment Manager 7-1
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Lesson 7.1. Configure Deployment Environments
Overview

You have finished developing and testing your FileNet Content Manager
solution. The next step is to move your solution to the User Acceptance Test
(UAT) environment and eventually to Production.
You need to create a source and destination environment, in FileNet
Deployment Manager so that you can export the solution assets from your
source environment and import them into your destination environment.
Activities
Create a Source Environment: Exercise, on page 7-5
Create a Destination Environment: Exercise, on page 7-9
User accounts

Administrator
Note
Before you begin

continue.
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Create a Source Environment: Exercise
Introduction
In this activity, you create an environment in FileNet Deployment Manager by
connecting to the P8 domain.
Scenario
The solution is ready for Universal Acceptance Testing (UAT). You are going
to create an object store for Scott, the QA lead. Scott is going to be the
administrator of the test system. You are then going to create an environment
that includes the new object store.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Start FileNet Deployment Manager," on page 7-5
Procedure 2, "Disable FIPS," on page 7-5
Procedure 3, "Create an environment," on page 7-6
Procedure 4, "Establish P8 Domain Connection," on page 7-6
Procedure 1: Start FileNet Deployment Manager

1. Using Windows Explorer, create the folder C:\FDM-deploy
2. Double-click the FileNet Deployment Manager icon on the desktop.
3. Click Browse to change the default deployment tree path to C:\FDM-deploy.
4. Click OK.
Procedure 2: Disable FIPS

FileNet Deployment Manager runs with FIPS (Federal Information Processing Standards) 140
ready mode enabled the first time that you start it. When running in this mode, the application does
not save passwords to disk. It retains obfuscated passwords in memory. You can disable this mode
Student Exercises
to allow passwords to be saved to the disk in encrypted format.This feature is usually disabled
unless the customer requires FIPS 140 compliance.
1. Click Window > Preferences.
2. Clear the Enable FIPS 140-ready mode option.
3. Click OK.
Procedure 3: Create an environment

1. Right-click the Environments node.
2. Select New > Environment.
3. Type Sales_Dev in the name field.
4. Click Finish.
5. Use Windows Explorer to explore the C:\FDM-deploy deployment tree. Make sure to
explore all the sub-folders, including the new Sales_Dev environment.
6. Open the C:\FDM-deploy\Environments\Sales_Dev\EnvironmentConfig.xml file, using
notepad or wordpad. Notice the <Connection target = p8 use = yes> tag, and note
that there are a series of empty tags inside it.
Information
The environment exists, but it does not have any configuration data.
Procedure 4: Establish P8 Domain Connection

The Sales_Dev environment must connect to the local P8 Domain before you can retrieve the half
maps.
1. Right-click the Sales_Dev environment and then click Open.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty 2. Open the CE Connection tab.
3. In the Content Engine Connection Information page, do the following tasks:

a. In the Server field, type ECMEDU01.
b. Select the Save the password option.
c. In the Username field, type p8admin.
d. In the Password field, type IBMFileNetP8.
e. Click Test Connection.
f. Verify that you see the Successfully Connected message, and that the PE
Connection Point field displays P8ConnPt1.
Student Exercises
g. Select P8ConnP2 from the menu.
4. Click File > Save All.

5. Open the C:\FDM-deploy\Environments\Sales_Dev\EnvironmentConfig.xml file, using
notepad or wordpad, again. Note that the tags, under the <Connection target = p8 use
= yes> tag, are no longer empty, they contain the CE connection information you just
entered.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Create a Destination Environment: Exercise
Introduction
You created a source environment in FileNet Deployment Manager. When
you create a source-destination pair, you must have a source and a
destination. You must now create the destination environment.
Typically, the source and destination environments are different P8 Domains.
You do not have two domains on your student system, so you must create a
second environment in the same P8 Domain.
Important
You must complete this task to continue with the lesson exercises.
Challenge
Create a second environment by using the same P8 domain as before.
Name the new environment: Sales_UAT.
Use the PE Connection point P8ConnP2.
Verification
You have two environments in the tree view, Sales_Dev and Sales_UAT.
Summary
Created source environment in FileNet Deployment Manager.
Created a destination environment in FileNet Deployment Manager.
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Lesson 7.2. Export Assets
Overview

The content and associated data structures of your FileNet Content Manager
solution, in your development environment, need to be moved to the UAT
environment.
You must export solution assets so that they can be imported to your UAT
system.
Activities
Export Object Store Data: Procedure, on page 7-13
User accounts

Administrator
Note
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Export Object Store Data: Procedure
Introduction
In this activity, you create an export manifest and add objects to it for export.
You then run the export operation.
Scenario
You created the Sales_UAT destination environment that has no custom
classes, workflows, or any other solution data on it. You need to export the
assets, that comprise your Finance Solution, from the Sales_Dev object
store so that they can be imported into the Sales_UAT object store.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Explore the Finance Solution assets," on page 7-13
Procedure 2, "Create the export manifest," on page 7-16
Procedure 3, "Add assets to the export manifest," on page 7-16
Procedure 4, "Export the data," on page 7-18
Procedure 5, "Inspect the Deploy Dataset files," on page 7-19
Procedure 1: Explore the Finance Solution assets

Before exporting data and metadata, explore some of the assets, of the Finance Solution, that need
to be moved to the Sales_UAT environment. A FileNet Content Manager application can contain:
Business information
Application Definition
Configuration information
Executable Code
The Finance Solution contains business information, application definitions and configuration
information which already exist in the Sales object store. In this exercise you will explore the assets
that you will be exporting.
3. Explore the Customers folder
a. Expand Browse > Root Folder.
b. Open the Customers folder.
Student Exercises
c. On the Contents tab, change the default view of Show Documents to Show Custom
Objects. Two objects should be listed.
d. Open each of the objects and notice that they belong to the Class Description:
Customer.
4. Explore the Customer Custom Object.
e. In the left navigation pane, expand Data Design > Classes > Custom Object
f. Open Customer
g. Select the Property Definitions tab, you should see 4 property definitions.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty 5. Explore the Products folder

a. In the left navigation pane, expand Browse > Root Folder.
b. Open the Products folder.
c. On the Contents tab, you should see a total of 7 documents, all of Class: Product.
6. Explore the Product Class.
a. In the left navigation pane, expand Data Design > Classes > Document
b. Open Product
c. Select the Property Definitions tab, you should see 5 property definitions.
Important
The Finance Solution assets include:

Folders
- Customers
2 custom objects of class type: Customer
- Products
7 documents of document class type: Product
Classes
- Customer
4 property definitions
- Product
5 property definitions
Student Exercises
It is important to have this information so that when the data is exported, you can validate the
number of assets.
Procedure 2: Create the export manifest

1. Open FileNet Deployment Manager, if it is not already open.
2. Expand Environments > Sales_Dev
3. Select Export Manifests.
4. Click File > New > Export Manifest.
5. Name the export manifest: Finance-app-assets.
6. Click Finish. The export manifest is visible in the tree view.
Procedure 3: Add assets to the export manifest

1. Open the export manifest:
a. Select Finance-app-assets.xml.
b. Click File > Open.
2. Add items to the export manifest:
a. Click the green plus icon, in the menu bar, to add Assets.
b. In the tree view, expand Object Stores > Sales > Browse
c. Select the Root Folder.
d. In the right pane, select the following folders (hold the Ctrl key to make multiple
selections):
Customers
Products
e. Click Add.
f. Click Close when you are finished adding assets.
3. Configure the Include Options:
a. Select Customers in the export manifest
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty b. Click the pencil icon, next to the green plus sign icon, in the menu bar, to open the
Include Options screen.
c. For the Include Options, uncheck Document Related: Include all document versions.
d. Click OK.
4. Repeat step 3 for the Products entry, using the same Include Options.
Important
You have to be very careful when selecting the include options, for the assets. You want to include
only the assets you need (documents, classes, properties, etc.) Normally you would not include all
the versions of documents when moving a solution from development to UAT.
5. Click File > Save All to save your data.
Student Exercises
Troubleshooting
If you see a blank gray area instead of the Include Options menu, increase your screen resolution.
The menu cannot display properly on screen resolutions under 1024x768.
Procedure 4: Export the data

The assets have been added with the appropriate include options. You are now ready to export the
assets and create the Deploy Dataset.
1. Select Finance-app-assets.xml.
2. Click File > Export.
3. Make note of the Output Folder for the deploy dataset.

4. Click OK.
5. You should see 46 items processed. Click OK to close the success notification.
6. Review the deployment.log to see what assets were exported.
a. In Windows Explorer, open the C:\FDM-deploy\Temp\Run.<timestamp> folder for the
latest run.
b. Open the deployment.log, in the bottom half of the file you will see details of the
items that were exported.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty
Note
Adding two items to the export manifest with appropriate include options can result in a large
number of exported items.
Procedure 5: Inspect the Deploy Dataset files

You exported files from an object store to a Deploy Dataset. The Deploy Dataset is a set of files in
the deployment tree. You can inspect these files in the file system.
1. Open Windows Explorer.
2. Browse to C:\FDM-deploy\Environments\Sales-Dev\Assets
3. Open the ExportManifests folder
4. Edit the Finance-app-assets.xml file.
Note
The include options you selected are included as xml tags and serve as instructions for FileNet
Deployment Manager, identifying what to include in the export.
5. Close the Finance-app-assets.xml file.

6. Go up one level, to the Assets folder, and open the Finance-app-assets folder.
7. Inspect the contents.
a. Verify that a Content folder exists, which includes a number of subfolders named
FNXX (where XX can be from 0 to 22).
b. Verify that the Finance-app-assets folder also contains the following files:
Catalog.xml
deployDataSet1.xml
DeploymentOperation_Export.xml.
Finance-app-assets.xml
ObjectList.xml
c. Open any of the XML files with WordPad to inspect the contents.
8. Close all the open tabs but leave FileNet Deployment Manager open for the next
exercise.
Student Exercises
Summary
In this exercise, you did the following tasks:
Explored the Finance Solution assets
Created an export manifest.
Exported data to a Deploy Dataset.
Inspected the Deploy Dataset created.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Lesson 7.3. Prepare the Half Maps
Overview

The content and associated data structures of a development object store
need to be exported to a test object store. You must create a mapping
between the two environments in order to convert objects to work in the new
environment. You create the map by combining two half maps into a data
map.
Activities
Prepare half maps: Exercise, on page 7-23
User accounts

Administrator
Note
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Prepare half maps: Exercise
Introduction
In this activity, you prepare the half maps of your source and destination
environments.
Scenario
You have created your source and destination environments and exported
the solution assets from your source environment. You need to create the
object store half maps and the security principal half maps for your source
and destination environment. These two sets of half maps will allow FileNet
Deployment Manager to map source object stores to destination object
stores and source security principals to destination security principals, when
the data maps are created.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Retrieve object store data for the source environment," on
page 7-23
Procedure 2, "Retrieve security principal data for the source environment,"
on page 7-24
Procedure 3, "Retrieve security principal data for the destination
environment," on page 7-25
Procedure 4, "Create an object store for UAT," on page 7-27
Procedure 5, "Configure the object store for CBR (optional)," on page 7-28
Procedure 6, "Configure CBR on the object store (optional)," on page 7-28
Procedure 1: Retrieve object store data for the source environment

1. In FileNet Deployment Manager, in the left navigation pane, double-click the Sales_Dev
environment to open it.
Student Exercises
2. Retrieve object store data:

a. Click Retrieve Data for object stores, storage policies, and storage areas. If you do
not see this screen, ensure that you have selected the Overview tab.
b. Select the two Options: Retrieve storage policies for each object store and Retrieve
storage areas for each object store.
c. On the Mode option, you can take the default Merge...
d. Click OK.
e. Click OK to close the success confirmation.
3. Verify the object store data:
a. Expand the Sales_Dev node in the Tree View.
b. Right-click Object Store Data node and select open.
c. You should see a list of the object stores configured on your Sales_Dev
environment.
Procedure 2: Retrieve security principal data for the source environment

1. Click the Sales_Dev tab to return to the Sales_Dev properties page.
2. Retrieve Security Principal Data:
a. Click Retrieve Data for Security Principal.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty b. Keep the default option, Deploy Dataset File.
c. Click Next.
d. For the Select Deploy Dataset: field, ensure that the full path to the
Finance-app-assets is displayed, if not, use the Browse button to select it.
e. On the Mode option, you can take the default Merge...
Information
Since this is the first time you are creating this half map, it does not matter which mode you select,
merge or overwrite. However, if you already have an existing half map, the merge and overwrite
modes will do what you expect, so ensure you choose the appropriate mode.
f. Click Finish.
g. Click OK to close the success confirmation.
3. Verify the security principal data.
a. Right-click the Security Principal Data node and select Open.
b. You will see the list of security principals associated with the assets you exported in
the deploy dataset file, Finance-app-assets.

4. Leave FileNet Deployment Manager open for the next exercise.
Procedure 3: Retrieve security principal data for the destination

environment
Prior to retrieving the users and groups for a destination environment, planning must take place to
decide what users and groups will be used in the destination environment.
For this exercise, the following table outlines the users and groups to be used for the two
environments.
Student Exercises
User and group accounts

Source Environment Destination Environment Label
p8admin p8admin
p8admins Finance Admins admins
p8users Finance Clerks users
1. In the left navigation pane, double-click the Sales_UAT environment to open it.
2. Use Notepad to create a filter Label File:
a. Notepad to create a text file, C:\FDM-deploy\UAT-users.txt.
b. Add the users and groups listed under Destination Environment, in the table
above, and the corresponding label, separated by a comma. One entry per line.
c. Save the file

3. Retrieve Security Principal Data:
a. Click Retrieve Data for Security Principal
b. Select the option From Content Engines LDAP Provider, click Next.
c. Click Retrieve Realms
d. Under Filter, select Use a Label File, browse to C:\FDM-deploy\UAT-users.txt
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty e. Click Finish
Procedure 4: Create an object store for UAT

At a customer site, the development system and the UAT system would be two distinct FileNet P8
domains. Unfortunately the lab image is restricted to just one FileNet P8 domain. To demonstrate
the deployment process, you will create a new object store to take the role of the destination object
store, Sales_UAT.
Create a destination object store. Specify the group Finance Admins as administrators (in addition
to P8Admin).
1. Use Firefox to log in to Administration Console for the Content Platform Engine:
2. Select Object Stores > New Object Store.
3. Use the following data to create the object store:
Page Field Value

Name the Object Store Display Name SalesUAT
Database connection FNOSDS
Define the Database
Schema name SalesUAT
Select the Type of Storage Area
for Content
P8Admin
Grant Administrative Access Administrators
Finance Admins
Grant Basic Access basic users Finance Clerks
4. In the Select Add-ons window, click the Workplace/WorkplaceXT Configuration button.
5. Complete the wizard using defaults, click Finish after reviewing the Summary page.
Note
You may get a prompt stating that a script is taking too long to complete, go ahead and click
continue to complete the script.
Student Exercises
6. On the Success screen, click Close.
Procedure 5: Configure the object store for CBR (optional)
Important
Perform this procedure only if you completed the lesson activities in the unit "Optimizing Search
Performance". If you did not configure the Sales object store for CBR, then skip this procedure.
If you performed the lesson activities in "Optimizing Search Performance", then the Sales object
store was configured for content-based retrieval (CBR). In order for the import operation to
succeed, both object stores must be configured the same way. Use this procedure to create an
index area on the SalesUAT object store. You are logged on to Administration Console for Content
Platform Engine as P8admin.
1. Click to open the SalesUAT object store.
2. Click Administrative > Index Areas.
3. Click New.
4. Name the Index Area
a. Type Index Area 2 in the Display Name field. The name that you choose is
unimportant but lesson activities refer to this name.
b. Click Next.
5. Configure the Index Area:
a. In the Root directory field, type C:\Indexes.
b. Click Next.
7. Wait for confirmation of success.
8. Click Close.
Procedure 6: Configure CBR on the object store (optional)
Important
Perform this procedure only if you completed the lesson activities in the unit "Optimizing Search
Performance". If you did not configure the Sales object store for CBR, then skip this procedure.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty If you performed the lesson activities in "Optimizing Search Performance", then the Sales object
store was configured for content-based retrieval (CBR). Use this procedure to enable CBR on the
SalesUAT object store.
1. Click to open the SalesUAT object store.
2. Click the Text Search tab.
3. Select the Indexing Language:
a. Scroll down the Available Languages list.
b. Select en (for English).
c. Click the arrow button to move the language to Selected Languages.
d. Click Save.
4. Place a check mark in the Enable IBM Content Search Services option.
5. Click Save.
6. Click Refresh to ensure that the changes are saved.
8. Close Firefox.
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Retrieve the Object Store Data for the Destination Environment:
Exercise
Introduction
You created two environments in FileNet Deployment Manager. You must
create object store half maps for the source and destination environments in
order to create the mapping between object stores. You have retrieved the
object store data for the source environment, now you need to retrieve the
object store data for the destination environment.
Important
You must complete this task to continue with the lesson exercises.
Challenge
Retrieve the object store data for the Sales_UAT environment.
Inspect the resulting object store half map
Verification
Your object store half map should include the following;
Troubleshooting
If you cannot retrieve the object store data, do the following checks:
Ensure that you made a valid connection to the object store.
Ensure that you saved your configuration.
Note
This solution does not include any services, so you do not need to retrieve service data.
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Lesson 7.4. Map and convert assets
Overview

solution, in a development environment, need be moved to UAT
environment.
You must create a mapping between the two environments in order to
convert objects to work in the UAT environment.
Activities
Map and Convert Assets: Activity, on page 7-35
User accounts

Administrator
Note
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Map and Convert Assets: Activity
Introduction
You must create a source destination-pair to store the data maps that will be
used for conversion.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Configure object store labels," on page 7-35
Procedure 2, "Configure security principal labels," on page 7-36
Procedure 3, "Create the source-destination pair," on page 7-36
Procedure 4, "Inspect the source-destination pair," on page 7-37
Procedure 5, "Convert the deploy dataset," on page 7-38
Procedure 1: Configure object store labels

You are mapping a source object store to a destination object store. If you label the source and
destination object stores properly, they are automatically mapped when you generate the
source-destination pair.
1. Open FileNet Deployment Manager, if not already open.
2. Label the Sales_Dev object stores:
a. Open the Sales_Dev > Object Store Data node.
b. In the Label column of the Sales object store, type Sales.
3. Label the Sales_UAT object stores:

a. Open the Sales_UAT > Object Store Data node.
b. In the Label column of the SalesUAT object store, type Sales.
Student Exercises
Note
Ensure that the Sales_Dev and Sales_UAT object stores are correctly labeled.
Environment Object Store Label
Sales_Dev Sales Sales
Sales_UAT SalesUAT Sales
Procedure 2: Configure security principal labels

In the previous procedure, you used labels to identify the source and destination object stores. You
will use labels to help FileNet Deployment Manager map the users and groups.
Note
For the Sales_UAT security principal half map, you added the labels to the label file used to filter the
retrieval of the security principals from the Content Engine LDAP, which allowed FileNet
Deployment Manager to automatically add the labels to the users and groups in the generated half
map, so you only need to add labels to the Sales_Dev security principal half map.
User and group accounts

Label Source Environment Destination Environment
p8admin p8admin
admins p8admins Finance Admins
users p8users Finance Clerks
1. Add labels to the Sales_Dev security principle half map:
a. Open the Sales_Dev > Security Principal node.
b. Using the table above, add the appropriate labels.
Procedure 3: Create the source-destination pair

You create a source-destination pair that is used for conversion and import.
1. Click File > New > Source-Destination Pair.
2. Name the pair Sales_Dev-Sales_UAT.
3. Add an appropriate description, for example, Deploy finance application from
Sales development to Sales UAT for testing
4. In the Source Environment menu, select Sales_Dev.
5. In the Destination Environment menu, select Sales_UAT.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty 6. Click Finish.
Procedure 4: Inspect the source-destination pair

1. Expand the Sales_Dev-Sales_UAT source-destination pair.
2. Double-click the Object Store Map node.
3. Verify that the Sales object store is mapped to the SalesUAT object store.
4. Double-click the Security Principal Map node.

5. Verify that the users and groups are mapped as follows:
Information
The second column of a data map always includes one of the following icons for each entry.
Icon Description
More information is available about the items in
the row of the data grid.
Hover over the icon to see the additional details.
Mapping generated from FDM default matching

rules based on item attributes.
Mapping is explicit user match using labels or

direct assignment on the data mapping dialog.
No match exists; item will not be mapped during

conversion.
Student Exercises
Procedure 5: Convert the deploy dataset

The object stores and principal maps are ready. You can now convert the exported Deploy Dataset
and change any object store or security principal references according to the mappings that you
specified.
1. Select the source destination pair, Sales_Dev-Sales_UAT.
2. Right-click and then select Convert Assets.
3. On the Asset Type Selection page:

a. Select Content Engine Deploy Dataset.
b. Click Next.
4. On the Select the Source Deploy Dataset page:
a. Verify that the Deploy Dataset is
C:\...\Environments\Sales_Dev\Assets\Finance-app-assets.
b. Click Next.
5. On the Select Output Folder for Converted Deploy Dataset page:
a. Verify that the Folder for Converted Deploy Dataset is
C:\...\Environmetns\Sales_UAT\Assets.
i. Note the name of the Converted Deploy Dataset that will be created.
b. Click Finish.
6. Click OK to close the success notification.
Note
You should see 46 items processed.
Summary
Created a source-destination pair.
Mapped object stores and security principals.
Converted content assets.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Lesson 7.5. Analyze and import assets
Overview

solution, in a development environment, need be moved to UAT
environment.
You must run a report to see how the converted assets will affect the system.
If the results are acceptable, you can import the assets into the UAT
environment.
Activities
Analyze and import assets: Activity, on page 7-41
User accounts

Administrator
Finance Admins Adam filenet
Note
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Analyze and import assets: Activity
Introduction
In this exercise, you run an import analysis and then review the results. After
you review the results and everything is acceptable, you can import the
assets into the UAT environment.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Analyze the Finance-app-assets dataset," on page 7-41
Procedure 2, "Import the Deploy Dataset," on page 7-42
Procedure 3, "Inspect the imported assets," on page 7-43
Procedure 1: Analyze the Finance-app-assets dataset

You are in FileNet Deployment Manager.
1. In the left navigation pane, Right-click Source-Destination Pairs >
Sales_Dev-Sales_UAT.
2. Click Analyze.
c. Click Next on the Analyze Change Impact window.
d. On the Analyze Change Impact on Destination Environment window, ensure that the
C:\...\Finance-app-assets.converted Deploy Dataset is selected.
e. Click Next.
f. On the Select Import Analysis Options page, select Always update the object if it
exists at the destination, click Next.
g. On the Change Impact Report Options page, select the Include details for all objects
in report check box, click Next.
h. On the Summary page, click Finish.
3. Note any failed items in the notification, then click OK. The Change Impact Analysis
Report opens.
Student Exercises
4. Review the Change Impact Analysis Report.

i. Click on the Assets that failed Analysis link
i. Note that the failure is caused because we have a workflow subscription but the
WorkflowDefinition does not exist in the destination environment. This is an
expected error, for this exercise. For workflow defintions you need to migrate the
workflow definition and transfer it to make it available for use in a workflow
subscription.
j. Click on the Back to Top link
k. Click on the Assets that Passed Analysis with Warnings link.
i. Note that there are 5 warnings for the Class: Product, and they all warn of the
storage area that does not exist in the destination environment, For this exercise
we will allow FileNet Deployment Manager to use the default storage area, but in
a real environment there might be a plan to use a different storage area in the
destination environment, this storage area would need to be setup prior to doing
the import operation.
5. Close the report.
Procedure 2: Import the Deploy Dataset

1. Right-click Source-Destination Pairs > Sales_Dev-Sales_UAT
2. Click Import.
3. In the Select Storage Policy for Imported Objects.

a. Leave the default setting, but notice the option available:
Use default storage policies or areas from class definitions at destination
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Use storage policies or areas from the imported objects in the deploy dataset
(this option assumes that the appropriate storage policies and areas have been
configured in the destination environment).
Select a specific storage policy from the destination object store (this allows you
to map the storage policies at the time of import, again the storage areas need to
have been already configured in the destination environment).
4. Uncheck the Use original create/udpate timestamps and users
5. Select Always Update
6. Click Finish.
7. Note that 46 items were processed, 45 succeeded and 1 failed.
8. Inspect the deployment.log
a. Using Windows Explorer, browse to C:\FDM-deploy\temp\Run.<timestamp> folder,
corresponding to the most recent timestamp.
b. Open the deployment.log
i. The log shows that the Test Workflow Subscription will not be imported because
the workflow it references does not exist in the destination. (It is Ok for ignore
this error for this exercise).
ii. Close the deployment.log file when you are done reviewing it.
9. Close FileNet Deployment Manager.
Procedure 3: Inspect the imported assets

You imported both data and metadata into the new object store. Now you are going to see the
results of the import.
1. Log in to Administration Console for the Content Platform Engine as a member of the
Finance Admins group.
- User name: adam
- Password: filenet
2. Open the SalesUAT object store.
3. Expand the Browse > Root Folder.
4. Verify that the Root Folder contains the following subfolders:
- Customers
- Products
5. Open the folders and verify that they contain the expected documents.
6. Explore the class types and the property definitions.
7. Logout when you are done exploring.
Student Exercises
Summary
Created a Change Impact Analysis Report.
Reviewed the report.
Imported converted assets.
Inspected the imported assets.
V10.1
Student Exercises
Unit 8. Manage Sweep jobs

EXNoSideHead
Unit Overview
Lessons
Lesson 8.1, "Configure a Sweep Job," on page 8-3
Lesson 8.2, "Work with Sweep Policies," on page 8-15
Unit Dependencies
Refer to Unit 1: Introduction to IBM FileNet Content Manager for the
system startup and system check.
Refer to Unit 2: Build an Object Store for the concepts on Storage.
Requirements

System Startup
Copyright IBM Corp. 2013, 2015 Unit 8. Manage Sweep jobs 8-1
Student Exercises
System Check
V10.1
Student Exercises
Lesson
EXNoSideHead 8.1. Configure a Sweep Job

As an Administrator, you manage objects on the Content Platform Engine by
monitoring and controlling object activity. You plan to archive and you must
move content for large numbers of documents and annotations from the
primary storage area to another storage area. You use a bulk move content
job to complete the task.
Activities
Configure a Bulk Move Content Job: Activity, on page 8-5
Configure a Bulk Move Content Job: Practice, on page 8-13
User accounts
Engine
Note
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Configure
EXNoSideHead a Bulk Move Content Job: Activity
In this activity, you configure a sweep job to do a bulk move of document content. You specify a
Document class so that documents of that particular class only moved. You also specify a File
Storage area in the Filter Expression, so the documents in that storage only moved. The destination
Storage area is mentioned in the Storage Policy. You test the sweep job execution by comparing file
count and content in the File Storage Areas.
Storage Areas, Storage Policy, Document classes, and the documents in the file storage are
already configured on the student system for this activity.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Examine the File Storage Areas," on page 8-5
Procedure 2, "Create a Bulk Move Content Job," on page 8-7
Procedure 3, "Test the Bulk Move Content Job," on page 8-10
Procedure 1: Examine the File Storage Areas

In this procedure, you examine the File Storage Areas for their file count before running the Bulk
Move Content Job. You are going to compare these values after running the job.
2. In the Administration Console, expand the P8Domain > Object Stores node on the left pane and
click the Sales object store.
3. Open the Storage Areas: In Sales tab, expand Sales > Administrative and click Storage Areas.
Storage Area tab opens and all the available storage areas are listed.
4. Examine the File Storage Areas.
a. Verify that the PurchaseOrderFileStorageArea (from where you want to move the content)
contains nine files.
b. Observe that the destination storage area (BulkMoveStorageArea) contains o files.
Student Exercises
Note
The BulkMoveStorageArea is associated with the Bulk Move Storage Policy. You configure this
Storage Policy as the destination in the Sweep Job that you are going to create.
c. In the Storage Areas tab, click the BulkMoveStorage Area to open its properties.
d. Click the Storage Policies tab to view the policy that is associated with this storage area.
5. Examine the Document Class for the nine files in the PurchaseOrderStorage Area.
a. In Sales tab, expand Sales > Browse> RootFolder and click TestBulkMove folder.
b. In the TestBulkMove tab, observe that nine documents are listed. In the Class column, verify
that five documents belong to PurchaseOrder and four documents belong to PriceQuote.
c. Both the Document Classes use PurchaseOrderStorageArea for storage.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead
Hint
Your Bulk Move Content Job moves the content for the PurchaseOrder Document class only as you
specify in the wizard. After running the Job, you are going to verify that the documents belong to
PriceQuote Document are not moved.
Procedure 2: Create a Bulk Move Content Job

1. Start the New Bulk Move Content Job wizard.
a. In the Sales tab, select the Sweep Management > Job Sweeps > Bulk Move Content Jobs
folder in the left pane.
b. In the Bulk Move Content Jobs tab, click New in the right pane.
The New Bulk Move Content Job tab opens.
2. Define a Bulk Move Content Job.
a. In the New Bulk Move Content Job tab, enter a value for the Display name field (Example:
BMCJob).
b. If needed, Scroll down. Select Normal from the list for the Sweep mode field.
Information
Sweep mode
The value decides whether to preview the objects that the sweep is going to process.
The Preview mode is useful for testing the filtering expression criteria without performing any
actions on the selected objects.
You are going to use the Preview setting in the next Practice activity.
c. Click the Enable bulk move content job option and click Next.
3. Define Sweep Targets - Target class:

a. For the Target class field, copy the object reference by completing the following step 4.
Then, continue on the New Bulk Move Content Job wizard in step 5.
Student Exercises
4. Copy the Object Reference.

a. In the Sales tab, expand Sales > Data Design > Classes > Document > PurchaseOrder on
the navigation (left) pane.
b. Right-click PurchaseOrder, and click Copy Object Reference from the list.
5. Paste Object.
a. In the New Bulk Move Content Job tab, click Paste Object.
b. Verify that the Target class field now has the PurchaseOrder value.
6. Define Sweep Targets - Filter expression:
a. For the Filter expression field, copy the GUID by completing the following step 7. Then,
continue on the New Bulk Move Content Job wizard in step 8.
7. Copy the GUID value.
a. In the Sales tab, expand Sales > Administrative > Storage Areas on the navigation (left)
pane. Click PurchaseOrderFileStorageArea.
b. In the PurchaseOrderFileStorageArea tab > General subtab on the right pane, copy the
GUID value in the Id field.
8. In the New Bulk Move Content Job tab, paste it in the Filter expression field and build the
expression. Example: StorageArea = OBJECT({GUID})
Important
Verify that there are no typing errors in the Filter expression statement. Type the value exactly as
shown. It is case-sensitive and extra spaces are not allowed.
9. Select BulkMove Storage Policy for the Storage policy names field.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead This storage policy and BulkMoveStorageArea (a file storage area that is associated with the
policy) are already created on the student system for this lab exercise.
10. Set other options:
- Include subclasses - Not Enabled
- End replication after move- Enabled
- Record Failures - Enabled
a. Click Next.
11. Define Bulk Move Content Job Dates.
a. Enter todays date for the Effect start date field. (Example: 6/21/2013)
b. Enter tomorrows date for the Effect end date field. (Example: 6/22/2013)
After you enter the value, the system is configured to automatically format the dates.
c. Edit the start time to the current time and end time to 11.00.00 PM.
d. Click Next.
12. In the Summary page, review the information and click Finish.
a. In the Success page, click Close to close the tab.
13. In the Bulk Move Content Jobs tab, click Refresh.
a. Verify that the new sweep job is listed.
Student Exercises
Troubleshooting
If there is an error in the Filter expression value, the wizard does not create the Job. It throws an
error similar to the one in the screen capture. In this example, notice that the expression is missing
a single quotation mark before the GUID # starts.
Fix the format:

Click OK to close the Error window.
Click Back in the wizard, correct the Filter expression value, and complete the wizard.
Procedure 3: Test the Bulk Move Content Job

In this procedure, you examine the Bulk Move Content Job properties. You also examine the File
Storage Areas for their file count after running the Bulk Move Content Job. You compare these
values with the ones before running the job.
1. Refresh the object store: In the Sales tab, click Refresh.
Important
It might take a couple minutes for the Sweep Job to complete. If you do not see the expected
results, wait for a couple minutes and refresh the Sales object store.
V10.1
Student Exercises
2. Examine the Bulk Move Content Job properties.

EXNoSideHead
a. In the Bulk Move Content Jobs tab, click BMCJob.
3. In the General tab, scroll down and observe the values for the start and end dates. Verify that
five objects were examined and processed. The Failed object count is 0.
a. Examine the Properties tab for object counts.
Hint
If you do not see the expected results, refresh the object store and the Bulk Move Content Jobs.
4. Open the Storage Areas.

a. In Sales tab, expand Sales > Administrative and click Storage Areas.
5. Examine the File Storage Areas.
a. Verify that the target storage area (PurchaseOrderFileStorageArea) now contains only four
files.
b. Observe that the destination storage area (BulkMoveStorageArea) now contains five files.
The content for the five documents of the PurchaseOrder class is moved from the
PurchaseOrderStorage Area to the BulkMoveStorageArea by running the Bulk Move Content
Job.
The four documents of the PriceQuote class are not moved.
Student Exercises
Information
You can also search for the documents of the class that is used for bulk move content job and verify
that their Storage area value is changed.
V10.1
Student Exercises
Configure
EXNoSideHead a Bulk Move Content Job: Practice
Scenario: Product Department

The Sales Department sends a request to archive the Price Quote
documents that are not active. As an Administrator, you complete this task by
creating a bulk move content job with the data in the table to move the
content to another file storage.
Challenge
Create a Bulk Move Content Job and test it.
Use the age of the document as the filter expression in this job. You used
File Storage Area for the filter in the previous activity.
Use Preview for the Sweep mode. (in stead of Normal)
Data
Item Value
Display name MyBulkMoveJob
Sweep mode Preview
Enable bulk move content True
Target class PriceQuote
Filter expression DateCreated < NOW() - TimeSpan(2, 'Days')
Storage policy names Bulk Move Storage Policy
Include Subclasses False
End replication after move True
Record Failures True
Effective Start date Todays date (Example: 06/22/2013)
Effective End date Tomorrows date (Example: 06/23/2013)
Hint
Set the age of the document for the Filter expression field.
- Example: DateCreated < NOW() - TimeSpan(2, 'Days')
- This filter moves any documents that were created at least two days ago.
- Type the value as shown in the table. It is case-sensitive and extra spaces are not allowed.
In a production system, the age of the documents could be in months or years, but for this lab
exercise, you use in days.
Student Exercises
Effective start date and end date format:

The system automatically formats the date that you entered. You can edit the time to be the current
time for the start date.
Verification
Examine the MyBulkMoveJob properties > General tab.
Verify that four objects were examined and processed. The failed object
count is 0.
Since you chose Sweep mode value as Preview, verify that the Sweep
Results tab contains a list of objects that the sweep is going to move.
The Preview mode helps to test the filtering expression criteria without
performing any actions on the selected objects.
V10.1
Student Exercises
Lesson
EXNoSideHead 8.2. Work with Sweep Policies

The Sweep examines the database tables that store objects and deletes
objects that are based on the criteria that are defined in the disposal policy.
These sweeps run multiple iterations until they are either disabled or deleted.
You must configure the system to automatically delete the documents of a
specified class that is based on a filter criteria. (Example: Based on the age
of the documents or based on documents in a particular File Storage Area).
As an Administrator, you create a disposal policy to complete this task.
Activities
Create a Disposal Policy: Activity, on page 8-17
User accounts: Windows

Platform Engine
Note
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Create
EXNoSideHead a Disposal Policy: Activity
In this activity, you configure a disposal policy to delete the objects. You specify a Target Class so
that documents of that particular class only deleted. You also specify a File Storage area in the
Filter Expression, so the documents in that storage only deleted. You test the disposal policy by
verifying the processed object count and the documents in the folders.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Examine documents and File Storage Area," on page 8-17
Procedure 2, "Create a Disposal Policy," on page 8-18
Procedure 3, "Test the Disposal Policy," on page 8-20
Procedure 1: Examine documents and File Storage Area

In this procedure, you examine the number of documents in the object store folder before running
the disposal policy. You also examine the File Storage Area for its file count. You are going to
compare the documents and the file count after running the policy.
2. In the administration console, expand the P8Domain > Object Stores node on the left pane and
click the Sales object store.
3. Examine the number of documents and their Document Class:
b. In the TestBulkMove tab, observe that nine documents are listed. In the Class column, verify
that four documents belong to PriceQuote.
c. The four documents are stored in PurchaseOrderFileStorageArea.
4. Examine the File Storage Area.

b. On the Statistics tab, verify that the PurchaseOrderFileStorageArea (from where you want to
delete the files) contains four files.
Student Exercises
Procedure 2: Create a Disposal Policy

1. Open the New Disposal Policy wizard.
a. In the Sales tab, select the Sweep Management > Sweep Policies > Disposal Policies folder
in the left pane.
b. In the Disposal Policies tab on the right pane, click New.
The New Disposal Policy wizard opens in the right pane.
2. Define a Disposal Policy.
a. In the New Disposal Policy tab, enter a value for the Display name field (Example:
MyDisposalPolicy).
b. Select Normal from the list for the Sweep mode.
c. Select the Enable disposal policy option.
d. Click Next.
3. Define Sweep Targets - Target class:
a. For the Target class field, copy the object reference by completing the following step 4.
Then, continue on the New Disposal Policy wizard in step 5.
4. Copy the object reference.
a. In the Sales tab, expand Sales > Data Design > Classes > Document > PriceQuote on the
navigation (left) pane.
b. Right-click PriceQuote, and click Copy Object Reference from the list.
5. Paste Object.
a. In the New Disposal Policy tab, click Paste Object.
b. Verify that the Target class field now has the PriceQuote value.
6. Define Sweep Targets - Filter expression:
a. For the Filter expression field, copy the GUID by completing the following step 7. Then,
continue on the New Disposal Policy wizard in step 8.
V10.1
Student Exercises
7. Copy the GUID value.

EXNoSideHead
a. In the Sales tab, expand Sales > Administrative > Storage Areas on the navigation (left)
pane. Click PurchaseOrderFileStorageArea.
b. In the PurchaseOrderFileStorageArea tab > General subtab on the right pane, copy the
GUID value in the Id field.
8. In the New Disposal Policy tab, paste the GUID value in the Filter expression field and build the
expression. Example: StorageArea = OBJECT({GUID})
Important
Verify that there are no typing errors in the Filter expression statement. Type the value exactly as
shown. It is case-sensitive and extra spaces are not allowed.
Hint
Use the age of the document for the Filter expression field.
- Example: DateCreated < NOW() - TimeSpan(10, 'Days')
- This filter moves any documents that were created at least 10 days ago.
- Type the value as shown. It is case-sensitive and extra spaces are not allowed.
In a production system, the age of the documents could be in months or years, but for testing, you
use in days.
9. Set other options:

- Include subclasses - Not Enabled
- Number of sweep iterations- 10 (Leave the default value)
Student Exercises
a. Click Next.
10. Define Policy Dates:
a. Leave the date fields blank.
b. Click Next.
11. In the Summary page, verify the details and click Finish.
12. Verify that the policy is created.
a. In the Sales tab, click Refresh.
b. In the Disposal Policies tab, click Refresh.
c. Verify that the policy that you created is displayed.
d. Click the policy to view its properties page.
Procedure 3: Test the Disposal Policy

1. Verify the properties of the policy that you created:
a. In the Disposal Policies tab, click MyDisposalPolicy.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead b. In MyDisposalPolicy tab, > General sub tab, observe the object counts.
2. Verify that Policy Controlled Sweeps is created automatically.

a. In the Sales tab, select the Sweep Management > Policy-Controlled Sweeps folder in the
left pane.
b. In the Policy Controlled Sweeps tab in the right pane, verify that an item is listed.
c. Click the item, and observe its properties for each tab.
d. In the Subscribers tab, verify that the policy that you created is listed.
3. Examine the documents:

b. In the TestBulkMove tab, verify that all four documents belong to PriceQuote Class are
deleted from the folder.
Student Exercises
4. Examine the File Storage Area.

The Storage Areas tab opens and all the available storage areas are listed.
b. In the Storage Area tab, verify that the PurchaseOrderFileStorageArea (from where you
deleted the files) shows o file count.
Information
You can also search for the documents of the PriceQuote class and verify that they are deleted.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty
Unit 9. System Maintenance
Unit Overview
Lessons
Lesson 9.1, "Perform Searches and Bulk Actions," on page 9-3
Lesson 9.2, "Work With Audit Logs," on page 9-17
Lesson 9.3, "Work with System Logs," on page 9-31
Requirements
Copyright IBM Corp. 2013, 2015 Unit 9. System Maintenance 9-1

Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Lesson 9.1. Perform Searches and Bulk Actions
Overview

Changing business needs require that you find and modify the security of
many existing documents.
You must find many existing documents and file them in a specified folder.
You must create a search with a bulk action that performs these tasks.
Activities
Use Bulk Actions to Modify Security: Procedure, on page 9-5
Practice Using Bulk Actions: Exercise, on page 9-15
User accounts

Administrator
Security administrator cn=root IBMFileNetP8
Marketing manager Mark filenet
Note
All passwords are case-sensitive.

Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Use Bulk Actions to Modify Security: Procedure
Introduction
In this exercise, you use a search with a bulk action to modify security on
existing documents.
Scenario
Your company was reorganized. You have a new Marketing team. You must
create a new Marketing group and then modify security on marketing
documents to provide group members special permissions.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Create the Marketing security group," on page 9-5
Procedure 2, "Create a search for marketing materials," on page 9-7
Procedure 3, "Create and run bulk actions," on page 9-7
Procedure 4, "Verify security change," on page 9-8
Procedure 5, "Use a batch operation to modify security," on page 9-9
Procedure 6, "Verify the security change," on page 9-11
Procedure 7, "Use FileNet Enterprise Manager (optional)," on page 9-12
Procedure 8, "Review the search results," on page 9-13
Procedure 1: Create the Marketing security group

You can create the Marketing group by using Tivoli Directory Server.
1. Use Internet Explorer to go to the Tivoli Directory Server website:
- http://localhost:9080/IDSWebApp
2. Sign in to Tivoli Directory Server as root:
- User DN: cn=root
3. Click Directory Management > Manage entries.

Student Exercises
4. Click the plus sign (+) to expand o=sample.
6. Click Add to add a group.
7. On the Select object class page, do the following steps:
a. Select groupOfUniqueNames from the Structural object classes menu.
b. Click Next.
8. On the Select auxiliary object classes page, click Next.
9. On the Required attributes page, enter the following data:
a. Relative DN: CN=Marketing
b. cn: Marketing
c. uniqueMember: CN=mark,cn=users,o=sample
10. Click Next.

11. On the Optional attributes page, click Finish.
12. Click No to add a similar entry.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Procedure 2: Create a search for marketing materials

1. Using Firefox, sign in to Administration Console for Content Platform Engine:
2. Log in as p8admin:
3. Open Object Stores > Sales.
4. Click Search.
5. Click New to create a new search.
6. On the Simple View tab, create a search with the following criteria:
- Column: Document Title
- Condition: Starts With
- Value: Marketing
Procedure 3: Create and run bulk actions

The search is open. Bulk actions are currently disabled.
1. Click the Bulk Actions tab.
2. Select Enable to enable bulk actions.
3. Scroll down to the Security area.
4. Select the Update security option.
5. Click Add.
6. On the Add Users and Groups page, add the Marketing group:
a. Type Marketing in the search field.
b. Click Search.
c. Select the Marketing group.
d. Move the Marketing group to Selected Users and Groups by using the right arrow.
e. Click OK.
7. Scroll down to the permissions area to select the following permissions:
- View all properties
- Modify all properties
- View content
- Link a document/annotate
- Publish
- Create an instance

Student Exercises
- Change state
- Minor versioning
- Major versioning
- Read permissions
8. Click Save As.
9. Enter a Document title for your query (Example: Marketing search) and then click OK.
10. Refresh the saved search:
a. Click the Saved Searches tab.
b. Click Refresh.
c. Reopen your saved search.
Information
The Search page does not auto-refresh, so when you save a new search, you must manually
refresh the Searches page.
11. Click Run.

12. Click OK to close the Results notification.
13. Review the Search Results tab. Several documents are returned.
Procedure 4: Verify security change

You ran a search that includes a bulk action. The action occurred as the search ran. Inspect one of
the documents to ensure that the Marketing group was added to the document. The search results
tab is open, displaying the results of the search.
1. Click the title of one of the documents in the Search Results table.
2. On the document properties page, click the Security tab.
3. Click Refresh.
4. Verify that Marketing is now displayed in the Access Control List.
5. Select the Marketing row.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty 6. Click Edit.

7. Verify that the permissions match the permissions that you specified for this group in the
bulk action.
8. Click Cancel.
9. Click Close.
Procedure 5: Use a batch operation to modify security

The bulk action modified all of the documents that the search returned. Some documents remain,
however, that the search did not return. You can use batch operations on these remaining
documents to provide the Marketing group permissions. You are logged on to Administration
Console for Content Platform Engine as P8admin.
1. In the Sales object store, go to Browse > Root Folder > Marketing.
2. Confirm that the folder contains several documents:
- Documents that begin with Marketing were updated by the bulk action.
- Remaining documents that begin with Testfile were not updated by the bulk action.
3. Select all of the documents in the Marketing folder that do not begin with Marketing.

Student Exercises
4. Select Actions > Batch Operations.

6. Add the Marketing group by using the Add button.
7. Add the following permissions:
- View all properties
- View content
- Publish
- Change state
- Minor versioning
- Major versioning
- Read permissions
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty
Important
Ensure that the group is selected when you edit permissions.
8. Scroll to the bottom to click OK.
Procedure 6: Verify the security change

You used a batch operation to give the Marketing group access to the remaining documents in the
Sales > Marketing folder. You are now going to verify the change. You are logged on to
Administration Console for Content Platform Engine as p8admin. The Sales > Marketing folder is
open.
1. Click Testfile5.doc.
3. Verify that the Marketing group has access to the document.
4. Select the Marketing row and then click Edit.

Student Exercises
5. Verify that the Marketing group has the correct permissions.
6. Click Cancel.
7. Click Close.
Procedure 7: Use FileNet Enterprise Manager (optional)

You can also use the Query Builder in FileNet Enterprise Manager to perform bulk actions. This
procedure is optional. You can use this procedure if Administration Console for Content Platform
Engine is not working.
1. Start FileNet Enterprise Manager and connect to the P8 domain.
2. Expand the Sales object store.
3. Right-click Search Results and then select New Search.
4. Enter the following data:
- Select From Table: Document
- Column: Document Title
- Condition: Starts With
- Value: Marketing.
6. Add the Marketing group:
a. Click Add.
b. Type Marketing in the search field.
c. Click Find.
d. Select Marketing.
e. Click OK.
7. Add Permissions:
a. Select the following permissions:
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty - View all properties

- View content
- Publish
- Change state
- Minor versioning
- Major versioning
- Read permissions
8. Click OK to run the search.
9. Click OK to close the Query Status window.
Procedure 8: Review the search results

You can review the results of your search and bulk action by using FileNet Enterprise Manager.
1. Right-click a document from the Search Results pane.
4. Select the Marketing group row.

Student Exercises
5. Verify that the Rights correspond to the Permissions that you added.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Practice Using Bulk Actions: Exercise
Introduction
Practice the procedures that you learned by completing this exercise.
Scenario
Mark, a member of the Marketing group, has left the company. He has left
some documents checked out. You must cancel the checkout so that other
users can edit these documents.
Challenge
As the user, Mark, check out some documents from the Sales object
store.
Use a search with a bulk action that cancels checkout on all of the
documents that Mark has checked out.
Data
The password for Mark: filenet.
Hints
Mark can check out only documents to which the Marketing group has
major and minor versioning permissions.
Use the Last Modifier property in your search.
Use the Version Status = 3 as a criterion to confine the search to
documents that are checked out.
Refresh the view if you do not see the changes.
Verification
Verify that all of the documents that are checked out by Mark are no longer
checked out.
Summary
Used a search with a bulk action to modify security on multiple objects.
Used a batch operation from within a folder to modify security on multiple objects.
Used a bulk action to cancel document checkouts.

Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Lesson 9.2. Work With Audit Logs
Overview

As a Content Engine administrator, you must determine when event actions
are successful and when they fail. You need to know how to configure
auditing to log these event actions, search for the audit events, and manage
the audit log size.
Activities
Before you begin: Exercise Setup, on page 9-19
Create an Audit Definition: Procedure, on page 9-21
Prune Audit Entries: Procedure, on page 9-27
Practice Audit Configuration: Exercise, on page 9-29
User accounts

Administrator
Clerk Clark filenet
Note

Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Before you begin: Exercise Setup

Audit logs can be used to track which user altered an object, which can be a
powerful tool in determining responsibility for changes. To demonstrate this
capability, you are going to use a user account to change a property value.
Before you begin this lesson exercise, you must change the security on
existing Order documents on the Sales object store to allow clerks to edit
Order properties.
Procedure 1: Change security on Order documents

Using the skills that you learned in Lesson 9.1, "Perform Searches and Bulk
Actions," on page 9-3, you are going to create a search with a bulk action
that changes security on all documents of the Order class to allow Clerks to
modify property values.
Important
In a production environment, do not run a search without specifying criteria. A search without
criteria can affect performance. On your student system, there are only a few Order documents, so
the search does not have a negative performance impact.

2. On the Sales object store, create a search:
- Class: Order
- Bulk Action: Update Security
- Group to add: Clerks
- Permissions: Allow Modify All Properties
3. Run the search.
4. Save the search template as Order Security.
5. Select any Order document in the Sales > Orders folder.

Student Exercises
6. Verify that Clerks have permission to modify all properties:.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Create an Audit Definition: Procedure
Introduction
In this exercise, you add an audit definition to a custom document class. You
update a document and then observe the audit history.
Scenario
Order information is contained in the Order document class properties. You
want to ensure that when someone updates a property value of an Order
document, that the change is recorded in the audit log.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Enable auditing on the Sales object store," on page 9-21
Procedure 2, "Create an audit definition," on page 9-21
Procedure 3, "Make document updates," on page 9-23
Procedure 4, "View the audit history," on page 9-23
Procedure 5, "Create more audit entries," on page 9-24
Procedure 6, "Query the audit log," on page 9-25
Procedure 1: Enable auditing on the Sales object store

You can enable and disable auditing at the object store level. Auditing is disabled by default.
4. On General tab of the Sales object store properties page, select Yes from the Enable
Auditing menu.
5. Click Save to save changes to the object store.
Procedure 2: Create an audit definition

In this procedure, you create an audit definition on the Order custom document class. The Order
class has two subclasses, so you must apply the audit definition to subclasses. You are signed into
1. From the Sales object store, go to Data Design > Classes > Document > Order.

Student Exercises
2. Open the Audit Definitions tab for the Order class.
Hint
If you do not see the Audit Definitions tab, use the arrows to scroll through the tabs.
3. Click New.
4. On the New Audit Definition page, enter the following information:
- Display Name: Update.
- Event: Update Event
- Object State Recording Level: Modified object only.
- Audit type: Success
- Apply to Subclasses: checked
- Is Enabled: checked
5. Click OK to create the Audit Definition.

6. Click Save to save the changes to the Order class definition.
7. Log off of Administration Console for Content Platform Engine.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Procedure 3: Make document updates

To view audit entries, you must update a document that is a member of the audited class.
1. Log on to IBM Content Navigator as Clark.
- User name: Clark
- Password: filenet
2. From the Sales object store, open the Orders folder.
3. Select a document (Example: Order Basic A).
5. Change a property value (Example: Amount_due).
6. Click Save.
Procedure 4: View the audit history

When auditing is enabled, you can view the audit history of an object to see which audited events
took place. The audit log entries can tell you when the change was made, as well as who made the
change.
3. Go to Sales > Browse> Root Folder > Orders.
4. Open the properties page for the document that you changed in the previous procedure.
5. Open the Audit History tab (you might need to scroll to the right to find it).
6. Verify that you can see at least one audit log entry that shows Clark as the creator.
7. Click the Update link to open the audit entry.

Student Exercises
8. Verify that you can see which properties were modified:
9. Close the Update tab.
Procedure 5: Create more audit entries

You are going to query the audit log. In this procedure, you create some additional audit log entries
so that the audit log has more entries. If you saved the query that you created in "Before you begin:
Exercise Setup" on page 9-19, you can modify this query and rerun it to generate more events. If
you did not save the query, recreate it before you proceed. You are logged in to Administration
Console for Content Platform Engine as p8admin.
1. Open the Order Security search template that you created on "Before you begin:
Exercise Setup" on page 9-19.
- Search > Saved Searches > Order Security.
2. On the Bulk Actions tab, add the Minor versioning permission for the Clerks group.
3. Save the search.
4. Refresh the Search page:
a. Close the Order Security tab.
b. Click the Search page.
c. Click Refresh.
d. Reopen the Order Security search.
5. Run the search.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty 6. Verify that the security change took place by opening the Properties page of one of the
returned Order documents. Ensure that Clerks have specific permissions for modifying
properties and making minor versions.
7. If you do not see both permissions, do the following tasks:

a. Click Refresh on the document information page.
b. Recheck the permissions for the Clerks group.
c. If that does not work, recheck and rerun the search.
8. Click Cancel to close the Edit Permissions page.
Procedure 6: Query the audit log

In this procedure, you use the Search page to find audit log entries. You are logged in to
1. From the Sales object store, open the Search page.
2. Create a search with the following criteria:
- Class: Object Change Event
- Column: Date Created
- Condition: Greater or Equal
- Value: Yesterdays date and any time.
3. In the Results area, select Audit Sequence in the Order By menu.
4. (Optional) Save the search.
5. Run the search.
6. Review the search results.
- Verify that you can see several returns.
- Verify that you can find the audit event that Clark created at the top of the returns list.
7. Click the ID of any of the audit entries to review the details.

Student Exercises
- The first entry was the event that was created when Clark changed a property value.
- The remaining entries were created when p8admin updated security by using a bulk
action.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Prune Audit Entries: Procedure
Introduction
Audit logs can grow quickly and use up storage space if they are not pruned.
You can prune the audit logs manually, by using a search template, or
automatically by using an audit disposition policy. In this exercise, you create
an audit disposition policy.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Create an audit disposition policy," on page 9-27
Procedure 2, "Configure the Audit Subsystem task," on page 9-28
Procedure 3, "Verify that the audit logs are deleted," on page 9-28
Procedure 4, "Configure an audit disposition schedule," on page 9-28
Procedure 1: Create an audit disposition policy

In this procedure, you create an audit disposition policy that deletes all audit entries from the
moment the task runs.
3. Open Object Stores > Sales > Administrative > Audit Disposition > Audit Disposition
Policies.
4. Click New.
5. Name the Audit Disposition Policy:
a. Type Audit Cleanup in the Name field.
b. Click Next.
6. Set the Audit Disposition Policy parameters:
a. Enter the following Disposition rule:
DateCreated < Now()
Information
To establish an audit disposition policy with a longer time limit, add a TimeSpan expression. For
example, DateCreated < Now () - TimeSpan(30, Days)

Student Exercises
b. Enable the audit disposition policy.

c. Click Next.
Procedure 2: Configure the Audit Subsystem task

The audit subsystem controls the pruning of the audit events from the audit log. You can specify a
schedule and configure parameters that control how the audit pruning process is run. The schedule
specifies one or more time periods that determine when the audit subsystem task starts and how
long it runs. You are logged on to Administration Console for Content Platform Engine as p8admin.
1. Open the Properties page for the P8Domain.
2. Open Audit subsystem tab.
3. Select Enable audit pruning.
4. Change the Wait Interval to 10 seconds.
5. Click Save.
Procedure 3: Verify that the audit logs are deleted

You enabled audit log pruning. You configured the audit disposition policy to delete audit logs that
are older than the time at which the task runs. After you enabled audit pruning at the domain level,
the audit logs were deleted. Now you are going to verify the deletion.
1. In Administration Console for Content Platform Engine, go to the Sales object store.
2. Create a search for Object Change events or Deletion events. Optionally, you can rerun
any of the audit event searches you saved from previous exercises.
3. Verify that the search returns zero results.
Procedure 4: Configure an audit disposition schedule

You are going to apply a schedule to the Audit Disposition Policy so that the audit disposition sweep
runs weekly.
1. In Administration Console for Content Platform Engine, open the P8domain node.
2. Open the Audit Subsystem node.
3. Scroll down to the Schedule area.
4. Click New.
5. Select a Day of the week, start time, and Duration.
6. Click OK.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Practice Audit Configuration: Exercise
Introduction
In this exercise, you practice by using auditing and audit disposition skills.
Scenario
The Loan department wants loan objects to be audited for Update and
Deletion events. Loan object audit entries must be deleted after 30 days.
Challenge
Enable auditing on the LoanProcess object store.
Create audit definitions for Update and Deletion events on the Loan
document class.
Create an audit disposition policy that deletes audit log entries older than
30 days.
Verification
Create, update, and delete a Loan document. Search the audit log and
review the audit entries. Verify that an event is created when you add the
document, update the document property, and delete the document.
Verify that you can save the audit disposition policy without receiving an error
message.
Summary
Created an audit definition.
Viewed the audit history of an object.
Queried the audit logs.
Created an audit disposition policy.
Created an audit disposition schedule.
Pruned audit log entries automatically.

Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Lesson 9.3. Work with System Logs
Overview

As the system administrator, you need to be familiar with the logs that the
IBM FileNet P8 Content Manager system uses. You must know how to
monitor their contents and sizes. You must know how to archive log files. You
must know how to enable extra logging in certain circumstances.
Activities
Configure Trace Logging: Procedure, on page 9-33
User accounts

Administrator
User Carol filenet
Note

Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Configure Trace Logging: Procedure
Introduction
In this exercise, you change trace logging options and then compare log
entries and file sizes.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Preparation: remove log files," on page 9-33
Procedure 2, "Examine new log files," on page 9-33
Procedure 3, "View trace configuration," on page 9-34
Procedure 4, "Configure trace logging on the domain," on page 9-34
Procedure 5, "Configure trace logging at the site," on page 9-35
Procedure 6, "Inspect the trace log files," on page 9-36
Procedure 7, "Create trace log entries," on page 9-36
Procedure 8, "Disable trace logging," on page 9-37
Procedure 1: Preparation: remove log files

Before you change the trace options, you are going to save the existing log files in order to compare
them with the log files that are generated after tracing.
1. Stop WebSphere Application Server:
a. Open the WebSphere Admin folder on your desktop.
b. Double-click Stop the Server.bat.
c. Wait for the operation to complete.
2. Use Windows Explorer to go to C:\Program
Files\IBM\WebSphere\AppServer\profiles\AppSrv01\FileNet\server1
3. Create a folder in this directory named Archived Logs.
4. Move all of the *.log files in the server1 folder to the Archived Logs folder.
5. Minimize this folder so that you can later access it easily.
6. Start WebSphere Application Server:
a. Double-click the Start the Server.bat file in the WebSphere Admin folder.
b. Wait for the operation to complete.
Procedure 2: Examine new log files

If no log files exist in the server1 folder when Content Platform Engine starts, new log files are
generated.
1. Restore the server1 folder.

Student Exercises
2. Examine the log files. For each log file, do the following actions:
- Note the size of each file.
- Open each file with Notepad and examine the entries.
3. Verify that no p8_server_trace.log exists. Trace logging is disabled.
4. Close all log files.
5. Minimize this folder so that you can later access it easily.
Procedure 3: View trace configuration

Trace logging options can be set on the domain or at the site level. If the settings are configured on
the site, they override the settings on the domain. On your student system, trace logging is
configured at the site level. You are going to verify these settings.
3. On the P8Domain object, open the Trace Subsystem tab.
4. Verify that trace logging is disabled.
5. Go to Global Configuration > Administration > Sites > Initial Site.
6. On the Initial Site object, select the Trace Subsystem tab.
7. Verify the current settings:
- Configuration source: Initial Site (this object).
- Enable trace logging: disabled
- Log file location: c:\temp\tracelogs
Procedure 4: Configure trace logging on the domain

Trace logging is configured at both the site level and the domain level. You are going to configure
trace logging at the domain level, and then configure the site to inherit these settings.
1. Select P8Domain (server hierarchy object).
2. Enable trace logging at the top of the Trace Subsystem page.
3. Select the Detail level trace options for the following subsystems:
- Code module trace flags
- Database trace flags
- EJB trace flags
- Error trace flags
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty - Security trace flags
Important
Log files at the Detail level grow quickly. In production, be specific about which subsystems to
enable. Also, remember to disable trace logging when you no longer need it.
4. Click Save to save the P8Domain configuration.

5. Click OK to accept the default log file location.
Procedure 5: Configure trace logging at the site

You enabled trace logging on the domain, but no trace logs exist because the settings are
overridden at the site level. You are going to configure the site to inherit the domain settings.
1. Go to Global Configuration > Administration > Sites > Initial Site.
2. On the Initial Site object, select the Trace Subsystem tab.
3. Select P8Domain (server hierarchy object) as the configuration source.
4. Click OK to close the Warning Message.
5. Click Save to save the site settings.

Student Exercises
Procedure 6: Inspect the trace log files

By default, trace logs are generated in the same location as the Content Platform Engine log files.
With trace options enabled, the log files are already being generated.
1. Using Firefox, open the CE Ping page.
2. Copy the log file location.
3. Use Windows Explorer to open the folder that contains the log files.
4. Verify that p8_server_trace.log exists.
Note
The size of the file is already large compared to the other log files.
5. Use Notepad to open the p8_server_trace.log file to inspect the contents.

6. Verify that the file contains DEBUG level entries.
7. Close p8_server_trace.log.
Procedure 7: Create trace log entries

You enabled security trace logging. You are going to log in to IBM Content Navigator as Carol and
then check the trace log file for this entry.
1. Use Firefox to log on to IBM Content Navigator as Carol.
- http://localhost:9080/navigator
- User name: Carol.
- Password: filenet
3. Use Windows Explorer to open the folder that contains the log files.
4. Use Notepad to open the p8_server_trace.log file.
5. Search for the word Carol.
6. Review the entry. Several log entries show Carols login event.
7. Close the p8_server_log file.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXempty Procedure 8: Disable trace logging

Disable trace logging unless you are using it to troubleshoot a particular problem. Trace logging
affects system performance and uses disk space.
3. On the P8Domain object, open the Trace Subsystem tab.
4. Clear the Enable trace logging option.
5. Save the changes to the P8Domain.
6. Log off from Administration Console for Content Platform Engine.
Summary
Enabled trace logging.
Configured trace logging options at the domain level and site level.
Inspected trace logs.
Disabled trace logging.

Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Appendix A. Create a DB2 database

EXNoSideHead
Introduction
This exercise gives you the opportunity to practice creating a DB2 database.
In this activity, you create a standard DB2 database, increase two HEAP
configuration parameters, and add several different types of temporary table
spaces.
User accounts
Application name User ID Password
DB2 Control Center p8admin IBMFileNetP8
Configuration Manager p8admin IBMFileNetP8
Important
In this activity, you create a simple database suitable for training purposes and for a single user
development system.
Your Database Administrator creates a database for your organization requirements.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Create a target database," on page A-1
Procedure 2, "Change database configuration parameters," on page A-5
Procedure 3, "Configure a MARK_TS table space," on page A-7
Procedure 4, "Configure user temporary table space," on page A-10
Procedure 5, "Configure a system temporary table space," on page A-11
Procedure 6, "Stop and start the database," on page A-13
Procedure 1: Create a target database

Copyright IBM Corp. 2013, 2015 Appendix A. Create a DB2 database A-1
Student Exercises
2. In the left pane, expand All Databases.

a. A list of databases is shown in the left pane.
3. Run the Create Database wizard.

a. Verify that in the left pane the All Databases node is selected.
b. From the menu bar, click Selected > Create Database > Standard.
A Create Database wizard window opens.

4. Complete the Specify a name for your new database page.
a. In the Database name field, type MARKDB as the database name.
b. Leave the default value C:\ for the Default path.
c. Enter MARKDB in the Alias field.
d. Enter Marketing Database in the Comment field.
e. Leave the default option Let DB2 manage my storage (automatic storage).
f. Select 32 K from the Default bufferpool and table space page size selection list.
Important
The 32 K Default bufferpool and table space page size selection is necessary because 32 KB is the
minimum page size that is required for Content Platform Engine databases.
g. Click Next.
A-2 System Implementation and Administration Copyright IBM Corp. 2013, 2015
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead
5. Complete the Specify where to store your data page.

a. Select the following check box if not already selected:
Use the database path as a storage path: C:\
b. Click Next.
6. Complete the Specify the locale for this database page.
a. Leave the following default values for the Database locale pane.
Country/Region: default
Territory: US
b. Select UTF-8 from the list for the Code set field.
Important
Verify that you select UTF-8 code set.

If any other option is selected, the object store creation fails when you use this database.
c. Leave the Collating Sequence default option System.

d. Click Next.
Student Exercises
7.Complete the wizard.

a.Click Finish in the Review the actions that will take place page when
you click Finish page.
b.The wizard closes, and a small Progress window is displayed for up to
several minutes until the database is created.
c.A DB2 Message window is shown that indicates that the command
completed successfully. Click Close.
d. Verify that the MARKDB database is listed in the DB2 Control Center under the All
Databases folder.
8. Add the OSDBUSER user.
a. In the left pane of the Control Center, expand MARKDB > User and Group Objects.
b. Select the MARKDB > User and Group Objects > DB Users node.
c. Click Selected > Refresh from the top menu.
Observe that ADMINISTRATOR and P8ADMIN are listed in the upper right pane.
Troubleshooting
If the P8ADMIN user is not listed, refresh it again. If the P8ADMIN user is not shown even after
refresh, you must restart the database as given in the procedure 6 in this activity.
d. In the lower right window, click the Add New User link.
The Add User window opens with the Database tab selected.
e. Select ODDBUSER from the User selection list.
f. In the Authorities pane, select the following two check boxes.
Connect to database
Create tables
g. Click OK and close the window.
V10.1
Student Exercises
9. Add or edit the P8ADMIN user.

EXNoSideHead
a. Select the MARKDB > User and Group Objects > DB Users node in the left pane.
b. Select P8ADMIN from the DB Users list in the upper right pane.
c. If P8ADMIN is not listed, add the user by repeating the steps 8d-8e.
d. Click Change User Privileges from the lower right pane.
e. In the Change User - P8ADMIN page > Authorities section, select the following three check
boxes.
Connect to database
Create tables
Security administrator authority
f. Click OK to close the window.
g. In the main Control Center window, Verify that three users are listed
Procedure 2: Change database configuration parameters

1. Increase the Application heap size parameter.
a. In the left pane of the Control Center, select the MARKDB node.
b. Click Selected > Configure Parameters from the top menu bar.
The Database Configuration window opens.
c. Scroll down to the Performance section and select the APPLHEAPSZ entry.
Information
The APPLHEAPSZ parameter defines the number of private 4 KB memory pages for use by the
database management system on behalf of a program (agent or subagent).
Student Exercises
d. Click on the Value column. Click the ellipse.
e. The Change Database Configuration Parameter window opens. Type 2560 in the
Application heap size field. You increase the value by 10 fold.
f. Leave the default check box selections:

Set automatically by DB2
Update when available (Dynamic)
g. Click OK.
Note
Configuration parameter changes take effect after the database is stopped and restarted. Complete
all the changes in the following steps and then restart the database.
2. Increase the SQL statement heap size parameter.

a. In the Database Configuration window, scroll down to the Performance section and select
the STMTHEAP entry.
b. Click on the Value column.
c. Click the ellipse to open the Change Database Configuration Parameter window.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead
Information
The STMTHEAP parameter defines the number of 4 KB memory pages for the workspace that is
used for the SQL compiler during compilation of an SQL statement.
d. Verify and enter 8192 in the Statement heap size field.
e. Leave the default check box selections and click OK.

- Set automatically by DB2
- Update when available (Dynamic)
f. Click OK.
3. Apply the configuration parameter changes.
a. In the Database Configuration window, click OK.
b. Verify that a DB2 Message window is displayed indicating that the configuration settings
were updated successfully.
c. Click Close.
Procedure 3: Configure a MARK_TS table space

Use the following instructions to drop the USERSPACE1 table space and add a new table space.
1. View the list of database table spaces.
a. In the Control Center, expand the MARKDB database.
b. Select Table Spaces.
Student Exercises
Several table spaces are listed in the upper right pane.
2. Drop USERSPACE1.
a. Select USERSPACE1 and then click Selected > Drop from the menu bar.
b. A Confirmation window is opened. Click OK.
3. Create a table space.

a. In the lower right pane, click the Create New Tablespace link that is under the Table Spaces
folder icon.
The Create table Space wizard window opens.

4. Specify a name for you new table space page.
a. Type MARK_TS in the Table space name field.
b. Leave the default option of Let DB2 manage my storage (automatic storage).
c. Click Next.
V10.1
Student Exercises
5. Specify the type of table space you want to create.

EXNoSideHead
a. Note the four options on this page.
Regular
Large
System temporary
User temporary
b. Select the Large option and click Next.
6. Specify a buffer pool for your new table space.
a. Leave the default Buffer Pool named IBMDEFAULTBP.
b. Click Next.
7. Specify the extent and prefetch sizes for this table space.
a. Leave the default Determining recommended settings panel option:
Between 200 MB and 2 GB.
b. Leave the Recommended settings panel options:
Extent size of 16 32 KB pages.
Prefetch size of 16 32 KB pages.
c. Click Next.
8. Describe hard drive specifications.
a. In the Determining your specifications and calculated settings panel, select the Server
(SCSI) option:
b. Click Next.
9. Review the actions that will take place when you click Finish.
a. Verify that the entries match what your previous selections specified.
Student Exercises
b. Click Finish. A DB2 Message window opens.
10. Verify that the command completed successfully and click Close.
The new MARK_TS table space is listed in the upper right pane.
Procedure 4: Configure user temporary table space

1. Create a temporary table space.
a. In the lower right pane, under the Table Spaces folder icon click the Create New Tablespace
link.
2. Complete the Specify a name for you new table space page.
a. Type USERTEMP1 in the Table space name field.
c. Click Next.
a. Select the User temporary option.
b. Click Next.
Default Table space page size value: 32 KB.
b. Click Next.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead
a. Leave the default Determining recommended settings option of Between 200 MB and 2 GB.
c. Click Next.
(SCSI) option.
b. Click Next.

The new USERTEMP1 table space is listed in the upper right pane.
Procedure 5: Configure a system temporary table space

1. Create a system temporary table space.
a. In the lower right pane, under the Table Spaces folder icon click the Create New Tablespace
link.
2. Specify a name for you new table space.
a. Enter TEMPSYS1 in the Table space name field.
Student Exercises
c. Click Next.
a. Select the System temporary option.
b. Click Next.
b. Leave the default Table space page size value of 32 KB.
c. Click Next.
a. Leave the default Determining recommended settings option of Between 200 MB and 2 GB.
c. Click Next.
(SCSI) option.
b. Click Next.

V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead The new TEMPSYS1 table space is listed in the upper right pane.
Procedure 6: Stop and start the database

1. Stop the database.
a. In the left pane of the Control Center, select MARKDB.
b. Click Selected > Stop from the menu bar. The Confirm Stop window opens.
c. Click OK. After a few moments a DB2 Message window opens.

d. Verify that the stop command completed successfully and click Close.
2. Start the database server.
a. In the left pane of the Control Center, verify that MARKDB is selected.
b. Click Selected > Start from the menu bar. After a few moments a DB2 Message window
opens.
c. Verify that the start command completed successfully and click Close.
3. Close the DB2 Control Center.
From the menu bar, click Control Center > Exit.
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Appendix B. Optional Content

EXNoSideHead
Introduction
These lessons are optional lessons that you can study if you have time.
Lessons
Appendix B.4, "Create a Custom Root Class," on page B-3
Appendix B.5, "Configure a Change Preprocessor," on page B-27
Appendix B.6, "Configure an External Data Service," on page B-49
Appendix B.7, "Work with Content Caches," on page B-65
Appendix B.8, "Use System Dashboard," on page B-89
Copyright IBM Corp. 2013, 2015 Appendix B. Optional Content B-1

Student Exercises
B-2 System Implementation and Administration Copyright IBM Corp. 2013, 2015
V10.1
Student Exercises
Lesson
EXNoSideHead B.4. Create a Custom Root Class

Student Exercises
Lesson
Create a Custom Root Class

As a Solution Builder, you need object classes to store customer
accounts, customer policies, and policy data. You plan to store this
data as property values of the objects since you do not need
content storage. The volume of customer information is expected to
be high which can reduce retrieval performance.
Each custom root class uses its own data table and helps optimize
the retrieval performance. You must create custom root classes for
storing customer, account, and policy data.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2013
Figure B-1. Create a Custom Root Class F1156.0
Notes:
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead
Activities that you need to complete
Create Custom Root Classes.
Figure B-2. Activities that you need to complete F1156.0
Notes:
These are the activities that you are going to perform in this lesson.

Student Exercises
What are Custom Root Classes?

Custom root classes
Are a specialized set of classes.
Can be customized by subclassing and adding properties.
Can be renamed and deleted.
Each subclass exists in a separate database table.
Custom root classes are different from regular classes:
Not containable.
Do not carry content.
Not versionable.
Do not support lifecycle function.
You can create a custom root subclass.
From one of the abstract class definitions that are supplied by the
FileNet P8 system.
Figure B-3. What are Custom Root Classes? F1156.0
Notes:
Help paths
IBM FileNet P8 Version 5.2 Information Center > Administering FileNet P8 > Administering
Content Platform Engine > Adding documents and objects > Classifying documents > Classes >
Class overview > Custom root classes
IBM FileNet P8 Version 5.2 Information Center > Developing IBM FileNet P8 applications >
Content Engine Development > Content Engine Java and .NET Developer's Guide > Custom
Root Classes > Custom Root Classes Concepts
The following limitations exist with custom root classes:
Cannot query across custom root classes. You can only search specific classses (that are in
one data table).
Cannot change the class of a custom root object to another class that does not fall under the
same custom root class. Because it requires spanning different tables.
Custom root instances cannot be contained in Folders. If you need containment, use
CustomObject.
V10.1
Student Exercises
No support for content bearing instances. If you need to store content, use Document (or
EXNoSideHead
Annotation)
Properties of custom root instances are not full-text indexable.

Student Exercises
What are Abstract Class Definitions?

Abstract class definitions
Are special system classes.
Can be used to create custom root subclasses.
Cannot be queried.
Cannot create instances.
You create custom root classes from the following abstract class
definitions:
CmAbstractPersistable
Replication and subscribable
CmAbstractQueueEntry
Compatibility with queue sweep tasks.
CmAbstractSequential
Support for objects to be processed in chronological order.
Allows custom applications that require custom queue processing.
Figure B-4. What are Abstract Class Definitions? F1156.0
Notes:
Help path
Content Platform Engine > Adding documents and objects > Classifying documents > Classes >
Class overview > Custom root classes
CmAbstractPersistable
It provides replication and subscribable functionality (event targets, change preprocessing and
auditing)
Examples:
Social Collaboration: Tags, Comments, Recommendations, Download Counts
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead
Abstract Custom Root Classes Hierarchy

Independently Persistable Object
Abstract Abstract
Queue
Sequential Queue Entry
Item
Subscribable
Storage
Area
Replicable
Link Abstract
Persistable
Containable
AP1 AP2
Custom
AP1a AP1b AP2a
Object
Figure B-5. Abstract Custom Root Classes Hierarchy F1156.0
Notes:
The diagram shows where the abstract custom root classes participate.
The three purple dotted lined rectangles represents abstract custom root classes. You can not
instantiate these abstract classes. But you can create subclasses of these abstract classes which
will result in custom root class which you can instantiate.
The AbstractSequential and AbstractQueueEntry classes are independently persistable. The
AbstractPersistable class is both subscribable and replicable. This is the most commonly used
abstract custom root class.
In this scenario, each of the custom root classes (AP1 and AP2) have their own database table. All
the subclasses of AP1 (AP1a and AP1b) will be stored in the same table as AP1.

Student Exercises
Abstract Sequential Class

Abstract Sequential Class provides Support for the objects that
must be processed in chronological order.
Ordered rows
by
implementing
a column
sequence for
every insert.
Figure B-6. Abstract Sequential Class F1156.0
Notes:
The screen capture shows the SEQNUM_IDENTITY field in a database table in DB2 Control
Center.
The second screen capture shows the Sequence Number property for an object of a custom root
class (Abstract Sequential class) in the Administration Console for Content Platform Engine.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead
Benefits of Custom Root Classes

Each custom root subclass exists in a separate table in the
object store database.
This arrangement offers high performance and scalability.
Faster retrieval rates
You can apply the index specific for the set of classes that are more
closely related.
It results in faster retrieval rates because the indexed columns are
less likely to contain null values since the columns are more tightly
coupled at a logical level.
You can manage data storage easily.
Less risk of reaching row-length limits (Example: table overflow).
Fewer null columns.
Content Platform Engine auto-creates and auto-deletes tables
(and related objects) to manage the custom root classes.
Figure B-7. Benefits of Custom Root Classes F1156.0
Notes:
Creation of custom root class establishes that all instances of a class and its subclasses be stored
in a table used solely for that class hierarchy's persistence. For example, all your customer data
could be stored in one table and all the order data in a separate table and so on.
With the Generic table, the stored classes can become unrelated, but not so much with
well-designed custom root classes.

Student Exercises
How to create Custom Root Classes?

The procedure for creating a new custom root class is
identical to creating any subclass.
The Content Platform Engine creates separate database tables.
Figure B-8. How to create Custom Root Classes? F1156.0
Notes:
The screen capture shows how to create a custom root class in the Administration Console for
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead
Activities
In your Student Exercises
Unit: Build an Object Store
Lesson: Create a Custom Root Class
Activities:
Create Custom Root Classes.
Figure B-9. Activities F1156.0
Notes:
Use your Student Exercises to perform the activities listed.

Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Exercise
EXNoSideHead B.4, "Create a Custom Root Class"
Introduction
In this activity, you create custom root classes and subclasses and examine
the database tables. You also create Abstract Sequential type custom root
class and observe the Sequence Number property.

As a Solution Builder, you need object classes to store customer accounts,
customer policies, and policy data. You plan to store this data as property
values of the objects since you do not need content storage. The volume of
customer information is expected to be high which can decrease retrieval
performance.
Unlike other classes, each custom root class uses its own data table and
helps optimize the retrieval performance. You must create custom root
classes for storing customer, account, and policy data.
Activities
Exercise B.4, "Create a Custom Root Class", on page B-15
User accounts
Engine
Note
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Create property templates," on page B-16
Procedure 2, "Create custom root classes," on page B-17
Procedure 3, "Verify the database table," on page B-18
Procedure 4, "Create an instance (object) of the class," on page B-19
Procedure 5, "Create a Customer class," on page B-21
Procedure 6, "Create a class of Abstract Sequential," on page B-21
Procedure 7, "Delete the class and verify the database table," on page B-24

Student Exercises
Procedure 1: Create property templates

In this procedure, you create property templates for custom root classes.
Property Templates.
a. In the New Property Template tab, enter customer_name for the Display name field.
b. Click outside of the Display name field. Verify that the Symbolic name and Descriptions
fields are automatically populated.
c. Optionally, edit the Description. Click Next.
a. Select String from the list for the data type field.
b. Click Next.
a. Select <None> from the list for both the fields.
b. Click Next.
a. Select the Single option for the Single or Multi-Value.
b. Click Next.
b. Scroll down and verify that the customer_name item is listed.
V10.1
Student Exercises
9. Create two more property templates. Use the data provided in the tables. Use default values for
EXNoSideHead
other fields.
Field Value
Name loan_amount
Symbolic Name loan_amount
Description loan_amount
Data type Float
Field Value
Name home_type
Symbolic Name home_type
Description home_type
Data type Integer
Select a Choice List none, Leave default (blank)
10. Verify that the new property templates are listed.
Procedure 2: Create custom root classes

1. Open the New Abstract Persistable Class wizard.
a. If needed, in the administration console > P8Domain tab, expand the P8Domain > Object
Stores node on the left pane and click Marketing.
b. In the Marketing tab, expand the Marketing > Data Design > Classes > Other Classes node
on the left pane.
c. Right-click Abstract Persistable and select New Class from the list.
d. The New Abstract Persistable Class tab opens.
a. Enter Loan for the Display name field.
b. Click outside of the Display name field. Verify that the Symbolic name and Descriptions
fields are automatically populated.
c. Optionally edit the Description.
d. Click Next.

Student Exercises
4. Verify that the new custom root lass is listed.

b. If needed, expand the Marketing > Data Design > Classes > Other Classes > Abstract
Persistable node.
c. Verify that the Loan class is listed.
a. Click Loan in the left pane. The Loan tab opens in the right pane.
b. Select the Property Definitions subtab.
c. Click Add.
d. In the Add Properties page, select the following properties:
customer_name
loan_amount
e. Click OK.
f. Verify that the properties are listed.
g. Click Save and then Close.
6. Leave the administration console opened for other procedures.
Procedure 3: Verify the database table

In this procedure, you examine database tables that are created when you create custom root
classes.
2. Open the MARKDB database tables.
a. In the left pane, expand All Databases > MARKDB and click Tables.
b. Right-click the MARKDB > Tables and click Refresh.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead c. In the right pane, scroll down and verify that a table called UT_Loan is created.
d. Leave the DB2 Control Center opened for other procedures.

3. Create a subclass for the Loan class in the administration console. Use the data in the table.
Field Value
Name
Symbolic Name HomeLoan
Description
Add Properties home_type
4. Verify the database tables in the DB2 Control Center.
a. Refresh the table view.
b. Right-click the MARKDB > Tables and click Refresh.
c. Verify that no table (called UT_HomeLoan) is created because HomeLoan is a subclass of
Loan class and not the custom root class.
d. Leave the DB2 Control Center opened for other procedures.
Procedure 4: Create an instance (object) of the class

1. Create an instance (object) of HomeLoan in the administration console.
a. If needed, in the Marketing tab, expand the Marketing > Data Design > Classes > Other
Classes > Abstract Persistable > Loan node on the left pane.
b. Right-click HomeLoan and select Create Instance from the list.
c. The New HomeLoan tab opens.

d. Enter John Smith for the customer_name field and 100000 for the Loan_amount field.

Student Exercises
e. Click Next.
f. In the Summary page, click Finish.

g. In the Success page, click Close.
2. View the object.
Since the custom root class objects are not filed in the folders, you must do a search to view the
object.
a. In the Marketing tab, click Marketing > Search on the left pane.
b. In the Saved Searches tab, click New.

c. Click Run.
d. Click OK to close the Message about running a query without a WHERE clause.
Note
Because there is only one document object for this class, you do a simple search. When there are
many documents, narrow the results by specifying Query criteria.
e. Verify that an object is listed.
V10.1
Student Exercises
3. Use the scroll bar at the bottom of the page to verify that the property values that you entered
EXNoSideHead
are shown.
4. Close the Search tab. Do not save the search.
Procedure 5: Create a Customer class

In this procedure, you create another custom root class of the Abstract Persistable class type and
use it in the next procedure.
1. Create a custom root class in the administration console. Use the data provided.
Field Value
Class Type Abstract Persistable
Name
Symbolic Name Customer
Description
Add Properties customer_name
2. Optional step: Verify the database tables are in the DB2 Control Center.
b. Verify that UT_Customer table is created because Customer is a custom root class.
Procedure 6: Create a class of Abstract Sequential

In this procedure, you create a custom root class of Abstract Sequential and examine the Sequence
Number property.
1. Create a property template in the administration console.
a. In the Marketing tab, expand the Marketing > Data Design node on the left pane and click
Property Templates.
b. In the Property Templates tab on the right pane, click New.

Student Exercises
c. Use the data provided in the table.

Field Value
Name customer_info
Symbolic Name customer_info
Description customer_info
Data type Object
d. In the Property Templates tab, click Refresh.
e. Scroll down and verify the property template that you created is listed.
2. Create the class in the administration console.
a. In the Marketing tab, expand the Marketing > Data Design > Classes > Other Classes node
on the left pane.
b. Right-click Abstract Sequential and select New Class from the list.
c. The New Abstract Sequential Class tab opens.
d. Complete the wizard with the data provided in the table.
Field Value
Name
Symbolic Name Order
Description
e. In the Marketing tab, click Refresh.
3. Verify the class that you created is listed.
a. In the Marketing tab, expand the Marketing > Data Design > Classes > Other Classes >
Abstract Sequential node on the left pane.
b. Click the Order class in the left pane. The Order tab opens in the right pane.
4. Add Property Definition to the class.
a. In the Order tab, select the Property Definitions subtab.
b. Click Add.
c. In the Add Properties page, scroll down and select the customer_info property.
d. Click OK. Verify the property that you selected is listed.
5. Configure the Property definition.
a. Click the customer_info property.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead b. In the Property Definition page > More tab > Required class field, select Customer.
c. For Target access required, select the first three options.
d. Click OK.
e. In the Order tab, click Save and then click Close.
6. Optional step: Verify the database tables the DB2 Control Center.
b. Verify that the UT_Order table is created because Order is a custom root class.
7. Create instances (objects) of Order in the administration console.

a. In the Marketing tab, expand the Marketing > Data Design > Classes > Other Classes >
Abstract Sequential node on the left pane.
b. Right-click Order and select Create Instance from the list.
c. The New Order tab opens.
d. Click Next and then click Finish.
e. In the Success page, click Close.
8. Repeat Step 7 to create three more instances of this class.
9. Verify the instances in the administration console.
a. Go to the Search page.
b. Click New.
c. Select Order from the Class menu.

Student Exercises
d. Select Sequence Number from the list for the Order by field. Select the Ascending option.
e. Click Run.
f. Verify that four objects are listed in the Search Results.
Information
The Sequence Number value is assigned by the system for the Abstract Sequential class in the
sequence of the objects created. In this case, the value can be used as the order number to keep
track of the orders.
g. Scroll the side bar and observe the values in the Sequence Number column.
h. Leave the search tab open for the next procedure.
Procedure 7: Delete the class and verify the database table

In this procedure, you delete one of the custom root classes that you created and verify that the
table corresponding to the class is also deleted.
1. Delete the instances (objects) of the Order class.
a. In the Search Results tab, select all the objects.
b. Click Actions and select Batch Operations.
c. In the Batch Operations window, select Delete objects and click OK.
d. Click OK on the message window to delete.
e. Verify that the Search Results tab, does not have any objects that are listed.
V10.1
Student Exercises
2. Delete the Order class.

EXNoSideHead
a. In the Marketing tab, if needed expand the Marketing > Data Design > Classes > Other
Classes > Abstract Sequential node on the left pane.
b. Right-click Order and select Delete from the list.
c. In the message window, click OK to delete.
d. Verify on the left tab, the class is no longer listed.
4. Verify that the database table is deleted the DB2 Control Center.
a. Refresh the table view. Verify that the UT_Order table is not listed.
b. From the menu bar, click Control Center > Exit to close DB2 Control Center.

Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Lesson
EXNoSideHead B.5. Configure a Change Preprocessor

Student Exercises
Lesson
Configure a Change Preprocessor

Your business requires a change to the default value for a
system property when an object is created in the object store.
A change preprocessor has the following capabilities: (1) Alter
properties that are settable only during object creation (2)
Synchronously modify a source object (3) Completes the
action in time to satisfy the dependency of other processes.
The programmer for your company provides you the
JavaScript that does the required actions on Content Platform
Engine objects. As a solution builder, you must create a
change preprocessor definition with a change preprocessor
action that uses this code.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2013, 2015
Figure B-10. Configure a Change Preprocessor F1156.0
Notes:
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead
Configure a Change Preprocessor.
Notes:

Student Exercises
Change Preprocessor
Change preprocessor is a user-implemented action.
It allows you to make source object modifications.
Examples of object modifications that change preprocessors
can make:
Alter properties that are settable only during object creation.
Modify a source object synchronously.
Complete actions in time to satisfy dependencies of other
applications.
Characteristics of a change preprocessor
Events (create, update, and delete) trigger the Change Preprocessor.
It runs synchronously during a transaction.
It is started unconditionally.
User must have permissions to save the preprocessor changes.
Figure B-12. Change Preprocessor F1156.0
Notes:
Help path
Content Platform Engine > Changing objects > Subscribing to events > Change preprocessors
In addition to synchronous and asynchronous event actions, you can create a user-implemented
action called a change preprocessor. By using this feature you can make source object
modifications that are difficult or impossible to achieve with synchronous or asynchronous event
actions.
Examples of object modifications that change preprocessors can make:
A change preprocessor must be used to alter properties that are settable only during object
creation. The reason for this requirement is that when committed to the database, this type of
property cannot be changed.
A change preprocessor can be used to synchronously modify a source object. The only other
method of modifying a source object is by using an asynchronous event action. However, for
high-volume operations, asynchronous event actions reduce throughput due to the increased
processor usage inherent in using them.
V10.1
Student Exercises
A change preprocessor can be used in cases when the action must complete in time to satisfy
EXNoSideHead
dependencies of other applications. With asynchronous actions, there is a brief time period
between object persistence in one transaction and action changes in a separate transaction.
Therefore, avoid an asynchronous event action if a dependent client cannot tolerate a time
period when required action changes have not been applied.
Characteristics of change preprocessors:
A change preprocessor is triggered by the following types of events: create, update, and delete.
A change preprocessor runs synchronously during a transaction before database updates
occur; so an exception rolls back the entire transaction. If auditing is enabled, the audit log entry
shows the changes that are made by change preprocessors.
Unless disabled, change preprocessors are invoked unconditionally.
Changes made by a preprocessor can be saved only if the user making the request has the
required permissions, and if property constraints are not violated.

Student Exercises
Components of a Change Preprocessor

Change preprocessor definition
It associates a change preprocessor action Change
to an object class. Preprocessor
A class can have one or more change Definition
preprocessor definitions that are
associated with it. Trigger Event
Change preprocessor action
on the
It references the JavaScript or code
module that is used for the action.
Target Object
A Java or JavaScript action handler
It does the action.
Change
preprocessor
Action
Figure B-13. Components of a Change Preprocessor F1156.0
Notes:
Help path
The diagram shows a Change Preprocessor with a trigger event on a target class that results in a
Change Preprocessor Action.
The trigger events are Content Platform Engine events Example: create, update, and delete.
A Java-implemented action handler can be placed in a code module. It can also coexist with
other action handler types, such as event action, lifecycle action, and document classifier.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead
Change Preprocessor Definitions

You can set one or more change preprocessor definitions per
class.
The definitions are applied recursively to subclasses in the class
hierarchy.
You can update or remove a definition only from the class where it
was originally defined.
Administrators do the following tasks for the change
preprocessor definitions:
Create a change preprocessor definition.
Enable or disable a change preprocessor definition.
Assign a different action to an existing definition.
Change the display name of an existing definition.
Remove a change preprocessor definition.
Figure B-14. Change Preprocessor Definitions F1156.0
Notes:
Help path
> Managing change preprocessor definitions
Characteristics of change preprocessor definitions
One or more change preprocessor definitions per class
If identical change preprocessor definitions are assigned to a class, the duplicate definitions are
silently ignored. However, if the definitions are not identical, but reference the same action, you
receive an error when you try to save the subsequent definitions.
Subclasses in the class hierarchy
The change preprocessor definitions are applied recursively to subclasses in the class hierarchy.
If multiple definitions within a class hierarchy reference the same action, only the definition closest
to the root of the class hierarchy is invoked. The other definitions that reference the same action,
but are further down in the class hierarchy, are silently ignored.

Student Exercises
Updating a change preprocessor

You can update or remove a change preprocessor definition only from the class where it was
originally defined. You cannot update or remove the definition from subclasses of that class.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead
Change Preprocessor Actions

A change preprocessor action contains the code that does the
change preprocessing.
The JavaScript code is stored in the change preprocessor action
ScriptText property.
The Java code is stored outside the action object, either as a code
module or as a class or JAR file.
Administrators do the following tasks for the change
preprocessor definitions:
Create, modify, or delete a change preprocessor action.
Create a code module.
View or modify change preprocessor action properties.
Enable or disable a change preprocessor action.
Export or import a change preprocessor action.
Figure B-15. Change Preprocessor Actions F1156.0
Notes:
Help path
> Managing change preprocessor actions > Change preprocessor actions
Characteristics of change preprocessor actions
They are independently persistable, so that they can be created separately from other objects
and then assigned to one or more change preprocessor definitions.
If the Java-based action is not included in a code module, the class or JAR file must be located
on the local Content Platform Engine application server. In addition, it must be included in the
application server class path.
A change preprocessor action can be enabled or disabled. If you disable an action, all classes
in the system with change preprocessor definitions that reference the disabled action are
affected. Therefore, if you want to disable change preprocessing for a class, disable the change
preprocessor definition. If you want to disable a particular action everywhere in the system,
disable the change preprocessor action.

Student Exercises

Steps to set up a Change Preprocessor
1. Set object store security so that you have access rights to
modify.
2. Create a subclass of Document and other objects as needed.
3. Create a change preprocessor action.
Java code or JavaScript
4. Create a change preprocessor definition and associate the
action that you created.
5. Test your configuration.
Figure B-16. Steps to set up a Change Preprocessor F1156.0
Notes:
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead
Action Handlers: Restrictions and Best Practices

Change Event Action Event
Preprocessor synchronous Action
synchronous asynchr
onous
Runs before source yes yes no
object is saved?
Can update source yes no yes
object?
Can update yes no no
SettableOnlyonCreate
(SOOC) properties?
Can subscribe to no yes yes
events?
Figure B-17. Action Handlers: Restrictions and Best Practices F1156.0
Notes:
Help path
Content Platform Engine Development > Content Platform Engine Java and .NET Developer's
Guide > Server Extensions > Action Handlers> Action Handlers: Restrictions and Best
Practices
The table compares some features of change preprocessors (which always execute synchronously)
with features of event action handlers (which you can configure to run either synchronously or
asynchronously). For a complete list, refer to the documentation.
When does action handler run?
Change Preprocessor (synchronous) - In transaction, before database updates have occurred.
Runs first.
Event Action (synchronous) In transaction, after database updates have occurred. Runs second.
Event Action (asynchronous) - After transaction has committed. Runs third in a separate
transaction.

Student Exercises
Activities
Unit: Extend Content Platform Engine Functions
Lesson: Configure a Change Preprocessor
Activities:
Configure a Change Preprocessor.
Notes:
V10.1
Student Exercises
Exercise
EXNoSideHead B.5, "Configure a Change Preprocessor"

Your business requires a change to the default value for a system property
when an object is created in the object store. A Change Preprocessor has
the following capabilities: (1) Alters properties that are settable only during
object creation (2) Synchronously modifies a source object (3) Completes the
action in time to satisfy the dependency of other processes.
The Programmer for your company provides you the JavaScript that does
the required actions on Content Engine objects. As a Solution Builder, you
must create a Change Preprocessor Definition with a Change Preprocessor
Action that uses this code.
Activities
Configure a Change Preprocessor: Activity, on page B-41
User accounts
Engine
Note

Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Configure
EXNoSideHead a Change Preprocessor: Activity
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Edit object store security," on page B-41
Procedure 2, "Create a Document subclass," on page B-42
Procedure 3, "Create a Change Preprocessor Action," on page B-43
Procedure 4, "Create a Change Preprocessor definition," on page B-45
Procedure 5, "Test your Change Preprocessor," on page B-46
Procedure 6, "Reset the object store security," on page B-48
Procedure 1: Edit object store security

a. In your Firefox browser, go to http://ecmedu01:9080/acce
2. Open the object store Properties page.
a. In the administration console, expand the P8Domain > Object Stores node on the left pane.
b. Click the Sales object store where you want to create the change preprocessor.
c. In the Sales tab, click the Security subtab.
3. Select the P8Admins security group.
a. Verify that the Permission Group column has Full control for P8Admins.
b. Click the check box for cn=P8Admins, o=sample
c. Click Edit.
4. Set object store security.
a. In the Edit Permissions window, Full control is selected in the Permission group list.
b. For the Apply to field, select This object and all children from the list.

Student Exercises
c. Select Modify certain system properties
d. Verify that Custom is selected in the Permission group list. Click OK.
5. In the Sales tab, click Save.
a. Click Refresh.
Important
Full Control access does not include the required access rights by default. You must set the object
store security so that you have access rights to modify the Creator system property.
The Modify certain system properties permission must be used cautiously.
Procedure 2: Create a Document subclass

2. Create a Document subclass.
and click the Sales object store.
b. In the Sales object store tab, expand the Sales > Data Design > Classes> Document node
on the left pane.
c. Right-click Document Class and click New Class.
d. Use the following values and complete the steps for Create a Class:
Name: ChangeProcess
Symbolic Name: ChangeProcess
Description: Document subclass for testing change preprocessors.
e. Click Next and verify the summary page.
f. Click Finish.
V10.1
Student Exercises
3. In the Success page, click Close to close the tab.

EXNoSideHead
a. In the Sales tab, verify that the new subclass is listed in the left pane under the Document
node.
b. If needed, click Refresh.
Procedure 3: Create a Change Preprocessor Action

1. Open the Change Preprocessor Action page.
a. In the Sales object store tab, expand the Sales > Events, Actions, Processes node and click
the Change Preprocessor Actions on the left pane.
2. Create a Change Preprocessor Action.
a. In the Change Preprocessor Actions tab on the right pane, click New.
b. In the New Change Preprocessor Action tab on the right pane, use the following values and
complete the steps:
- Display Name: CP Test Action
- Description: This action sets the value for the Creator property to CP Test when a new
document is added to the system.
c. Click Next.
3. Specify the Type of Change Preprocessor Action.
a. Verify that Enabled is selected for the Status field.

Student Exercises
b. Select the JavaScript option for the Type field.
c. Click Next.
4. Copy and paste JavaScript code.
a. Delete the existing text in the Script text field.
b. Copy the code from the C:\LabFiles\ExtendCPEFxn\ChangePreprocessor.txt file.
c. Paste the code. Avoid any leading space while pasting the text.
Note
JavaScript shown here is for your reference only. To avoid any typing errors, copy and paste the
code from the file.
// Set Creator property to "CP Test" when a new document is created.
importClass(Packages.com.filenet.api.action.Create);
function preprocessObjectChange (sourceObj) {
// Verify that the pending action is a create action.
var actions = sourceObj.getPendingActions();
for ( var i = 0; i < actions.length; i++ ){
if ( actions[i] instanceof Create ) {
// Set Creator property to "CP Test"
sourceObj.getProperties().putValue("Creator", "CP Test");
return true;
}
}
return false;
}
d. Click Next.
V10.1
Student Exercises
5. Verify the summary page and click Finish.

EXNoSideHead
b. In the Change Preprocessor Actions tab on the right pane, click Refresh.
c. Verify that the newly created action is listed.
d. Close the tab.
Procedure 4: Create a Change Preprocessor definition

1. Open the ChangeProcess class.
a. In the Sales object store tab, expand the Sales > Data Design > Classes> Document node
on the left pane.
b. Click ChangeProcess (the document subclass that you created earlier).
c. In the ChangeProcess tab on the right pane, click the right arrow to locate the Change
Preprocessor Definitions and click the subtab.
2. Optional: Select Show Inherited to show inherited change preprocessor definitions.

3. Click New.
4. In the New Change Preprocessor Definition page, enter the following values:
- Display Name: CP Test Definition
- Status: Enabled selected.
- Change preprocessor action: Select the CP Test Action from the list.
a. Click OK to close the page.
5. In the ChangeProcess tab, click Save to save the changes.
a. Click Refresh.

Student Exercises
b. Verify that the CP Test Definition is listed.

c. The Is Enabled column shows the value as True.
d. In the Action Display Name column, the CP Test action that is associated with this definition
is shown.
Information
In this same tab, you can add more change preprocessor definitions, update a definition, or remove
an existing definition.
Procedure 5: Test your Change Preprocessor

1. Open the folder.
a. In the Sales object store tab, expand the Sales > Browse > Root Folder > Test Folder node
on the left pane.
2. Create a document.
a. Right-click the Test Folder and click New Document.
b. Enter CP Test 1 as the Document title.
c. Select ChangeProcess from the list for the Class field.
d. Clear the With Content option.
e. Click Next and leave the default values for all other fields.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead f. In the summary page, click Finish.
g. Click Close to close the New Document tab.

h. In the Test Folder tab, click Refresh.
i. Verify that the new document (CP Test 1) is listed.
3. Verify the document property value.
a. Notice that the Created By property of the CP Test 1 has CP Test as the value.
a. You can also verify by clicking CP Test 1 to open the document properties.
b. In the CP Test 1 tab, click the Properties tab.
c. Scroll down and verify that the Creator property is set to CP Test.

Student Exercises
Note
You logged in to the administration console as P8Admin. The document Creator should be
P8Admin. But because of the Change Preprocessor and the JavaScript action that is defined, the
value is changed to CP Test.
Procedure 6: Reset the object store security

In this procedure, you reset the object store security to remove the Modify certain system
properties access right.
1. In the Sales tab, click the Security subtab.
2. Select the P8Admins security group.
a. Click the check box for cn=P8Admins,o=sample
b. Click Edit.
3. Reset object store security.
a. In the Edit Permissions window, Custom is selected in the Permission group list.
b. Clear the Modify certain system properties option.
c. Verify that Full control is selected in the Permission group list. Click OK.
4. In the Sales tab, click Save.
5. Log out of Administration Console for Content Platform Engine and close the browser.
V10.1
Student Exercises
Lesson
EXNoSideHead B.6. Configure an External Data Service

Student Exercises
Lesson
Configure an External Data Service

You can extend the default capability and change the behavior
of the IBM Content Navigator web client with the use of plug-
ins. For example, you can create a plug-in to add a menu
action or to validate data entry. IBM Content Navigator
includes several plug-ins that your Developer can customize
for your company as required.
As a Solution Builder, you register and configure a plug-in for
the IBM Content Navigator web client application.
Figure B-19. Configure an External Data Service F1156.0
Notes:
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead
Configure an External Data Service.
Notes:

Student Exercises
Content Navigator Plug-ins

You can extend the Content Navigator default capability with
the use of plug-ins.
You can create plug-ins for the following uses:
New Features and Layouts
New menus, menu items, toolbars
Viewers, Widgets, and Services
IBM Content Navigator includes several plug-ins that you can
register and configure.
Example: External data services plug-in (EDS)
Default location of the plug-in file:
Microsoft Windows: C:\Program Files (x86)
\IBM\ECMClient\plugins\edsPlugin.jar
Linux or AIX: /opt/IBM/ECMClient/plugins/edsPlugin.jar
Figure B-21. Content Navigator Plug-ins F1156.0
Notes:
Help paths
IBM FileNet P8 Version 5.2 Information Center > Installing additional IBM FileNet P8 products >
Planning, installing, and configuring IBM Content Navigator > Administering IBM Content
Navigator > Configuring the IBM Content Navigator web client > Registering and configuring
plug-ins
Developing applications with IBM Content Navigator > Creating plug-ins to IBM Content
Navigator
IBM Content Navigator includes the following plug-ins:
External data services plug-in
IBM Content Analytics with Enterprise Search plug-in
IBM Content Collector Viewer plug-in
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead
Set up the External Data Service Plug-in

Deploy the EDS plug-in to a Web Application Server.
Example: WebSphere Application Server
Register the plug-in in Content Navigator admin tool.
Load the plug-in file from the directory where it is located.
Specify the URL where the EDS plug-in is deployed.
Configure the repository in the Admin Console for Content
Platform Engine:
Create the Document classes, Property Templates, and other objects
that are required for the plug-in.
Restart the IBM Content Navigator application for the changes
to take effect.
Figure B-22. Set up the External Data Service Plug-in F1156.0
Notes:
Help path
plug-ins > Configuring the external data service plug-in

Student Exercises
Steps to register and configure a plug-in

1. Open the Plug-ins page in the admin tool.
2. Click New Plug-in or Edit for the existing plug-in.
3. Enter the location or the URL for the plug-in JAR file.
4. Click Load.
5. Configure plug-in parameters.
6. Save the settings.

Figure B-23. Steps to register and configure a plug-in F1156.0
Notes:
Help path
plug-ins > Configuring the external data service plug-in
The screen capture shows the plug-in configuration fields.
Enter the URL in the following sample format:
http://host_name:port_number/ECMClient_installdir/plugins/edsPlugin.jar.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead
Activities
Unit: Configure IBM Content Navigator
Lesson: Configure an External Data Service
Activities:
Configure an External Data Service.
Notes:
Help path

Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Exercise
EXNoSideHead B.6, "Configure an External Data Service"

You can extend the default function and change the behavior of the IBM
Content Navigator web client with the use of plug-ins. For example, you can
create a plug-in to add a menu action or to validate data entry. IBM Content
Navigator includes several plug-ins that your developer can customize for
your company as required.
As a solution builder, you register and configure a plug-in for the IBM Content
Navigator web client application.
Activities
Configure External Data Service: Activity, on page B-59
User accounts: Windows

Platform Engine
Note

Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Configure
EXNoSideHead External Data Service: Activity
In this activity, you register a plug-in in the Admin desktop of the IBM Content Navigator web client
application. A sample External Data Services (EDS) plug-in that is provided with IBM Content
Navigator is used for this example.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Configure the External Data Service," on page B-59
Procedure 2, "Test the Plug-in," on page B-61
Procedure 1: Configure the External Data Service

The plug-ins must be deployed on your system before configuring them in the admin tool.
1. Verify that the external data service application is deployed.
a. In your browser, go to http://ecmedu01:9080/SampleEDSService/types (The URL is
case-sensitive).
b. Verify that a JSON file is shown.
c. Note down the base URL of the EDS application.

2. Start the IBM Content Navigator admin desktop.
a. In your browser, go to http://ecmedu01:9080/navigator/?desktop=admin
b. Log in as the admin user.
User name: P8admin
3. Create a plug-in.
a. On the Admin desktop, click the Plug-ins icon in the left pane.
b. On the Plug-ins tab, click New Plug-in .
4. Configure the plug-in.
a. On the New Plug-in page, select the JAR file path option.
b. Enter the location for the JAR file:
C:\Program Files (x86)\IBM\ECMClient\plugins\edsPlugin.jar

Student Exercises
Hint
In Windows Explorer, browse to the location of the JAR file. Copy and paste the directory to
eliminate any typing errors.
c. Click Load.
d. If the File entry is valid, the page shows more information about the plug-in, as defined by
the developer of the plug-in.
Note
In this procedure, you are using the default Content Navigator install location for the JAR file. You
can save your custom plug-ins code in any directory that you choose. The programmer in your
company provides the code as a JAR file.
If the plug-in requires more information to complete the registration, it must be supplied as well. In
this case, the External Data Service URL must be entered.
e. Enter the value for the External Data Service URL (you got this value in step 1):
http://ecmedu01:9080/SampleEDSService
This URL value is case-sensitive.
5. Click Save and Close.
V10.1
Student Exercises
6. Verify that the new plug-in is listed in the Plug-ins tab.

EXNoSideHead
f. Log out of IBM Content Navigator and close the browser.

7. This external data services support feature is now available in the IBM Content Navigator web
client application.
Procedure 2: Test the Plug-in

A custom document class is created in your system for EDS test. EDS validates data entries and
also it populates values for the metadata fields for this document class.
1. Start the IBM Content Navigator My Desktop.
a. In your web browser, go to http://ecmedu01:9080/navigator/?desktop=MyDesktop
The URL is case-sensitive.
2. The Browse view is opened.
a. If it is already not selected, select the Sales repository.
b. Create a folder with the following name: EDSTest.
3. Test the populated values by adding a document.
a. Open the EDSTest folder.
b. Click Add Document.
c. For the What do you want to save field, select Information about a document from the list.
d. In the Properties section > Class field, select the Book class from the list and click OK.
e. Notice that the Author property has a list of values already populated.

Student Exercises
f. Select a value for the Author, notice that the values in the list for the Document Title field are
dynamically changed to match the Author value.
g. Repeat the step 3e with a different author and notice that values are changed.
h. Optionally, complete adding a document.
4. Test Data Validation feature.
The Folder Name field uses a validation feature from the EDS plug-in.
a. Select the EDSTest folder.
b. Click New Folder.
c. In the Properties section, make sure that Folder is selected for the Class field.
d. Enter any value that contains number 3 for the Folder Name field. (Example: Department3)
e. Click Add.
f. Notice that you get an error message:
g. If you remove the number 3, you are able to add the folder.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead h. Log out of IBM Content Navigator and close the browser.
Troubleshooting
If the testing of the Plug-in function does not work as expected, you must restart the Content
Navigator web application in WebSphere Application Server Administrative Console.
1. In a Firefox browser, click the WAS Admin link in the Bookmarks toolbar or go to the following
URL: https://ecmedu01:9043/ibm/console/logon.jsp
a. Enter the account information and click Login.
User ID: p8admin
2. Open the Enterprise Applications page.
a. In the left pane, expand Applications > Applications Types.
b. Click the WebSphere enterprise applications link.
3. Restart the Content Navigator application.

a. On the right pane, select navigator in the Enterprise Applications page.
b. Click Stop and wait for the stop message to display.
c. Select navigator again and click Start. Wait for the Start message to display.
d. Logout of the administration console and close the browser.

Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Lesson
EXNoSideHead B.7. Work with Content Caches

Student Exercises
Lesson
Work with Content Caches
A department in your company frequently accesses document
content that exists on geographically remote storage areas that
are accessed through a wide area network (WAN). As the IBM
FileNet P8 Administrator, you must create a content cache to
expedite access to this remote document content.
Figure B-25. Work with Content Caches F1156.0
Notes:
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead

Create, configure, and assign a content cache area.
Notes:

Student Exercises

Review: content cache area
Content cache
A storage area in a file system that is used to temporarily hold files
and database content for faster retrieval
By providing local storage of frequently accessed documents without
having to repeatedly request them over the network
For local sites
Content cache areas can also be useful to local sites.
The cache can be on a faster disk than the file storage area.
Confidential documents
Documents can remain in the cache after they are deleted from the
system.
Figure B-27. Review: content cache area F1156.0
Notes:
Help path
Content Platform Engine > Defining the repository infrastructure > Storing content > Optimizing
storage area performance > Caching content > Content cache areas
A distributed FileNet P8 system has many clients reading content from either a remote file server
(for example, over a WAN) or database (possibly on a remote server). To reduce network traffic,
content can be cached in the file system on a local server.
Save files to cache when they are added. A cache can be configured to hold files at the time they
are added to object stores. This feature is useful if the same documents are likely to be retrieved
soon after adding. Do not enable this feature if a content cache area is intended for a site that is
heavily used to create new documents if those documents are not subsequently retrieved.
Confidential documents. If you have sensitive or confidential documents, you need to consider
whether caching is appropriate. Files are not automatically deleted from the content cache area
when the document is deleted from the storage area.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead
Content Cache at a Remote Location
Object store
Remote
object store
Database
storage area Wide area network
Content cache at Remote
(WAN) object store
remote location
Content cache is a secondary option

Fixed storage after content has been stored in
area the object store database, file store,
or fixed storage area.
File storage area
Figure B-28. Content Cache at a Remote Location F1156.0
Notes:
The diagram shows the relationship between a content cache, an object store, file storage area,
and a remote object store.
All object store content is stored in file storage areas, fixed storage areas, or database storage
areas, all of which can be the objects of storage policies.
Database storage areas provide permanent storage for document content. A database storage
area is managed by the Content Platform Engine and converts document content into binary large
objects (BLOBs) for storage in the database specified as the object store database.
A file storage area contains document content in a hierarchy of folders on a local or shared
network drive accessible by the Content Platform Engine server. The content is stored in a folder on
a shared network drive.
A fixed storage area is a file storage area that has a connection to a third-party fixed-content
system providing additional storage capacity and security. This connection is provided by an object
called a fixed-content device.
Content cache areas provide local storage of frequently accessed documents, which are
accessible over a LAN.

Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead
Content cache overview
The content cache handles content only.
Both the API layer and Workplace XT have their own property
caching.
The cache works for both file and database content stores.
Content cache performance
Can be improved by adding content cache areas.
Supports write-through caching.
Is a function of the Content Platform Engine, not of the web server.
Any client can use a cache:
Content Navigator, Workplace XT, Custom Java application,
Enterprise Manager, Administrative Console for Content Platform
Engine.
Exists on
The Content Platform Engine server or on a network share.
Figure B-29. Content cache overview F1156.0
Notes:
The Content Platform Engine server initiates object caching thus a Content Platform Engine server
is required at each site that uses a cache. Upon retrieval, the Content Platform Engine checks
whether the objects in a cache are local to its server, to a virtual server, or to the site.
Multiple caches can store multiple copies of a content object but the local storage area holds one
copy of the object. Documents remain in a cache until cleared, even if the document is deleted from
the object store unless a cache lifespan is specified.
Disable caching at sites with confidential files - If cache is enabled, files can remain in cache and
accessible to users with physical access to the server, even after the files have been purged from
the original file storage area.

Student Exercises

Create a Content Cache
You can create a cache in one of the following areas:
Domain
Site definition
Virtual Server definition
Server definition
Content cache configuration is inherited from parent objects in
the hierarchy.
Unless you assign specific servers to the cache, all member servers
of a site or virtual server use the same configured cache.
You can override the default cache assignment at each definition level
Caching is enabled for cross-site only by default.
Figure B-30. Create a Content Cache F1156.0
Notes:
A cache can be assigned to one of the following owner objects within the server hierarchy (listed
from highest to lowest level): Domain, site, virtual server, or server instance. This assignment
determines the servers that use the cache: a server finds the lowest-level server hierarchy owner to
which both the server and a cache belong. For any content not found by the server in the cache, the
server copies the content from the storage area into the cache.
The level of caching permitted for a storage area is set independently of the cache area assignment
and is not affected by that assignment. For example, only cross-site caching might be permitted for
a storage area.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead
Content Caching Property

Content caching property
A storage area property that specifies whether the content data in the
storage area can be cached.
Property values:
Allowed: Content is cached whenever it is accessed.
Use case: To improve performance in single-site deployments.
Cross-site only (default): Content is cached only when accessed from
another site.
Use case: Typical multi-site traffic optimization.
Not allowed: Content caching is not allowed.
Use case: To prevent confidential documents from being cached.
Figure B-31. Content Caching Property F1156.0
Notes:

Student Exercises
Pruning
Definition of pruning
Automatic deletion of content files that have not been accessed
recently.
Purpose of pruning
To ensure that the cache is the minimum size necessary to store the
most recently accessed content.
Types of pruning
Periodic pruning
Triggered by the Content Lifespan property
Occurs automatically halfway through the period that the Content
Lifespan property specifies.
Mandatory pruning
Removes content files in a the order of the least recently accessed
to achieve a calculated target total.
Figure B-32. Pruning F1156.0
Notes:
Help path
Content Engine Development > Content Engine .NET API Reference > FileNet.Api.Admin
Namespace > IContentCacheArea Interface > IContentCacheArea Properties >
IContentCacheArea.PruneAmount Property
Mandatory pruning removes content files in the order of least recently accessed until the total of the
remaining files does not exceed some calculated target total. The target total calculation involves a
property that specifies the percentage to prune and the following threshold properties: Threshold
Size and Threshold Elements. The pruning occurs automatically when the number or size of the
content files exceeds one of these thresholds.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead
Content Lifespan
You can set the Content Lifespan
property by using FileNet Enterprise
Manager.
Content Cache Properties >
Processing tab.
Figure B-33. Content Lifespan F1156.0
Notes:
The graphic shows the Content Lifespan setting on the Processing tab of the Cache Properties
window in FileNet Enterprise Manager.

Student Exercises

Other Content Cache Attributes
Preload On Create
A cache duplicates content when new content is added.
Prune threshold size kbytes
The minimum size of all content elements in the cache area sufficient
to trigger a cache prune action
Prune Threshold Content Elements
The minimum number of content elements in the cache area sufficient
to trigger a cache prune action.
Maximum Size Kbytes
Maximum size (in kbytes) that allows content to be added to the
cache.
Maximum Content elements
Maximum size (in content elements) that allows content to be added
to the cache.
Figure B-34. Other Content Cache Attributes F1156.0
Notes:
Content preloading: When content preloading has been enabled (with the PreloadOnCreate
property), the cache receives duplicates of any new content added to the main storage area.
Cache content can sometimes slightly exceed the designated storage capacity, as statistics are
managed on a delayed basis, and multiple servers can be adding content.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead
Content Cache Performance Guidelines
Optimize pruning thresholds
Using the Threshold Size property
Using the Threshold Elements property
Preload accessed content only
Adjust Content Lifespan property
Shorter lifespan increases the refetching of content
Longer lifespan requires a larger cache area
Make the cache accessible to all servers in the domain
Accessible from every Content Platform Engine server in the FileNet
P8 domain.
Figure B-35. Content Cache Performance Guidelines F1156.0
Notes:
Optimize pruning threshold using the Threshold Size property. - Set the Threshold Size
property to optimize system performance. If the content cache server has a large hard disk, you can
afford to enlarge the maximum space for content caching. This enlargement minimizes network
traffic and reduces network access time by keeping the most recently accessed content in local
cache. If your caching server has limited space available, reduce the maximum space for content
caching. Avoid allocating more space than the server has available can so that system resources
are not stressed and system performance is not degraded.
Optimize pruning threshold using the Threshold Elements property. - Determine the number
of files frequently accessed by users. Increase that number by 5 to 10% to determine the maximum
number of files allowed in the cache. If your system maintains relatively small files, you can allow a
greater number of files in cache.
Preload accessed content only. - Do not enable the Preload On Create option when the
associated site is heavily used to create documents that are not retrieved later.
Adjust Content Lifespan property. - Review your system requirements before setting the Content
Lifespan interval. The shorter the lifespan is, the more often content is removed and refetched. The
longer the lifespan is, the more deleted content occupies the content cache area.

Student Exercises
Periodically review cache properties. - Analyze the content cache settings periodically and
modify the configuration properties as necessary. For example, you might experience a system
slowdown if users access more files than the configured threshold permits for the content cache
area. In this case, increase the maximum number of files allowed.
Make the cache accessible to servers. - Make a cache area accessible from every Content
Platform Engine server in the FileNet P8 domain. If only some servers have access to the area, the
information displayed by Enterprise Manager depends on the server to which Enterprise Manager
is connected. No information is displayed for a non-accessible storage area. A server that does not
have access to a cache generates the following error every 30 seconds:
CONTENT_CACHE_AREA_ACCESS_FAILED: Access to the content cache area directory
failed. This error is displayed in the system error logs.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead
Activities
Unit: System Maintenance
Lesson: Work with Content Caches
Activities:
Create, Configure, and Assign a Content Cache Area.
Notes:

Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Exercise
EXNoSideHead B.7, "Work with Content Caches"
Overview

A department in your company frequently accesses document content that
resides on geographically remote storage areas that are accessed through a
wide area network (WAN). As the IBM FileNet P8 administrator, you must
create a content cache to expedite access to this remote document content.
Activities
Create, Configure, and Assign a Content Cache Area: Procedure, on
page B-83
User Accounts

Administrator
Note

Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Create,
EXNoSideHead Configure, and Assign a Content Cache Area:
Procedure
Introduction
In this exercise, you create a content cache; then configure it and assign it to
a site.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Create a content cache," on page B-83
Procedure 2, "Inspect the content cache area object," on page B-84
Procedure 3, "Inspect content cache area file location," on page B-85
Procedure 4, "Assign the content cache area," on page B-85
Procedure 5, "Change content caching permission," on page B-86
Procedure 6, "View content cache statistics," on page B-87
Important
In a production environment, do not collocate the content cache with file stores or indexes.
Procedure 1: Create a content cache

1. Create a folder: C:\filenet\contentcache.
4. Go to Global Configuration > Administration > Content Cache Areas.
5. Click New.
6. Specify the Content Cache Area Name:
a. In the Name field, type Cache1.
b. Click Next.
7. Specify the Content Cache Area Management Parameters:
a. In the Root Directory field, type C:\filenet\contentcache
b. Enable the PreloadOnCreate option.

Student Exercises
Important
In production, do not enable the Preload On Create option when the associated site is heavily used
to create documents that are not retrieved later.
c. Click Next.
8. Specify the Content Cache Sizing Parameters:
a. Accept the defaults on this page.
b. Click Next.
10. Click Open to view the cache information.
Procedure 2: Inspect the content cache area object

Now that the cache exists, you can inspect the structure of the content cache area in the P8
Domain. You are logged in to Administration Console for Content Platform Engine as P8Admin. The
content cache information page is open.
1. Click the Properties tab to open the cache properties page.
2. Use the scroll bar to see the properties for this cache area.
3. Verify the following values:
- Display Name: Cache1
- Root directory: C:\filenet\contentcache
- Content Element Count: 0
- Content Element Kbytes: 0
- Content Elements Created: 0
- Content Elements Deleted: 0
Information
From here, you can change cache area property values that affect pruning, maximum size, and
other settings.
4. Minimize Administration Console for Content Platform Engine.

5. Close Firefox.
V10.1
Student Exercises
Procedure
EXNoSideHead 3: Inspect content cache area file location
When you create the content cache area, Content Platform Engine creates a folder structure in the
content cache area file location. You are going to verify that the folder structure was created.
1. Use Windows Explorer to go to C:\filenet\contentcache
2. Verify that the folder now contains several subfolders and files.
3. Open the content folder. Verify that the folder structure is similar to the structure of a file storage
area.
Procedure 4: Assign the content cache area

After content cache areas are created for a site, they can be associated with the servers in that site.
Content cache areas can be shared between servers, or each server can have its own content
cache area. You can assign the content cache area by using Administration Console for Content
Platform Engine. In this exercise, however, you are going to use FileNet Enterprise Manager.
1. Minimize all windows.
2. Start FileNet Enterprise Manager by using the desktop shortcut.
3. Connect to the ECMEDU01 domain.
4. Open the Properties panel for the P8Domain.
5. Open the Content Cache tab.

Student Exercises
6. Select Cache1.
7. Click Apply.
8. Click OK to close the Notice.
9. Click OK to close the P8Domain properties.
Procedure 5: Change content caching permission

By default, content caching is set to cross-site only. Documents are only cached when they are
requested from another site. Your student system has only one site, so with this setting, documents
are never cached. In order to view content caching in action, you must change this setting on the
storage area. You are signed into Administration Console for Content Platform Engine as p8admin.
1. Restore Administration Console for Content Platform Engine.
3. Go to Administrative > Storage Areas,
4. Select the Sales storage area.
V10.1
Student Exercises
6. Set the Content Caching field to Allowed.

EXNoSideHead
7. Click Save.
Procedure 6: View content cache statistics

1. Add a document to the Sales object store.
a. Use Firefox to log in to Workplace XT as p8admin.
http://ecmedu01:9080/WorkplaceXT
User name: p8admin
b. Open the Sales object store.
c. Create a folder named Cache Test.
d. Open the Cache Test folder.
e. Add some documents to the Cache Test folder:
With the Cache Test folder open, drag ten files from C:\LabFiles\SampleDocuments into
the Drag files here to add box.
f. If Firefox prevented the site from opening a pop-up window, click the Options button and
then select Allow pop-ups for ecmedu01.

Student Exercises
g. Complete the document add wizard.

h. Log out of Workplace XT.
2. Review the cache statistics:
a. Using Firefox, log in to Administration Console for Content Platform Engine as p8admin:
User name: p8admin
b. Go to Global Configuration > Administration > Sites > Initial Site > Content Cache Areas.
c. Click Cache1.
d. Click the Properties tab.
3. Verify the following property values:
- Content Element Count: 10
- Content Elements Created: 10
Summary
Created a content cache.
Assigned a content cache.
Viewed content cache statistics.
V10.1
Student Exercises
Lesson
EXNoSideHead B.8. Use System Dashboard

Student Exercises
Lesson
Use System Dashboard
The IBM System Dashboard tool is installed on a server within
your IBM FileNet P8 Content Manager system. You must know
how to use this tool to monitor the components of your system.
Figure B-37. Use System Dashboard F1156.0
Notes:
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead

Monitor the System State
Run Dashboard Reports
Reconnect a Listener
Notes:

Student Exercises

What is System Dashboard?
IBM System Dashboard for Enterprise Content Management
Also referred to as System Dashboard
A real-time, performance-monitoring tool that tracks the
following:
IBM FileNet P8 system data
Application-specific events
System environment data
Operating system data
Do not confuse System Dashboard with System Monitor.
Use System Dashboard to collect and distribute performance
data on FileNet products that are installed at a site.
System Dashboard comes with many IBM ECM products.
Monitors multiple components on an IBM FileNet system.
Figure B-39. What is System Dashboard? F1156.0
Notes:
Help paths
IBM FileNet P8 Version 5.2 Information Center > System overview > FileNet P8 architecture >
Administrative components
IBM FileNet P8 Version 5.2 Information Center > Administering FileNet P8 > Monitoring IBM
FileNet P8 > Using the IBM System Dashboard for Enterprise Content Management
IBM System Dashboard for Enterprise Content Management is sometimes referred to as System
Dashboard. IBM System Dashboard for Enterprise Content Management was previously called
FileNet System Manager, System Manager, or Manager Dashboard.
System Dashboard monitors all components in the same console, a useful feature for sites that use
various management consoles.
IBM System Dashboard for Enterprise Content Management runs on the following platforms:
Windows, Solaris, AIX, HPUX (Itanium and PA-RISC), Linux.
Comparison of IBM System Dashboard for Enterprise Content Management and ECM
System Monitor
V10.1
Student Exercises
System Dashboard is easily confused with another product named System Monitor. The confusion
EXNoSideHead
arises because System Monitor allows you to manage the system, while System Dashboard
(formerly known as FileNet System Manager) allows you only to monitor the system.
IBM System Dashboard for Enterprise Content Management is the standard interface used to
access performance data from IBM FileNet products.
Although FileNet System Monitor can access the same data used by IBM System Dashboard for
Enterprise Content Management, FileNet System Monitor is a separately purchased product for
proactive monitoring. FileNet System Monitor supports prevention by maintaining a corrective
action database. You do not need to install Dashboard if you currently have System Monitor
installed.
In addition to providing system information (also provided by System Dashboard), System Monitor
does the following tasks:
System Monitor has a web interface and uses IBM System Dashboard for Enterprise Content
Management data.
Starts and stops components (if directed).
Notifies support personnel through System Management consoles such as the IBM Tivoli
Enterprise Console.
Reads the log files to report error messages and conditions.
Provides alerts for critical errors, such as fault detection.

Student Exercises

Why use System Dashboard?
View system metrics in real time:
Individual components, the system environment, operating systems
Gather and archive performance data, and run reports to do
these tasks:
Generate benchmark data.
Evaluate workload and its effect on system resources.
Observe changes and trends in workloads and resource usage.
Test configuration changes or other tuning efforts.
Diagnose problems.
Target components or processes for optimization.
Integrate system metrics with external applications.
Goal: Use the gathered data to identify and resolve potential
performance problems before they occur.
Figure B-40. Why use System Dashboard? F1156.0
Notes:
The following examples of system metrics are collected by IBM System Dashboard for Enterprise
Content Management:
Component-specific examples: Remote Procedure Calls (RPCs), event times, and custom
metrics.
Environment examples: Configuration, version, patch levels
Operating system examples: CPU usage, memory usage, disk I/O, network I/O
You can run management and trend reports on current and archived data.
You can use performance data to do benchmarking. You can collect data immediately after initial
installation and configuration, and then collect the same information after the system has been
running a while. Compare the initial and current data to check whether the system is maintaining
the same performance level.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead
Monitor Use
P8 Components with Other Tools
System Dashboard
Dashboard Terms (1)

System Dashboard
Configure data collection with clusters and view data for a cluster.
Assign servers and a monitoring frequency to each cluster.
Cluster
A user-defined group of servers that System Dashboard monitors.
Not related to active and passive clusters that are used for business
continuity
A cluster must be defined before monitoring components.
Listener
A component that provides performance data from the monitored
component to System Dashboard
Optionally accumulates and aggregates that data.
Container
It is a node in System Dashboard that groups containers, events, and
meters.
Figure B-41. Dashboard Terms (1) F1156.0
Notes:

Student Exercises
Monitor Use
P8 Components with Other Tools
System Dashboard
Dashboard Terms (2)

Event
An occurrence that happens in the application that is significant.
Examples:
Document checkout
Database lookup
Can have duration
Meter
It is an absolute value of something inside the application software.
Counter
Provides the count of how many events occurred.
Accumulator
Contains the sum of some event-related quantities.
Summarizes data from several events (such as averages).
Example:
Average database lookup duration
Figure B-42. Dashboard Terms (2) F1156.0
Notes:
Events
Event values and accumulator values both stay the same or increase over time.
Example events: a document creation, a document retrieval
Example meter: the number of entries in a cache, the total memory of the Java virtual machine
Example subevents: "success" and "failure" subevents for an event that counts the number of
document creations
Note: Subevents for an event are usually related to each other.
Example accumulator: the duration of an event
An event and duration accumulator example
Every time a document is added to an object store in the Content Platform Engine, the Content
Platform Engine increments the Creations Event by 1 (counting the number of creations). The
Content Platform Engine also adds to a duration accumulator the time that it takes to perform that
operation. During a specified interval, Content Platform Engine creates three documents. The time
that it takes to create these documents was 30 milliseconds, 40 milliseconds, and 35 milliseconds.
V10.1
Student Exercises
During that collection interval, the Creations Event is increased by 3, and the subordinate duration
EXNoSideHead
accumulator is increased by 105 (30 + 40 + 35). System Dashboard divides 105 by 3 to obtain an
average value of 35 milliseconds for each creation operation during that period of time. System
Dashboard displays this average value along with the minimum value (30), maximum value (40),
and standard deviation of the duration value over that interval.
Note: This example uses milliseconds for simplicity. The Listeners actually report durations in
nanoseconds, which were divided by 1 million to produce the millisecond values.

Student Exercises
System Dashboard Structure
Navigation tabs
Listener
Container
Data area
Event.
Accumulator,
or Meter node
Details view
Message area
Figure B-43. System Dashboard Structure F1156.0
Notes:
Help path
IBM FileNet P8 Version 5.2 Information Center
The graphic shows the Details view of System Dashboard.
In the Details view of IBM System Dashboard, the container node in the tree is shown as a folder,
and the event and accumulator nodes in the tree are shown as filled circles. Content Platform
Engine has a separate container node for each object store under USER. The object store
container node provides access to all the counters for that object store.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead
Components of System Dashboard

Dashboard, used to configure data collection and to view data
Configure data collection with clusters and view data for a cluster.
Assign servers and a monitoring frequency to each cluster.
Manager
Connects to and retrieves and processes data from a Listener.
Listener utilities that gather and save component data
They send the data to System Dashboard when queried or scheduled.
They are built-in for the core IBM FileNet engines.
Data Archiving options
Use Archiving Manager to save data in compressed log files.
Archiver.jar stores the data of one Listener to its own log file (1:1).
You can use Java and C++ APIs to build custom Listeners for
custom applications, and to report their performance data.
Figure B-44. Components of System Dashboard F1156.0
Notes:
Help path
IBM FileNet P8 Version 5.2 Information Center > System overview > FileNet P8 architecture >
Administrative components > System Dashboard for Enterprise Content Management
Multiple Dashboards can talk to one Listener, and multiple Listeners can talk to one Dashboard.
After creating a cluster in System Dashboard, you can also save the cluster as a file
(clustername.xml) for use in later monitoring sessions.
Manager
Manager connects to and retrieves reports from a listener and processes the collected data,
such as storing it, displaying it graphically, or using it to perform other application-specific tasks.
Dashboard provides two Managers: Dashboard and Archiving Manager.
Listeners
Listeners continuously collect data from monitored components. This time period is the collection
interval and it is specified in seconds. The data collected is discarded when it becomes older than

Student Exercises
permitted for the component it is monitoring. The data sent to System Dashboard must be archived
in order to accumulate historical data for use in reporting and analysis.
A listener waits passively for Managers to connect to it and to inquire about its performance counter
values. In the absence of a Manager connection, the presence of a listener component is nearly
invisible to an outside observer. Dashboard offers Java and Microsoft C++ implementations of the
listener.
The type of data collected by the Listener depends on the component or application that the
Listener is monitoring. Each Listener collects either automatic data (CPU, network, and disk
statistics) or application-specific data, which is determined by its developers.
Many IBM products for enterprise content management come with System Dashboard and
Listeners for their core engines or application, for example:
IBM FileNet Content Manager
IBM FileNet Image Manager
IBM Enterprise Records
IBM FileNet Workplace XT
Data Archiving options provide the following two ways to save captured performance data to
compressed log files:
Within System Dashboard, you can right-click a Listener node in the tree view on the Details screen
and archive the data collected by the Listener to a history file.
From a command prompt, you can use the Archiving Manager to archive data (historical and
on-going) from a given host. The use of commands makes the archive process available for use in
scripts and recurring events, for example.
Use the APIs to write Listeners for custom programs and integrate them with the IBM System
Dashboard for Enterprise Content Management framework. Integrated applications can then be
monitored alongside the IBM FileNet P8 components. Specific ways to use the API include the
following:
Create a program that archives the performance and system data into a database.
Expose the data through standard protocols including JMX and SNMP to enterprise system
management consoles, such as IBM Tivoli Monitoring and HP OpenView.
Create a custom Dashboard.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead
Average and Rate Meters

In previous System Dashboard versions, some counters
frequently displayed zero values because the rate of display in
System Dashboard was faster than the reporting rate.
Users saw multiple rows with zeros.
Average and rate meters provide information for performance
analysis.
Simple moving average meter
Provides an average for the last 15 minutes
Used for long running transactions
Rate of progress meter
Computes the rate per-minute for a counter that is based on the last
15 minutes
Used for counters like objects indexed per-minute
Figure B-45. Average and Rate Meters F1156.0
Notes:
Help path
IBM FileNet P8 Version 5.2 Information Center > Administering FileNet P8 > Performance
tuning IBM FileNet P8 components > Tuning IBM FileNet P8 Content Platform Engine > Tuning
IBM Content Search Services > Tuning operating system resources for indexing performance
> Monitoring system performance
Average and Rate meters provide more useful data for long running transactions, such as Content
Search Services indexing.
Moving average and rate of progress meters provide useful information. For example:
The average amount of time it takes to full index an object making it available for full text
searches, beginning from the time an object is submitted/created in Content Platform Engine.
The ability to determine the impact of a configuration change such as adding a new CSS server
or Index Area. The Objects Indexed per-Minute counter provides a way to monitor the impact
of the change.
Determine whether a chronic indexing failure problem exists. Retries of indexing batches and
retries of object indexing failures.

Student Exercises
Provide detail analysis by using a break out view of counters by type of text extraction, CSS
server, index job, Index Area, and other factors. Provides useful insight, such as whether an
issue with a specific index area exists.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead
Overview of CSS Counters

Index Job
Rates of index requests submitted and indexed per-minute.
Includes a subbreakout for each individual job.
Indexing Batch
Counters for the tasks that are indexing data to the full text
indexes.
Includes a subbreakout by index area.
Search
Full text search counters which include the number of worker
threads, number of full text indexes searched.
Object Store searches can span many full text indexes and
CSS servers.
Text Extraction
Example: Number of text extractions performed per-minute.
Includes a subbreakout by text extraction type.
Figure B-46. Overview of CSS Counters F1156.0
Notes:
The functional areas reported by the CSS server are:
Index Search, which provides search counters by the CSS server and a specific index. This
area is not a representation of the cost of the user CBR search. For User CBR search
information you must view the object store search counters.
Indexing Batch, which provides counters for the tasks that index data for full text indexes.

Student Exercises
Get started with System Dashboard

Use Start menu in Windows, Dashboard shell script in UNIX.
You must use a cluster in order to view Listener data.
A cluster can contain one or more servers.
It normally contains all servers that are related to a particular
application.
All Listeners on the servers in a cluster are discovered automatically.
You can define any number of clusters.
To define a cluster, do the following steps:
Name the cluster and add the servers.
Specify how often Listener data is accumulated.
Optional steps
Override the time span for summary data collection.
Override the number of data points.
Save the settings in an XML file to reuse the cluster.
Figure B-47. Get started with System Dashboard F1156.0
Notes:
Start System Dashboard
To start IBM System Dashboard for Enterprise Content Management in Windows, click Start >
Programs > IBM FileNet P8 Platform > Dashboard. To start IBM System Dashboard for Enterprise
Content Management in UNIX, start the manager shell script called Dashboard from the directory
that contains the required JAR files.
Clusters: You can create a single cluster that defines all your hosts. Or you can create multiple
clusters, one cluster for each service. In this case, the cluster is a logical grouping of servers that
you want to view together, because only when all of them are working well is the service working
well. By defining a cluster for each service, you can view just the data for the servers and
components that support one service rather than seeing all the hosts at the same time.
Example: You define a cluster for a mortgage service and another cluster for a bank accounts
service. Each cluster consists of the servers that customers can connect to for information on their
mortgage and their bank accounts, respectively. The bank cluster consists of an Application Engine,
Content Platform Engine, and Process Services combination. The mortgage cluster includes
multiple instances of each engine.
V10.1
Student Exercises
The cluster allows you to concurrently monitor the performance metrics of applications that run on
EXNoSideHead
the servers included in the cluster. System Dashboard uses an automatic discovery process to find
the Listeners running on the specified hosts.
Tip: Use cluster names that describe their functions.
Each cluster definition includes an Interval setting, which defines how frequently data is sampled
from the applications within that cluster. If the interval is not defined, IBM System Dashboard for
Enterprise Content Management accepts samples at the Listener default sampling rate. If multiple
Listeners are used, they can be configured with different polling schedules. In that case, it is best to
define the interval so that data is aggregated at a consistent interval.
Tip: The Image Manager and workflow system Listeners ignore the interval setting. Their interval is
determined by the polling schedule set in the configuration file perf_mon.script.
Each cluster definition includes a data points value. This value specifies how many data blocks are
saved in memory by IBM System Dashboard for Enterprise Content Management . The interval
setting does not affect the data points value.
Edit the Max Data Points value to overwrite the default, which is 500. This value is the default
number of interval details that Dashboard keeps in the display.
Edit the TCP port numbers (only if necessary).

Student Exercises
Use Listener Options and View Data

In Details, right-click Listener node and click an option.
Query it for the health status (heartbeat) of its application.
Query it for the uptime of its application.
Save (archive) the data that the Listener gathers.
Send a custom message to the Listener.
Disconnect a Listener (if its historical data is not needed).
Request user list (provides a list of all users signed in by name).
View accumulator data in tables and charts.
Select the accumulator node and view data numerically.
Or right-click the accumulator node and click a chart option.
Move and size the graph window as you like.
Select Chart in the graph window, select other graph option, click
OK, and view the data as you selected the view.
Figure B-48. Use Listener Options and View Data F1156.0
Notes:
The Request user list option is available only for the Content Platform Engine.
Typically, you disconnect Listeners that are monitoring stopped components when you are no
longer interested in their historical data the data is archived. If you reconnect to a Listener after
disconnecting from it, you must stop and start System Dashboard.
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead
Activities
Unit: System Maintenance
Lesson: Use System Dashboard
Activities:
Monitor the System State
Run Dashboard Reports
Reconnect a Listener
Notes:

Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Exercise
EXNoSideHead B.8, "Use System Dashboard"
Overview

The IBM System Dashboard tool is installed on a machine within your IBM
FileNet P8 Content Manager system. You need to know how to use this tool
to monitor the components of your system.
Activities
Monitor the System State: Activity, on page B-111
Run Dashboard Reports: Procedure, on page B-117
Reconnect a Listener: Practice, on page B-121
User accounts

Administrator
Note

Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Monitor
EXNoSideHead the System State: Activity
Introduction
In this activity, you use IBM System Dashboard to view Listener data. You
view the system status. You disconnect a Listener and then reconnect it.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Start the simulation program," on page B-111
Procedure 2, "Define a cluster," on page B-111
Procedure 3, "Check component status," on page B-113
Procedure 4, "View counter data," on page B-114
Procedure 5, "Find CBR counter information," on page B-114
Procedure 6, "Disconnect a listener," on page B-115
Procedure 7, "Use the Alerts view for important messages," on page B-115
Procedure 8, "Reconnect a Listener," on page B-116
Procedure 1: Start the simulation program

Use the following instructions to start a program that is named Synth CE Java on your Windows
student system. This Java program is a test program that exercises some of the functions of the
Listener API. Synth CE Java does not interact with the IBM FileNet P8 servers. Because this
program has an embedded Listener, you can monitor it with IBM System Dashboard for ECM.
1. Double-click the demo.bat file in the C:\LabFiles\SystemAdministration folder.
2. Minimize the DOS window and leave the program to run until you complete the activities for this
lesson and are instructed to close it.
Procedure 2: Define a cluster

Define a cluster that allows you to monitor the demonstration application, the Content Engine,
Process Engine, and Workplace XT from your Windows student system.
1. Start IBM System Dashboard for ECM.
a. Click Start > All Programs > IBM FileNet P8 Platform > Dashboard.
Information
No data is shown in the Average Response Time chart or Current Status chart on the Summary tab.
No data is reported because the student system does not yet have clusters.

Student Exercises
2. Define a cluster:
a. Click the Clusters tab.
b. Click New.
c. In the Add Cluster window, type C1 as the cluster name, and click OK.
3. Specify the servers in the cluster:
a. On the Clusters tab, select the cluster that you defined, and click Edit.
b. Click Add to add a new host.
c. In the Add Host field, type ecmedu01.
d. Accept the default number for the Primary Listener Port, 32775.
e. Click OK to enter the server information.
f. Type 5 in the Interval field.
Information
The amount of activity data that you are going to generate while using this cluster is minor
compared to the volume of data generated by a production system. In this step, you reduce the data
collection period to 5 seconds so that the activity data that you generate manually is visible in the
Dashboard.
g. Click OK to save the C1 cluster.

h. Verify that you see messages in the Messages area that indicate a connection.
Information
Connection messages are displayed in the Messages pane at the bottom of the Dashboard
console. Each message identifies a component with an active Listener on the hosts in the cluster.
4. Verify that the following listeners are connected:

- ECMTS (Content Search Services)
- WorkplaceXT
- IBM FileNet Content Platform Engine PVU Non Prod (Content Services)
V10.1
Student Exercises
EXNoSideHead - IBM FileNet Content Platform Engine PVU Non Prod ICF PE (Process Services)
- Synth CE Java (Activity simulator)
5. Save the cluster.
a. Click File > Save Clusters.
b. In the Save window, browse to the My Documents folder.
c. Type C1 as the file name.
d. Click Save.
Procedure 3: Check component status

Use Listener options from the Details view to check whether an application on a server is running
and to check how long the application has been running. The Dashboard is open and the C1 cluster
is loaded.
1. In the IBM System Dashboard for ECM window, open the Details tab.
2. Double-click the C1 cluster node to expand it.
3. Expand the ecmedu01 host node.
Information
A container node represents each component that a Listener monitors. This container node is the
Listener node, and its context menu is the Listener menu. The Listener node has the name of the
monitored component.
4. Check whether the Content Platform Engine is running.

a. Right-click the Listener node for IBM FileNet Content Platform Engine PVU Non Prod.
b. Click Request heartbeat.
c. Verify that you see a new message in the Message area that shows that the listener is up.
Important
Be sure to select the proper node. You might see more than one node that begins with the text IBM
FileNet Content Platform Engine.
Tip: You can expand the left pane to see the entire node names by moving the panel border.
5. Check how long the FileNet P8 Content Engine application has been running.
a. Right-click the Listener node for IBM FileNet Content Platform Engine PVU Non Prod.
b. Click Request uptime.
c. Verify that a message reports how many seconds the Listener has been up (running).

Student Exercises
Procedure 4: View counter data

Each Listener provides data at each sampling interval. You can view the activity on the disk, RPC
calls, and other information in near real time.
1. On the Details tab, expand IBM FileNet Content Platform Engine PVU Non Prod > Disk >
Reads.
2. Observe the Count, Rate Per Second, and Total Count columns.
3. Open and view other counter data:
- IBM FileNet Content Platform Engine PVU Non Prod > CPU > Busy
- IBM FileNet Content Platform Engine PVU Non Prod > CPU > jvm_free_memory
4. Verify that the times in the Time column are configured at 5-second intervals.
a. Scroll to the bottom of the Performance Data table.
b. Observe that a new row is added every 5 seconds.
c. Observe that the times are recorded at 5-second intervals.
Information
You configured the time interval when you defined the C1 cluster.
Procedure 5: Find CBR counter information

Longer term counters are added for Full Text Search indexing jobs. You can find this information for
each index area in the object store node.
1. Expand IBM FileNet Content Platform Engine PVU Non Prod > User > Sales > CBR > Index
Job.
V10.1
Student Exercises
2. Verify that you can find counters that are used for indexing jobs.
EXNoSideHead
Procedure 6: Disconnect a listener

Use this procedure to disconnect the Listener from the application that it is monitoring and review
the results. You are in the Details view, with the C1 node and ecmedu01 expanded.
1. Right-click IBM FileNet Content Platform Engine PVU Non Prod node and click Disconnect this
listener.
2. Verify that the Listener node for IBM FileNet Content Platform Engine PVU Non Prod is no
longer listed.
3. Verify that a disconnect message for the node is displayed in bold text in the Messages pane.
Procedure 7: Use the Alerts view for important messages

Use the Alerts view to check for the critical messages, such as a disconnected Listener.
1. Click the Alerts tab.
2. Verify that the same message that you see in bold text in the Messages pane is also listed in the
Urgent Messages pane.

Student Exercises
Information
The Alerts tab makes it easy for you to find important messages when you are monitoring many
servers over a time, because messages scroll up out of view when they accumulate in the
Messages pane.
3. Select the message in the Urgent Messages pane and click Dismiss.
4. Verify that the Critical disconnection message in the Messages pane at the bottom is still listed.
Procedure 8: Reconnect a Listener

Reload the C1 cluster to reconnect to the Listener for the Content Services.
1. Exit System Dashboard.
2. Restart System Dashboard.
3. Load the C1 cluster.
a. Click File > Open Clusters.
b. Select the C1.xml cluster and click Open.
4. On the Summary tab, select C1.
5. Go to the Details view.
6. Expand the C1 node and the ecmedu01 host node.
7. Verify that all running components with an active Listener on the ecmedu01 server have a
Listener node under ecmedu01, including IBM FileNet Content Platform Engine PVU Non Prod.
8. Verify that the connection messages in the Messages pane for the listed components, including
a connection message for IBM FileNet Content Platform Engine PVU Non Prod.
9. Leave System Dashboard open for the next exercise.
V10.1
Student Exercises
Run
EXNoSideHead Dashboard Reports: Procedure
Introduction
In this activity, you use all the reporting features of IBM System Dashboard.
You create a report template and then verify the template works s designed
by using it to run a report. You then archive and report Listener data.
Procedures
Procedure 1, "Create a report template," on page B-117
Procedure 2, "Run a report," on page B-118
Procedure 3, "Examine the report," on page B-118
Procedure 4, "Archive and report Listener data," on page B-119
Procedure 5, "Run a report on archived data," on page B-120
Procedure 6, "Inspect a report on archived data," on page B-120
Procedure 1: Create a report template

In this procedure, you configure a report template by selecting the counters to be included in the
report content.
1. Start IBM System Dashboard if it is not already started.
2. Create a report template;
a. Open the Reports tab.
b. Click New.
c. Name the template: CPE Template.
d. Click OK.
3. Select data to be included in the report:
a. Click Edit.
b. Expand C1 > ecmedu01 > IBM FileNet Content Platform Engine PVU Non Prod > CPU.
Hint
Expand the window to see the full names of the Listeners.
c. Select jvm_total_memory.
d. Click Add to Template.
e. Select IBM FileNet Content Platform Engine PVU Non Prod > RPC > ExecuteChanges >
Requests.

Student Exercises
f. Click Add With Children.

g. Select IBM FileNet Content Platform Engine PVU Non Prod > RPC > ExecuteChanges >
Requests In Progress.
h. Click Add to Template
4. Click OK to complete edits.
5. Save the report template:
a. Click File > Save Report Templates As.
b. Browse to My Documents.
c. Type CPE_Template as the template name.
d. Click Save.
Procedure 2: Run a report

In this procedure, you modify the report template to accommodate the current need for data, and
then run and examine the report.
1. From the Reports tab, select the report template, CPE_Template.
2. Click Run.
3. Specify the report parameters in the CPE Template window:
a. Select C1 > ecmedu01 > IBM FileNet Content Platform Engine PVU Non Prod.
b. Select the following options for the report in the Options pane:
Environment
Average
Sum
c. Type 1 in the Length in hours field.
4. Save the report as a file:
a. Click the ellipsis button (...) next to the Output To field.
b. Browse to My Documents.
c. Type CPE_Report for the file name.
d. Click Save.
5. Click Run.
Procedure 3: Examine the report

1. Using Windows Explorer, go to My Documents.
V10.1
Student Exercises
2. Open CPE_Report.csv by using WordPad.

EXNoSideHead
Information
The data is presented in the following sequence:

Environment variables
Metric headings
Data for the duration specified
The average and sum of each metric
3. Close the report file.
Procedure 4: Archive and report Listener data

In this procedure, you archive the data that the Listener collected within the last 48 hours.
Afterward, you run a report of the archived data.
1. Archive the data that is collected by the Listener by using the archive defaults:
a. In the System Dashboard, open the Details tab.
b. Expand C1 > ecmedu01.
c. Right click IBM FileNet Content Platform Engine PVU Non Prod and then click Archive
history.
d. Browse to My Documents.
e. Type CPE_Archive for the file name.
f. Click Save.
g. Wait for the History archived message.
h. Click OK.
Information
The CPE_Archive file is a proprietary binary file that is used to generate views and reports of
archived data.
2. Add the archive file to the Archives cluster.

a. From the Details view, click File > Open Archive.
b. Select My Documents > CPE_Archive.
c. Click Open.
d. Wait for the archive to open.

Student Exercises
e. Double-click the Archives cluster that is displayed in the tree view pane.
f. Expand the ecmedu01 > IBM FileNet Content Platform Engine PVU Non Prod node.
Note
The label for the IBM FileNet Content Platform Engine PVU Non Prod container in the Archives
cluster is red and contains the message currently unavailable. This message exists because the
node is not displaying data from an active Listener connection.
3. View the archived data by selecting and expanding nodes under the IBM FileNet Content
Platform Engine PVU Non Prod container.
Procedure 5: Run a report on archived data

1. Open the Reports tab.
2. Select the CPE_Template and then click Run.
3. Expand the Archives > ecmedu01 node.
4. Select IBM FileNet Content Platform Engine PVU Non Prod.
5. Select all of the options in the Options pane.
6. Type 2 in the Length in hours field.
7. Click the ellipsis (...) beside the Output To field.
8. Browse to My Documents.
9. Type CPE_Archive_Report as the file name.
10. Click Save and then click Run.
11. Close System Dashboard.
12. If demo.bat is still running, stop it by closing the window.
Procedure 6: Inspect a report on archived data

1. Use Windows Explorer to go to My Documents/
2. Open CPE_Archive_Report.csv by using WordPad.
3. Inspect the file.
4. Close the file when you are finished.
V10.1
Student Exercises
Reconnect
EXNoSideHead a Listener: Practice
Introduction
In this exercise, you observe the Dashboard when one of the monitored
components goes offline. You then restart the component and restart the
Listener.
Scenario
The Content Search Services server goes offline after a power fluctuation.
The server was restarted. You observe the changes to the system remotely
by using the System Dashboard.
Challenge
Start System Dashboard.
Use Windows Services to stop the CSS Server service.
View the Dashboard messages.
Request a heartbeat from each Listener.
Determine which Listener is offline.
Use Windows Services to restart the CSS Server service.
Restart the Listener for CSS Service.
Verification
Verify that you can find information about the ECMTS Listener going down,
either in the Messages window, or in the Alerts tab.
Verify that you can get a heartbeat from the ECMTS Listener after you restart
the ECMTS Listener.

Student Exercises
Summary
Started System Dashboard.
Created a cluster.
Viewed Listener status.
Viewed Listener data.
Disconnected and reconnected a Listener.
Ran a report.
Archived Listener data.
Ran a report on archived data.
V10.1
Student Exercises
Appendix C. Answers to Written Exercises

EXNoSideHead
Introduction
This appendix includes answers to quizzes from the course.
Answers
"Answers to "Identify functions of IBM FileNet Content Manager
solutions: Written exercise" on page 1-5" on page C-3
"Answers to "Explore the architecture: Interactive exercise" on page 1-7"
on page C-5
"Answers to "Identify system components: Written exercise" on
page 1-11" on page C-7
Copyright IBM Corp. 2013, 2015 Appendix C. Answers to Written Exercises C-1
Student Exercises
C-2 System Implementation and Administration Copyright IBM Corp. 2013, 2015
V10.1
Student Exercises
Answers
EXNoSideHead to "Identify functions of IBM FileNet Content Manager
solutions: Written exercise" on page 1-5
Introduction
Identify the functions of IBM FileNet Content Manager solutions. For each question, indicate the
correct answer or the best answer.
1. Which product is the core of the IBM FileNet P8 family of products?
a. IBM Case Manager
b. IBM Content Manager
c. IBM FileNet Content Manager
d. IBM Content Federation Services
Answer = c
2. Which two clients connect to IBM FileNet Content Manager by using FileNet Collaboration
Services?
a. Microsoft Office and SharePoint
b. IBM Connections and Lotus Quickr
c. IBM Content Manager OnDemand and SAP
d. IBM Enterprise Records and IBM Case Manager
Answer = b
3. A user can tag managed objects by using which client?
a. IBM Connections
b. FileNet Workplace XT
c. Administration Console for the Content Platform Engine
d. Application Engine
Answer = a
4. IBM FileNet Content Manager is the former name of the product IBM Content Manager.
True or False?
Answer = False
Student Exercises
V10.1
Student Exercises
Answers
EXNoSideHead to "Explore the architecture: Interactive exercise" on
page 1-7
Questions
Select the best answer.
1. Where does the component integrator for non-legacy components run?
a. Application Engine.
b. FileNet Workplace XT.
c. Rendition Engine.
d. Content Platform Engine.
Answer = d
2. Which product uses OLAP cubes?
a. Case Analyzer
b. Rendition Engine
c. Datacap
d. Image Services Resource Adapter
Answer = a
3. Rendition is based on which product?
a. Adobe PDF Maker.
b. Liquent InSight Rendering
c. FileNet Image Services
d. Datacap
Answer = b
4. What controls document security after it is declared as a record?
a. A security template
b. A record template
c. A record object
d. A security object
Answer = c
5. What protocol does the Content Platform Engine use to communicate with the Rules Listener?
a. SOAP
b. TCP/IP
c. RPC
Student Exercises
d. HTTP
Answer = b
V10.1
Student Exercises
Answers
EXNoSideHead to "Identify system components: Written exercise" on
page 1-11
Introduction
Identify the function of each system component. For each question, indicate the correct answer or
the best answer.
1. The Content Platform Engine handles process management services.
True or False?
Answer = True
2. Which component is not an IBM FileNet P8 component?
a. Rendition Engine
b. Content Navigator
c. Object store
d. Directory service
Answer = d
3. What is the primary administration tool for the Content Platform Engine?
a. Administration Console for the Content Platform Engine
b. FileNet Enterprise Manager
c. Configuration Manager
d. Deployment Manager
Answer = a
4. You can log in to Administration Console for the Content Platform Engine, but you cannot see
any of the object stores. Which cause is most likely?
a. The application server is down.
b. IBM FileNet Content Manager is down.
c. The directory service is down.
d. The RDBMS is down.
Answer = d
Student Exercises
Answers to "Select a Property for an Index Partition: Written Exercise"

on page 6-35
Read the notes for each property and then circle the property that would
make best candidate for a string index partition.
Property Notes
Inherited from the Document class.
String data type.
Document title
Occasionally used in searches.
System property.
String data type.
ID
Globally unique identifier.
Never used in searches.
Custom property.
String data type.
customer_name
Custom property.
String data type.
customer_id
Large number of values that are unique.
Custom property.
String data type.
po_number
Small number of values that are non-unique.
Custom property.
String data type.
product_id
Currently unused.
Not used in searches.
Custom property.
service_date DateTime data type.
Sometimes used in searches.
ANSWER po_number
V10.1
backpg
Back page

IBM Training Filenet CM 5-2 Implementation and Administration - Excercises PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

IBM Training Filenet CM 5-2 Implementation and Administration - Excercises PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

IBM Training Filenet CM 5-2 Implementation and Administration - Excercises PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

V10.

IBM Training Front cover

IBM FileNet Content Manager 5.2: System Implementation and

May 2015 edition

Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2013, 2015.

TOC Table of Contents

Unit 0. Course introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-1

Unit 1. Introduction to IBM FileNet Content Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Copyright IBM Corp. 2013, 2015 Table of Contents iii

Folders and documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-50

Unit 2. Build an Object Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1

iv System Implementation and Administration Copyright IBM Corp. 2013, 2015

TOC Use Storage Policies to Distribute the Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

Unit 3. Extend Content Platform Engine Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Copyright IBM Corp. 2013, 2015 Table of Contents v

Steps to create an Event Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15

Unit 4. Configure IBM Content Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1

Unit 5. Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1

vi System Implementation and Administration Copyright IBM Corp. 2013, 2015

TOC Lesson 5.3. Configure Object Store Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

Unit 6. Optimizing Search Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Copyright IBM Corp. 2013, 2015 Table of Contents vii

TOC Create an index area object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64

Unit 7. Deploy Assets with FileNet Deployment Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Copyright IBM Corp. 2013, 2015 Table of Contents ix

Lesson 7.3. Retrieve source and destination half maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-41

Unit 8. Manage Sweep Jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1

x System Implementation and Administration Copyright IBM Corp. 2013, 2015

TOC Filter Expression Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

Unit 9. System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Copyright IBM Corp. 2013, 2015 Table of Contents xi

Web Application Server Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37

Copyright IBM Corp. 2013, 2015 Trademarks xiii

Unit 1. Introduction to IBM FileNet Content

Why is this lesson important?

Type User ID Password

Passwords are always case-sensitive.

3. Rendition is based on which product?

Why is this lesson important?

Type User ID Password

Passwords are always case-sensitive.

2. Which component is not an IBM FileNet P8 component?

Procedure 1: Start WebSphere Application Server

Procedure 2: View the Content Engine Startup Context page

Procedure 3: Open the Content Platform Engine log files

Procedure 4: View the Process Engine Server Information (Ping Page)

EXNoSideHead - User name: P8Admin

Procedure 5: View web applications

The URL is a secure location. Do not forget to include the s in https.

2. Log in to WebSphere Integrated Solutions Console as P8Admin.

Procedure 6: Shutdown individual components

c. Stop these two database services.

Procedure 1: Check Content Platform Engine status

Procedure 2: Check object store connectivity

Procedure 3: Check the workflow system

1. Log on to FileNet Workplace XT as P8Admin.

EXNoSideHead b. Log on as P8Admin

Why is this lesson important?

Type User ID Password